CLI Reference Guide

ManualsBrandsDell ManualsComputer AccessoriesPOWEREDGE M1000E

Dell PowerConnect

PCM6220, PCM6348, PCM8024,

PCM8024-k

CLI Reference Guide

Regulatory Model: PCM6220, PCM6348,

PCM8024, PCM8024-k

2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM

Summary of content (1682 pages)

PAGE 1
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 2
CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 2 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Notes NOTE: A Note indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. ____________________ Information in this publication is subject to change without notice. © 2011 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
PAGE 3
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 3 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Contents 1 Command Groups Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Command Groups Mode Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Layer 2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Layer 3 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 4
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 4 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 3 Layer 2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 4 AAA Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Commands in this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aaa authentication dot1x default . . . . . . . . . . . 218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 aaa authentication enable . aaa authentication login . aaa authorization network default radius . . . . . . . 223 . . . . . .
PAGE 5
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 5 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show users login-history username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 username password encrypted username unlock 5 ACL Commands ACL Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 6
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 6 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM clear mac address-table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mac address-table aging-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . mac address-table multicast filtering . . . . . . . . . mac address-table multicast forbidden address 260 261 262 . . . 263 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 mac address-table multicast forbidden forward-unregistered mac address-table multicast forward-all . . . . . . . 265 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 7
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 7 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show mac address-table vlan . show ports security . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 show ports security addresses 7 Auto-VoIP Commands Commands in this Chapter . show switchport voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Commands in this Chapter . . . . . . . 291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 . . . . . .
PAGE 8
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 8 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 9 Data Center Bridging Commands . . . . . 303 . . . . . . . . . 303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 clear priority-flow-control statistics datacenter-bridging priority-flow-control mode on . priority-flow-control priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 show interfaces datacenter-bridging . . . . . . . . . 10 DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands . Commands in this Chapter . . . . . . . 311 . .
PAGE 9
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 9 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show dhcp lease . 12 DHCP Snooping Commands . Commands in this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . 325 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clear ip dhcp snooping binding 326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . clear ip dhcp snooping statistics ip dhcp snooping . 321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 ip dhcp snooping binding ip dhcp snooping database . . . . . . .
PAGE 10
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 10 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM arp access-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clear ip arp inspection statistics . . . . . . . . . . . 342 ip arp inspection filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 ip arp inspection limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 ip arp inspection trust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 ip arp inspection validate ip arp inspection vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 11
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 11 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show logging email statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 clear logging email statistics security . mail-server ip-address | hostname 366 . . . . . . . . . . . port (Mail Server Configuration Mode) 367 . . . . . . . . . username (Mail Server Configuration Mode) . . . . . . 367 password (Mail Server Configuration Mode) . . . . . .
PAGE 12
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 12 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show interfaces status . show statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 show statistics switchport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 show storm-control shutdown . speed . storm-control broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 13
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 13 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ethernet cfm mip level . ping ethernet cfm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 traceroute ethernet cfm show ethernet cfm errors 418 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local 419 . . . . . show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote . . . . 420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 14
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 14 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 18 IGMP Snooping Commands . . . . . . . . . . 437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Commands in this Chapter . ip igmp snooping (global) ip igmp snooping (interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ip igmp snooping host-time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . ip igmp snooping leave-time-out . . . . . . . . . . . ip igmp snooping mrouter-time-out show ip igmp snooping 440 441 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 15
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 15 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip igmp snooping querier query-interval . . . . . . . . 454 . . . . . . . . . 455 . . . . . . . . . . . 455 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 ip igmp snooping querier timer expiry ip igmp snooping querier version . show ip igmp snooping querier 20 IP Addressing Commands Commands in this Chapter . clear host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 16
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 16 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show ip address-conflict show ip helper-address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 21 IPv6 Access List Commands . . . . . . . . . 477 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Commands in this Chapter .
PAGE 17
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 17 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ipv6 mld snooping groups . 495 . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 IPv6 MLD Snooping Querier Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Commands in this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 ipv6 mld snooping querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ipv6 mld snooping querier (VLAN mode) ipv6 mld snooping querier address . . . . . . . . 500 . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 18
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 18 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 25 iSCSI Optimization Commands . . . . . . . . 513 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Commands in this Chapter . iscsi aging time iscsi cos iscsi enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iscsi target port show iscsi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 19
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 19 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM clear lldp statistics lldp notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 lldp notification-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 lldp receive lldp timers lldp transmit lldp transmit-mgmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 20
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 20 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM mvr immediate mvr type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 mvr vlan group show mvr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 show mvr members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 show mvr interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 21
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 21 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Port Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 LAG Hashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Enhanced LAG Hashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Aggregation of LAGs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 Commands in this Chapter . channel-group interface port-channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 22
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 22 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 31 Port Monitor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 Commands in this Chapter . monitor session show monitor session 32 QoS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 Access Control Lists . Layer 2 ACLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 23
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 23 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM cos-queue min-bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 cos-queue random-detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 cos-queue strict diffserv . drop. mark cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mark ip-dscp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 24
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 24 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM match srcip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 match srcip6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 match srcl4port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 match vlan mirror . police-simple. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 .
PAGE 25
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 25 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show service-policy . traffic-shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 33 RADIUS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands in this Chapter . 653 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 aaa accounting network default start-stop group radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 acct-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 auth-port .
PAGE 26
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 26 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show aaa servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show radius statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 source-ip . 34 Spanning Tree Commands Commands in this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 27
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 27 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM spanning-tree guard . spanning-tree loopguard spanning-tree max-age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 spanning-tree max-hops . spanning-tree mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 spanning-tree mst configuration spanning-tree mst cost . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699 spanning-tree mst port-priority . . .
PAGE 28
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 28 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show tacacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tacacs-server host . tacacs-server key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 tacacs-server timeout timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 36 VLAN Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 Double VLAN Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 29
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 29 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show dvlan-tunnel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729 show interfaces switchport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735 show port protocol . show vlan show vlan association mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show vlan association subnet . switchport access vlan 736 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 30
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 30 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM vlan protocol group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vlan protocol group add protocol vlan protocol group name . . . . . . . . . . . 752 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753 vlan protocol group remove vlan routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754 37 Voice VLAN Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 31
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 31 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM dot1x mac-auth-bypass dot1x max-req . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 dot1x max-users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770 dot1x port-control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 dot1x re-authenticate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dot1x reauthentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dot1x system-auth-control monitor 773 . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 32
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 32 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM dot1x unauth-vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show dot1x advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . radius-server attribute 4 . 794 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 40 ARP Commands Commands in this Chapter . arp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 33
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 33 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 41 DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands in this Chapter . 811 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 ip dhcp pool bootfile . . . . . . . . clear ip dhcp binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816 clear ip dhcp conflict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 34
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 34 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM next-server . option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832 service dhcp sntp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836 show ip dhcp binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837 show ip dhcp conflict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838 show ip dhcp global configuration show ip dhcp pool . .
PAGE 35
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 35 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ipv6 dhcp interface (Privileged EXEC) show ipv6 dhcp pool . . . . . . . 854 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857 show ipv6 dhcp statistics 43 DVMRP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands in this Chapter . ip dvmrp 858 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 ip dvmrp metric show ip dvmrp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 36
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 36 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip igmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ip igmp last-member-query-count . . . . . . . . . . . ip igmp last-member-query-interval . ip igmp query-interval 876 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877 . . . . . . . . . . 878 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879 ip igmp startup-query-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ip igmp startup-query-interval . 880 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881 . . . .
PAGE 37
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 37 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip igmp-proxy interface . show ip igmp-proxy groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894 show ip igmp-proxy groups detail 47 IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands . Commands in this Chapter . . . . . 897 899 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 38
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 38 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Static Reject Routes Default Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916 Commands in this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919 encapsulation ip address ip mtu . ip netdirbcast. ip route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 39
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 39 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 49 IPv6 PIM Commands ipv6 pim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ipv6 pim sparse (Global config) ipv6 pim dense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940 ipv6 pim bsr-border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ipv6 pim bsr-candidate ipv6 pim dr-priority . 942 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 40
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 40 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 50 IPv6 Routing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 959 IPv6 Limitations & Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . 959 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961 ipv6 address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962 ipv6 enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963 Commands in this Chapter . clear ipv6 neighbors .
PAGE 41
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 41 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ipv6 nd other-config-flag ipv6 nd prefix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975 ipv6 nd ra-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977 ipv6 nd ra-lifetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 ipv6 nd reachable-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 42
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 42 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ipv6 neighbors . show ipv6 route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004 show ipv6 route preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 show ipv6 route summary show ipv6 traffic show ipv6 vlan traceroute ipv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 43
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 43 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip pim dense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ip pim dr-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ip pim hello-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ip pim join-prune-interval . 1026 1027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028 ip pim rp-candidate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030 . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 44
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 44 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip pim rp hash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show ip pim rp mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 IPv6 Multicast Commands . ipv6 pimsm (Global config) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ipv6 pimsm (VLAN Interface config) . ipv6 pimsm bsr-border . 1049 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 45
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 45 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 54 OSPF Commands Route Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OSPF Equal Cost Multipath (ECMP) . . . . . . . . . . 1065 1066 1066 Forwarding of OSPF Opaque LSAs Enabled by Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passive Interfaces . Graceful Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068 Commands in this Chapter . . . .
PAGE 46
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 46 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM area virtual-link hello-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . area virtual-link retransmit-interval . . . . . . . . . . 1084 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086 area virtual-link transmit-delay auto-cost bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . capability opaque clear ip ospf 1088 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 47
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 47 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip ospf network ip ospf priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103 ip ospf retransmit-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 48
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 48 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip ospf interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show ip ospf interface brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show ip ospf interface stats . 1131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135 show ip ospf statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136 show ip ospf stub table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137 show ip ospf virtual-link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 49
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 49 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM area virtual-link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154 area virtual-link dead-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156 area virtual-link hello-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156 area virtual-link retransmit-interval . . . . . . . . . 1157 . . . . . . . . . . . 1158 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159 default-metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160 distance ospf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 50
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 50 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ipv6 router ospf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172 maximum-paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174 nsf nsf helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nsf helper strict-lsa-checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177 nsf restart-interval .
PAGE 51
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 51 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ipv6 ospf neighbor . show ipv6 ospf range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198 show ipv6 ospf stub table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show ipv6 ospf virtual-links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show ipv6 ospf virtual-link brief . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Router Discovery Protocol Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands in this Chapter . ip irdp . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 52
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 52 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM default-metric distance rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215 distribute-list out . enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217 hostroutesaccept . ip rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218 ip rip authentication . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 53
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 53 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM tunnel source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pingable VRRP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VRRP Route/Interface Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238 vrrp accept-mode . .
PAGE 54
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 54 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show vrrp interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show vrrp interface brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254 show vrrp interface stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256 ip vrrp accept-mode show ip vrrp interface 60 Utility Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Auto-Install Commands Commands in this Chapter . boot auto-copy-sw . .
PAGE 55
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 55 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM captive-portal enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274 http port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . https port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show captive-portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show captive-portal status block 1275 1275 1276 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 56
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 56 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show captive-portal interface client status . . . . . . 1288 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291 show captive-portal interface configuration status . . . . . . clear captive-portal users . no user show captive-portal user user group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293 user-logout .
PAGE 57
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 57 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM macro global apply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307 macro global trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308 macro global description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309 macro apply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310 macro trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311 macro description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show parser macro 64 Clock Commands Real-time Clock . . . . .
PAGE 58
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 58 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM clock timezone hours-offset . no clock timezone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326 clock summer-time recurring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330 clock summer-time date . no clock summer-time . show clock . 65 Command Line Configuration Scripting Commands . . . . . . .
PAGE 59
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 59 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341 1347 delete backup-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348 delete backup-image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348 delete startup-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1350 dir erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 60
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 60 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM dos-control tcpflag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366 dos-control tcpfrag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366 ip icmp echo-reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367 ip icmp error-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369 ip unreachables ip redirects . ipv6 icmp error-interval . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 61
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 61 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM management access-list permit (management) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383 show management access-class show management access-list 70 Mode Commands . configure terminal . do . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 62
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 62 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM passwords strength minimum uppercase-letters . . . 1396 passwords strength minimum lowercase-letters . . . 1397 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398 passwords strength minimum numeric-characters passwords strength minimum special-characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399 passwords strength max-limit consecutive-characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 63
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 63 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 73 RMON Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands in this Chapter . rmon alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413 rmon collection history rmon event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417 show rmon alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show rmon alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 64
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 64 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM debug auto-voip debug clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441 debug console debug dot1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442 debug igmpsnooping . debug ip acl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 debug ip dvmrp . debug ip igmp . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 65
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 65 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM debug ospfv3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457 debug ping . debug rip . debug sflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . debug spanning-tree . debug vrrp 1458 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459 show debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 66
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 66 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show snmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show snmp engineID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475 show snmp filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476 show snmp group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1478 show snmp user show snmp views show trapflags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1480 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 67
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 67 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM crypto key generate dsa . crypto key generate rsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502 crypto key pubkey-chain ssh ip ssh port . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504 ip ssh pubkey-auth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 68
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 68 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM logging buffered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522 logging console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1525 logging file . logging on logging snmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . logging web-session . port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 69
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 69 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip address none . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ip address {dhcp/bootp} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544 login-banner member . motd-banner nsf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1547 ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 70
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 70 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show supported cardtype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show supported switchtype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567 show switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569 show system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577 show system id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show system power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . show system temperature show users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 71
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 71 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 82 Terminal Length Commands terminal length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Time Ranges Commands time-range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599 1599 1601 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601 absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602 periodic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603 show time-range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 72
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 72 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM crypto certificate generate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1618 crypto certificate import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619 crypto certificate request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622 duration. ip http port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ip http server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ip http secure-certificate ip http secure-port 1624 . .
PAGE 73
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 73 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 1 Command Groups Introduction The Command Line Interface (CLI) is a network management application operated through an ASCII terminal without the use of a Graphic User Interface (GUI) driven software application. By directly entering commands, the user has greater configuration flexibility. The CLI is a basic command-line interpreter similar to the UNIX C shell.
PAGE 74
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 74 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Groups The system commands can be broken down into three sets of functional groups, Layers 2, Layer 3, and Utility. Table 1-1. System Command Groups Command Group Description Layer 2 Commands AAA Configures connection security including authorization and passwords. ACL Configures and displays ACL information. Address Table Configures bridging address tables. Auto-VoIP Configures Auto VoIP for IP phones on a switch.
PAGE 75
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 75 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Table 1-1. System Command Groups (continued) Command Group Description IPv6 MLD Snooping Querier Configures IPv6 Snooping Querier and displays IPv6 Snooping Querier information. Link Dependency Configures and displays link dependency information. LLDP Configures and displays LLDP information. Port Aggregator Provides server administrators the ability to map internal ports to external ports easily.
PAGE 76
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 76 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Table 1-1. System Command Groups (continued) Command Group Description Loopback Interface (IPv6) Manages Loopback configurations. Multicast (Mcast) Manages Multicasting on the system. OSPF (IPv4) Manages shortest path operations. OSPFv3 (IPv6) Manages IPv6 shortest path operations. Router Discovery Protocol (IPv4) Manages router discovery operations. Routing Information Protocol (IPv4) Configures RIP activities.
PAGE 77
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 77 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Table 1-1. System Command Groups (continued) Command Group Description RMON Can be configured through the CLI and displays RMON information. Serviceability Tracing Controls display of debug output to serial port or telnet console. sFlow Configures sFlow monitoring. SNMP Configures SNMP communities, traps and displays SNMP information. SSH Configures SSH authentication. Syslog Manages and displays syslog messages.
PAGE 78
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 79
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 79 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • v6ACL — IPv6 Access List Configuration • v6CMC — IPv6 Class-Map Configuration • v6DP — IPv6 DHCP Pool Configuration Layer 2 Commands AAA Command Description Modea aaa authentication dot1x default Specifies an authentication method for 802.1x clients. GC aaa authentication enable Defines authentication method lists for accessing higher privilege levels. GC aaa authentication login Defines login authentication.
PAGE 80
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 80 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea show authentication methods Shows information about authentication methods. PE show user accounts Displays information about the local user database. PE show users login-history Displays information about login histories of users. PE username Establishes a username-based authentication system.
PAGE 81
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 81 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description show service-acl interface Displays the status of LLPF rules configured on PE a particular port or on all the ports. show ip access-lists Displays an Access Control List (ACL) and all PE of the rules that are defined for the ACL. show mac access-list Displays a MAC access list and all of the rules that are defined for the ACL. a. PE For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Typeson page 77.
PAGE 82
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 82 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description port security max Configures the maximum addresses that can be IC learned on the port while the port is in port security mode. show mac address-table Displays dynamically created entries in the bridge-forwarding database. PE show mac address-table address Displays all entries in the bridge-forwarding database for the specified MAC address.
PAGE 83
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 83 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM a. For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77. CDP Interoperability Command Description Modea clear isdp counters Clears the ISDP counters. PE clear isdp table Clears entries in the ISDP table. PE isdp advertise-v2 Enables the sending of ISDP version 2 packets from the device. GC isdp enable Enables ISDP on the switch.
PAGE 84
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 84 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Data Center Bridging Command Description Modea clear priority-flow-control statistics Clears all or interface Priority-Flow-Control statistics. PE datacenter-bridging Enters the Data Center Bridging mode. IC priority-flow-control mode Enables Priority-Flow-Control (PFC) on an on interface. DCB priority-flow-control priority DCB Enables the priority group for lossless behavior (PFC enabled).
PAGE 85
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 85 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea renew dhcp Forces the DHCP client to immediately renew an IPv4 address lane. PE debug dhcp packet Displays debug information about DHCPv4 PE client activities and traces DHCP v4 packets to and from the local DHCPv4 client. show dhcp lease Displays IPv4 addresses leased from a DHCP server. a. PE For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77.
PAGE 86
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 86 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea show ip dhcp snooping Displays the DHCP snooping global and per port configuration. PE show ip dhcp snooping binding Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries. PE show ip dhcp snooping database Displays the DHCP snooping configuration related to the database persistence. PE show ip dhcp snooping interfaces Displays the DHCP Snooping status of the interfaces.
PAGE 87
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 87 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea show arp access-list Displays the configured ARP ACLs with the rules. PE show ip arp inspection interfaces Displays the Dynamic ARP Inspection configuration. PE show ip arp inspection interfaces Displays the Dynamic ARP Inspection PE configuration on all the DAI enabled interfaces. show ip arp inspection vlan Displays the Dynamic ARP Inspection configuration on all the VLANs in the given VLAN range.
PAGE 88
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 88 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea show logging email statistics Displays information on how many emails are sent, how many emails failed, when the last email was sent, how long it has been since the last email was sent, how long it has been since the email changed to disabled mode. PE clear logging email statistics Clears the email alerting statistics. GC security Sets the email alerting security protocol.
PAGE 89
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 89 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea interface range Enters the interface configuration mode to execute a command on multiple ports at the same time. GC, IC, IR mtu Enables jumbo frames on an interface by adjusting the maximum size of a packet or maximum transmission unit (MTU). IC show interfaces advertise Displays information about auto negotiation advertisement.
PAGE 90
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 90 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Ethernet CFM Command Description Modea ethernet cfm domain Enters into maintenance domain config mode for an existing domain. Use the optional level parameter to create a domain and enter into maintenance domain config mode. GC service Associates a VLAN with a maintenance domain. MDC ethernet cfm cc level Initiates sending continuity checks (CCMs) at the specified interval and level on a VLAN monitored by an existing domain.
PAGE 91
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 91 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM a. For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77. GVRP Command Description Modea clear gvrp statistics Clears all the GVRP statistics information. PE garp timer Adjusts the GARP application join, leave, and leaveall GARP timer values. IC gvrp enable (global) Enables GVRP globally. GC gvrp enable (interface) Enables GVRP on an interface.
PAGE 92
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 92 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea ip igmp snooping mrouter- Configures the mrouter-time-out. time-out IC show ip igmp snooping groups Displays Multicast groups learned by IGMP snooping. UE show ip igmp snooping interface Displays IGMP snooping configuration. PE show ip igmp snooping mrouter Displays information on dynamically learned Multicast router interfaces.
PAGE 93
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 93 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea ip igmp snooping querier version Sets the IGMP version of the query that the snooping switch is going to send periodically. GC show igmp snooping querier Displays IGMP Snooping Querier information. PE a. For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77. IP Addressing Command Description Modea clear host Deletes entries from the host name-to-address cache.
PAGE 94
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 94 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea show arp switch Displays the entries in the ARP table. PE show hosts Displays the default domain name, a list of UE name server hosts, static and cached list of host names and addresses. show ip address-conflict Displays the status information corresponding to the last detected address conflict. UE or PE show ip helper-address Displays the ip helper addresses configuration. PE a.
PAGE 95
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 95 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description ipv6 mld snooping maxresponse Sets the MLD Maximum Response time for an IC or interface or VLAN. VLAN ipv6 mld snooping mcrtexpiretime Sets the Multicast Router Present Expiration time. IC ipv6 mld snooping (Global) Enables MLD Snooping on the system (Global GC Config Mode). ipv6 mld snooping (Interface) Enables MLD Snooping on an interface.
PAGE 96
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 96 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IP Source Guard Command Description Modea ip verify source Enables filtering of IP packets matching the source IP address. IC ip verify source portsecurity Enables filtering of IP packets matching the IC source IP address and the source MAC address. ip verify binding Configures static bindings. GC show ip verify interface Displays the IPSG interface configuration.
PAGE 97
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 97 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM iSCSI Optimization Link Dependency Command Description Modea iscsi aging time Sets aging time for iSCSI sessions. GC iscsi cos Sets the quality of service profile that will be applied to iSCSI flows. GC iscsi enable Enables Global Configuration mode command GC globally enables iSCSI awareness. iscsi target port Configures an iSCSI target port (optionally configures target port address and name).
PAGE 98
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 98 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM LLDP Command Description Modea clear lldp remote-data Deletes all data from the remote data table. PE clear lldp statistics Resets all LLDP statistics. PE lldp notification Enables remote data change notifications. IC lldp notification-interval Limits how frequently remote data change notifications are sent. GC lldp receive Enables the LLDP receive capability.
PAGE 99
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 99 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea mvr querytime Sets the MVR query response time. GC mvr vlan Sets the MVR multicast VLAN. GC mvr immediate Enables MVR Immediate Leave mode. IC mvr type Sets the MVR port type. IC mvr vlan group Use to participate in the specific MVR group. IC show mvr Displays global MVR settings. PE show mvr members Displays the MVR membership groups allocated.
PAGE 100
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 100 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea lacp system-priority Configures the system LACP priority. GC lacp timeout Assigns an administrative LACP timeout. IC no lacp Sets the LACP (Link Aggregation) mode to default for that Aggregator Group. PA port-channel min-links Sets the minimum number of links that must IC be up in order for the port channel interface to be declared up.
PAGE 101
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 101 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea show bridge address-table Shows the MAC address table for a particular aggregator group. PE speed Configures the speed of all member PA ports in the aggregator group/zone. a. For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types. Port Monitor Command Description Modea monitor session Configures a port monitoring session. GC show monitor session Displays the port monitoring status. PE a.
PAGE 102
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 102 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea conform-color Specifies for each outcome, the only possible actions are drop, setdscp-transmit, set-prectransmit, or transmit. PCMC cos-queue min-bandwidth Specifies the minimum transmission bandwidth for each interface queue. GC or IC cos-queue random-detect Configures WRED queue management policy IC on an interface CoS queue.
PAGE 103
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 103 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea match dstip6 Adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the destination IPv6 address of a packet. v6CMC match dstl4port Adds to the specified class definition a match CMC condition based on the destination layer 4 port of a packet using a single keyword, or a numeric notation.
PAGE 104
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 104 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description match srcl4port Adds to the specified class definition a match CMC condition based on the source layer 4 port of a packet using a single keyword, a numeric notation, or a numeric range notation. match vlan Adds to the specified class definition a match condition based on the value of the layer 2 VLAN Identifier field.
PAGE 105
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 105 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description show diffserv service brief Displays all interfaces in the system to which a PE DiffServ policy has been attached. show interfaces cos-queue Displays the class-of-service queue configuration for the specified interface. PE show interfaces randomdetect Displays the WRED policy on an interface. PE show policy-map Displays all configuration information for the specified policy.
PAGE 106
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 106 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description msgauth Enables the message authenticator attribute to R be used for the RADIUS Authenticating server being configured. name Assigns a name to a RADIUS server. primary Specifies that a configured server should be the R primary server in the group of authentication servers which have the same server name.
PAGE 107
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 107 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea timeout Sets the timeout value in seconds for the designated radius server. R usage Specifies the usage type of the server. R a. For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77. Spanning Tree Command Description Modea clear spanning-tree detected-protocols Restarts the protocol migration process on all interfaces or on the specified interface.
PAGE 108
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 108 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea spanning-tree loopguard Enables loop guard on all ports. GC spanning-tree max-age Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum GC age. spanning-tree max-hops Sets the MSTP Max Hops parameter to a new value for the common and internal spanning tree. GC spanning-tree mode Configures the spanning tree protocol.
PAGE 109
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 109 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM TACACS+ Modea Command Description key Specifies the authentication and encryption key TC for all TACACS communications between the device and the TACACS server. port Specifies a server port number. TC priority Specifies the order in which servers are used. TC show tacacs Displays TACACS+ server settings and statistics. PE tacacs-server host Specifies a TACACS+ server host.
PAGE 110
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 110 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description protocol vlan group all Adds all physical unit/slot/port interfaces to the GC protocol-based VLAN identified by groupid. show dvlan-tunnel Displays all interfaces enabled for Double VLAN Tunneling. PE show dvlan-tunnel interface Displays detailed information about Double VLAN Tunneling for the specified interface. PE show interfaces switchport Displays switchport configuration.
PAGE 111
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 111 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea vlan Creates a VLAN. VLAN vlan (Global Config) Configures a VLAN. GC vlan association mac Associates a MAC address to a VLAN. VLAN vlan association subnet Associates an IP subnet to a VLAN. VLAN vlan database Enters the VLAN database configuration mode. GC vlan makestatic Changes a dynamically created VLAN to a static VLAN VLAN.
PAGE 112
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 112 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description dot1x max-users Sets the maximum number of clients supported IC on the port when MAC-based 802.1X authentication is enabled on the port. dot1x port-control Enables manual control of the authorization state of the port. IC dot1x re-authenticate Manually initiates a re-authentication of all 802.1x-enabled ports or a specified 802.1X enabled port.
PAGE 113
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 113 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea show dot1x clients Displays detailed information about the users who have successfully authenticated on the system or on a specified port. PE show dot1x interface Shows the status of MAC Authentication Bypass. PE show dot1x statistics Displays 802.1X statistics for the specified interface. PE show dot1x users Displays active 802.1X authenticated users for the switch.
PAGE 114
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 114 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea arp purge Causes the specified IP address to be removed from the ARP cache. PE arp resptime Configures the ARP request response timeout. GC arp retries Configures the ARP count of maximum request GC for retries. arp timeout Configures the ARP entry age-out time. clear arp-cache Removes all ARP entries of type dynamic from PE the ARP cache.
PAGE 115
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 115 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description default-router Sets the IPv4 address of one or more routers for DP the DHCP client to use. dns-server (IP DHCP Pool Config) Sets the IPv4 DNS server address which is DP provided to a DHCP client by the DHCP server. domain-name (IP DHCP Pool Config) Sets the DNS domain name which is provided to a DHCP client by the DHCP server.
PAGE 116
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 116 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea sntp Sets the IPv4 address of the NTP server to be used for time synchronization of the client. DP show ip dhcp binding Displays the configured DHCP bindings. PE show ip dhcp conflict Displays DHCP address conflicts for all relevant PE interfaces or a specified interface. show ip dhcp global configuration Displays the DHCP global configuration.
PAGE 117
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 117 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea show ipv6 dhcp binding Displays the configured DHCP pool. PE show ipv6 dhcp interface Displays DHCPv6 information for all relevant interfaces or a specified interface. UE show ipv6 dhcp pool Displays the configured DHCP pool. PE show ipv6 dhcp statistics Displays the DHCPv6 server name and status. UE a. For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77.
PAGE 118
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 118 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea show gmrp configuration Displays GMRP configuration. GC or IC a. For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77. IGMP Command Description Modea ip igmp Sets the administrative mode of IGMP in the system to active. GC ip igmp last-member-query- Sets the number of Group-Specific Queries count sent before the router assumes that there are no local members on the interface.
PAGE 119
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 119 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea show ip igmp interface Displays the IGMP information for the specified interface. PE show ip igmp interface membership Displays the list of interfaces that have registered in the multicast group. PE show ip igmp interface stats Displays the IGMP statistical information for the interface. PE ip igmp router-alert-optional Sets IGMP to not require the Router-Alert field. GC a.
PAGE 120
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 120 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description bootpdhcprelay minwaittime Configures the minimum wait time in seconds GC for BootP/DHCP Relay on the system. clear ip helper statistics Resets (to 0) the statistics displayed in show ip PE helper statistics. ip dhcp relay information check Enables DHCP Relay to check that the relay agent information option in forwarded BOOTREPLY messages is valid.
PAGE 121
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 121 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IP Routing Modea Command Description encapsulation Configures the link layer encapsulation type for IC the packet. ip address Configures an IP address on an interface. IC ip mtu Sets the IP Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) on a routing interface. IC ip netdirbcast Enables the forwarding of network-directed IC ip route Configures a static route. Use the no form of the command to delete the static route.
PAGE 122
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 122 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IPv6 Multicast Command Description Modea ipv6 pimsm (Global Config) Administratively enables PIMSM for IPv6 multicast routing. GC ipv6 pimsm (VLAN Interface Config) Administratively enables PIM-SM multicast routing mode on a particular IPv6 router interface. IC ipv6 pimsm bsr-border Prevents bootstrap router (BSR) messages from IC being sent or received through an interface.
PAGE 123
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 123 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Modea Description show ipv6 pimsm interface Displays interface config parameters. PE show ipv6 pimsm neighbor Displays IPv6 PIM neighbors learned on the routing interfaces. PE show ipv6 pimsm rphash Displays which rendezvous point (RP) is being selected for a specified group.
PAGE 124
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 124 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea ipv6 mld last-memberquery-interval Sets the last member query interval for the MLD interface, which is the value of the maximum response time parameter in the groupspecific queries sent out of this interface. IC (VLAN) ipv6 mld-proxy Enables MLD Proxy on the router. IC ipv6 mld-proxy resetstatus Resets the host interface status parameters of IC the MLD Proxy router.
PAGE 125
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 125 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea ipv6 nd ra-lifetime Sets the value that is placed in the Router Lifetime field of the router advertisements sent from the interface. IC ipv6 nd reachable-time Sets the router advertisement time to IC consider a neighbor reachable after neighbor discovery confirmation. ipv6 nd suppress-ra Suppresses router advertisement transmission on an interface.
PAGE 126
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 126 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description show ipv6 mld traffic Displays MLD statistical information for the PE router. show ipv6 neighbors Displays information about IPv6 neighbors. PE show ipv6 route Displays the IPv6 routing table. PE show ipv6 route preference Shows the preference value associated with the type of route. PE show ipv6 route summary Displays a summary of the routing table.
PAGE 127
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 127 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea ip multicast Sets the administrative mode of the IP multicast forwarder in the router to active. GC ip multicast ttl-threshold Applies a ttlvalue to a routing interface. IC ip pim Administratively configures PIM mode for IP multicast routing on a VLAN interface. IC ip pim bsr-border Administratively disables bootstrap router (BSR) messages from being sent or received through an interface.
PAGE 128
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 128 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description ip pim spt-threshold Sets the multicast traffic threshold rate for the GC last-hop router to switch to the shortest path on the router. show bridge multicast address-table count Displays statistical information about the entries in the multicast address table. PE show ip mcast Displays the system-wide multicast information. PE show ip mcast boundary Displays the system-wide multicast information.
PAGE 129
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 129 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM OSPF Command Description Modea area default-cost Configures the advertised default cost for the stub area. ROSPF area nssa Configures the specified area ID to function as an ROSPF NSSA. area nssa default-infooriginate Configures the metric value and type for the default route advertised into the NSSA.
PAGE 130
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 130 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description area virtual-link retransmit-interval Configures the retransmit interval for the OSPF ROSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by the area ID and neighbor ID. area virtual-link transmit-delay Configures the transmit delay for the OSPF ROSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by the area ID and neighbor ID.
PAGE 131
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 131 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea ip ospf hello-interval Sets the OSPF hello interval for the specified interface. IC ip ospf mtu-ignore Disables OSPF maximum transmission unit (MTU) mismatch detection. IC ip ospf network Configure OSPF to treat an interface as a point- IC to-point, rather than broadcast interface. ip ospf priority Sets the OSPF priority for the specified router interface.
PAGE 132
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 132 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea router-id Sets a 4-digit dotted-decimal number uniquely identifying the router OSPF ID. ROSPF router ospf Enters Router OSPF mode. GC show ip ospf Displays information relevant to the OSPF router. PE show ip ospf abr Displays the internal OSPF routing table entries PE to Area Border Routers (ABR). show ip ospf area Displays information about the identified OSPF PE area.
PAGE 133
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 133 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea timers spf Configures the SPF delay and hold time. ROSPF a. For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77. OSPFv3 Modea Command Description area default-cost Configures the monetary default cost for the stub ROSV3 area. area nssa Configures the specified areaid to function as an ROSV3 NSSA.
PAGE 134
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 134 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description area virtual-link retransmit-interval Configures the retransmit interval for the OSPF ROSV3 virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by areaid and neighbor. area virtual-link transmit-delay ROSV3 Configures the transmit delay for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by areaid and neighbor. default-information originate Controls the advertisement of default routes.
PAGE 135
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 135 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Modea Description ipv6 ospf transmit-delay Sets the OSPF Transmit Delay for the specified interface. IC ipv6 router ospf Enters Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode. GC maximum-paths Sets the number of paths that OSPF can report for a given destination. ROSV3 nsf Enables OSPF graceful restart. ROSV3 nsf helper Allows OSPF to act as a helpful neighbor for a restarting router.
PAGE 136
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 136 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea show ipv6 ospf database Displays the number of each type of LSA in the database-summary database and the total number of LSAs in the database. PE show ipv6 ospf interface Displays the information for the IFO object or virtual interface tables. PE show ipv6 ospf interface Displays brief information for the IFO object or brief virtual interface tables.
PAGE 137
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 137 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description ip irdp minadvertinterval Configures the minimum time, in seconds, IC allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface. ip irdp multicast Sends router advertisements as IP multicast packets. IC ip irdp preference Configures the preference of the address as a default router address relative to other router addresses on the same subnet.
PAGE 138
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 138 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea ip rip send version Configures the interface to allow RIP control packets of the specified version to be sent. IC redistribute Configures OSPF protocol to allow redistribution of routes from the specified source protocol/routers. PIP router rip Enters Router RIP mode. GC show ip rip Displays information relevant to the RIP router.
PAGE 139
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 139 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Virtual Router Redundancy Command Description Modea ip vrrp Enables the administrative mode of Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) for the router. GC vrrp accept-mode Enables the VRRP Master to accept ping packets sent to one of the virtual router’s IP addresses. IC vrrp authentication Sets the authentication details value for the virtual router configured on a specified interface.
PAGE 140
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 140 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea show vrrp interface Displays all configuration information and VRRP router statistics of a virtual router configured on a specific interface. UE or PE show vrrp interface brief Displays information about each virtual router configured on the switch. PE show vrrp interface stats Displays the statistical information about each PE virtual router configured on the switch.
PAGE 141
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 141 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea boot host retrycount Set the number of attempts to download a configuration. GC show auto-copy-sw Displays Stack Firmware Synchronization configuration status. PE show boot Displays the current status of the Auto Config process. PE a. For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77.
PAGE 142
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 142 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea name Configures the name for a captive portal configuration. CPI protocol Configures the protocol mode for a captive portal configuration. CPI redirect Enables the redirect mode for a captive portal configuration. CPI redirect-url Configures the redirect URL for a captive portal CPI configuration. session-timeout Configures the session timeout for a captive portal configuration.
PAGE 143
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 143 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description user name Modifies the user name for a local captive portal CP user. user password Creates a local user or changes the password for CP an existing user. user session-timeout Sets the session timeout value for a captive portal user. CP show captive-portal configuration Displays the operational status of each captive portal configuration.
PAGE 144
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 144 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea show parser macro Displays information about defined macros. PE a. For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77. Clock Modea Command Description show clock Displays the time and date of the system clock. PE show sntp configuration Displays the SNTP configuration. PE show sntp server Displays the pre-configured SNTP servers.
PAGE 145
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 145 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Line Configuration Scripting Command Description Modea script apply Applies commands in the script to the switch. PE script delete Deletes a specific script. PE script list Lists all scripts present in the switch. PE script show Displays the contents of a script file. PE script validate Validates a script file. PE a. For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77.
PAGE 146
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 146 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description update bootcode Updates the bootcode on one or more switches. PE write Copies the running configuration image to the PE startup configuration. a. For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77. Denial of Service Modea Command Description dos-control firstfrag Enables Minimum TCP Header Size Denial of GC Service protection.
PAGE 147
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 147 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea show dos-control Displays Denial of Service configuration information. PE a. For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77. Line Modea Command Description exec-timeout Configures the interval that the system waits for LC user input. history Enables the command history function. history size Changes the command history buffer size for a LC particular line.
PAGE 148
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 148 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Mode Command Description Modea configure terminal Gets to the configure line. This command is equivalent to the configure command. PE do Executes commands available in Privileged EXEC mode from Global Configuration and other modes. All except PE and UE a. For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77.
PAGE 149
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 149 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea passwords strength minimum specialcharacters Enforces a minimum number of special characters that a password may contain. GC passwords strength maximum consecutivecharacters Enforces a maximum number of consecutive characters that a password can contain. GC passwords strength maximum repeatedcharacters Enforces a maximum repeated characters that a GC password should contain.
PAGE 150
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 150 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM RMON Command Description Modea rmon alarm Configures alarm conditions. GC rmon collection history Enables a Remote Monitoring (RMON) MIB history statistics group on an interface. IC rmon event Configures an RMON event. GC show rmon alarm Displays alarm configurations. UE show rmon alarms Displays the alarms summary table. UE and PE show rmon collection history Displays the requested group of statistics.
PAGE 151
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 151 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea debug clear Disables all debug traces. PE debug console Enables the display of debug trace output on the login session in which it is executed. PE debug dot1x Enables dot1x packet tracing. PE debug igmpsnooping Enables tracing of IGMP Snooping packets transmitted and/or received by the switch. PE debug ip acl Enables debug of IP Protocol packets matching PE the ACL criteria.
PAGE 152
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 152 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea debug mldsnooping Traces MLD snooping packet reception and transmission. PE debug ospf Enables tracing of OSPF packets received and transmitted by the switch. PE debug ospfv3 Enables tracing of OSPFv3 packets received and PE transmitted by the switch. debug ping Enables tracing of ICMP echo requests and responses. PE debug rip Enables tracing of RIP requests and responses.
PAGE 153
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 153 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Modea Command Description show sflow polling Displays the sFlow polling instances created on PE the switch. show sflow sampling Displays the sFlow sampling instances created on the switch. a. PE For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77. SNMP Command Description Modea show snmp Displays the SNMP status. PE show snmp engineID Displays the SNMP engine ID.
PAGE 154
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 154 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea snmp-server user Configures a new SNMP Version 3 user. GC snmp-server view Creates or updates a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) server view entry. GC snmp-server v3-host Specifies the recipient of Simple Network Management Protocol Version 3 (SNMPv3) notifications. GC a. For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77.
PAGE 155
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 155 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syslog Command Description Modea clear logging Clears messages from the internal logging buffer. PE clear logging file Clears messages from the logging file. PE description Describes the syslog server. L level Specifies the importance level of syslog messages. L logging cli-command Enable CLI command logging. GC logging Logs messages to a syslog server. GC logging audit Enables switch auditing.
PAGE 156
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 156 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea banner exec Sets the message that is displayed after a successful login. GC banner login Sets the message that is displayed just before the login prompt. GC banner motd Specifies message-of-the-day banner. GC banner motd acknowledge Acknowledges message-of-the-day banner. GC clear checkpoint statistics Clears the statistics for the checkpointing process.
PAGE 157
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 157 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea set description Associates a text description with a switch in the stack. SG slot Configures a slot in the system. GC show banner Displays banner information. PE show boot-version Displays the boot image version details. UE show checkpoint statistics Displays the statistics for the checkpointing process. PE show cut-through mode Show the cut-through mode on the switch.
PAGE 158
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 158 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Description Modea show system power Displays information about the system level power consumption. UE or PE show system temperature Displays information about the system temperature and fan status. UE or PE show tech-support Displays system and configuration information PE (for debugging/calls to technical support). show users Displays information about the active users.
PAGE 159
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 159 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Terminal Length Command Description Modea terminal length Sets the terminal length. PE a. For the meaning of each Mode abbreviation, see Mode Types on page 77. Time Ranges Modea Command Description time-range Creates a time range identified by name, GC consisting of one absolute time entry and/or one or more periodic time entries. absolute Adds an absolute time entry to a time range.
PAGE 160
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 160 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Web Server Command Description Modea common-name Specifies the common-name for the device. CC country Specifies the country. CC crypto certificate generate Generates a HTTPS certificate. GC crypto certificate import Imports a certificate signed by the Certification GC Authority for HTTPS. crypto certificate request Generates and displays a certificate request for PE HTTPS. duration Specifies the duration in days.
PAGE 161
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 162
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 163
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 163 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 2 Using the CLI Introduction This chapter describes the basics of entering and editing the Dell PowerConnect 70xx Series Command Line Interface (CLI) commands and defines the command hierarchy. It also explains how to activate the CLI and implement its major functions.
PAGE 164
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 164 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • Partial keyword lookup — A command is incomplete and the key is entered in place of a parameter. The matched parameters for this command are displayed.
PAGE 165
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 165 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Table 2-1. History Buffer Keyword Source or Destination Up-arrow key Recalls commands in the history buffer, beginning with the most recent command. Repeats the key sequence to recall successively older commands. +
Down-arrow key + Returns to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands with the up-arrow key. Repeating the key sequence recalls more recent commands in succession.
PAGE 166
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 166 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Short Form Commands The CLI supports the short forms of all commands. As long as it is possible to recognize the entered command unambiguously, the CLI accepts the short form of the command as if the user typed the full command. Keyboard Shortcuts The CLI has a range of keyboard shortcuts to assist in editing the CLI commands. The help command, when used in the User EXEC and Privileged EXEC modes, displays the keyboard short cuts.
PAGE 167
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 167 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Table 2-2. CLI Shortcuts Keyboard Key Description Delete previous character + Go to beginning of line + Go to end of line + Go forward one character + Go backward one character + Delete current character + Delete to beginning of line + Delete to the end of the line.
PAGE 168
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 168 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • The range key word is used to identify the range of objects on which to operate. • The range may be specified in the following manner: (#-#) — a range from a particular instance to another instance (inclusive). For example, 1/0/1-10 indicates that the operation applies to the gigabit Ethernet ports 1 to 10 on unit 1. (#, #, #) — a list of non-consecutive instances.
PAGE 169
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 169 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Scripting The CLI can be used as a programmable management interface. To facilitate this function, any characters entered after the character are treated as a comment and ignored by the CLI. Also, the CLI allows the user to disable session timeouts. CLI Command Notation Conventions When entering commands there are certain command-entry notations which apply to all commands.
PAGE 170
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 170 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • Unit#/Slot#/Port# — Identifies a specific interface by the interface type tag followed by the Unit# followed by a / symbol, then the Slot# followed by a / symbol, and then the Port#. For example, gi2/0/10 identifies the gigabit port 10 in slot 0 within the second unit on a non-blade switch. Table 2-4 below lists the supported interface type tags.
PAGE 171
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 171 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Port Channel Interfaces Port-channel (or LAG) interfaces are represented in the CLI by the variable port-channel-number., which can can assume values from 1-48. When listed in command line output, port channel interfaces are preceded by the characters Po, as shown in the preceding example: Loopback Interfaces Loopback interfaces are represented in the CLI by the variable loopback-id, which can assume values from 0–7.
PAGE 172
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 172 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 1 default Po1-48, Default Gi1/0/1-24 Example #3 CLI Command Modes Since the set of CLI commands is very large, the CLI is structured as a command-tree hierarchy, where related command sets are assigned to command modes for easier access. At each level, only the commands related to that level are available to the user and only those commands are shown in the context sensitive help for that level.
PAGE 173
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 173 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM When starting a session, the initial mode is the User EXEC mode. Only a limited subset of commands is available in this mode. This level is reserved for tasks that do not change the configuration. To enter the next level, the Privileged EXEC mode, a password is required. The Privileged EXEC mode provides access to commands that can not be executed in the User EXEC mode and permits access to the switch Configuration mode.
PAGE 174
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 174 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Global Configuration Mode Global Configuration commands apply to features that affect the system as a whole, rather than just a specific interface. The Privileged EXEC mode command configure is used to enter the Global Configuration mode. console(config)# The following are the Global Configuration modes: • SNMP v3 Host Configuration — Configures the parameters for the SNMP v3 server host.
PAGE 175
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 175 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • Management Access List — Contains commands to define management access administration lists. The Global Configuration mode command management access-list is used to enter the Management Access List configuration mode. • Policy-map — Use the policy-map command to access the QoS policy map configuration mode to configure the QoS policy map.
PAGE 176
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 176 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • SSH Public Key-string — Contains commands to manually specify the SSH Public-key of a remote SSH Client. The SSH Public-Key Chain Configuration mode command user-key command is used to enter the SSH Public-Key Configuration mode. • MAC Access-List — Configures conditions required to allow traffic based on MAC addresses. The Global Configuration mode command macaccess-list is used to enter the MAC Access-List configuration mode.
PAGE 177
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 177 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM [# | >] — The # sign is used to indicate that the system is in the Privileged EXEC mode. The > symbol indicates that the system is in the User EXEC mode, which is a read-only mode in which the system does not allow configuration. Navigating CLI Command Modes Table 2-5 describes how to navigate through the CLI Command Mode hierarchy.
PAGE 178
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 178 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Table 2-5. Navigating CLI Command Modes Command Mode Access Method Command Prompt User EXEC The user is automatically in User EXEC mode unless the user is defined as a privileged user. console> Exit or Access Previous Mode logout console# Privileged EXEC Use the enable command to enter into this mode. This mode is password protected. Use the exit command, or press + to return to the User EXEC mode.
PAGE 179
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 179 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Access Method Policy-Class-Map From Global Configuration mode, use the policy-map class command. Class-Map Command Prompt Exit or Access Previous Mode console(config-policyclassmap)# To exit to Global Configuration mode, use the exit command, or press + to Privileged EXEC mode. console(config-classmap)# From Global Configuration mode, use the classmap command.
PAGE 180
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 180 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Access Method SSH Public Key String console(config-pubkey-key)# To return to the From the SSH Public Key- Chain SSH Public keymode, use the userchain mode, use key the exit command, or {rsa | dsa} press command. + to Privileged EXEC mode. TACACS From Global Configuration mode, use the tacacs-server host command.
PAGE 181
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 181 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Access Method Command Prompt Exit or Access Previous Mode SNMP v3 Host Configuration console(config-snmp)# From Global Configuration mode, use the snmp-server v3-host command. To exit to Global Configuration mode, use the exit command, or press + to Privileged EXEC mode. SNMP Community Configuration From Global Configuration mode, use the snmp-server community command.
PAGE 182
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 182 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Access Method Stack console(config-stack)# From Global Configuration mode, use the stack command. To exit to Global Configuration mode, use the exit command, or press + to Privileged EXEC mode. Logging From Global Configuration mode, use the logging command. console(config-logging)# To exit to Global Configuration mode, use the exit command, or press + to Privileged EXEC mode.
PAGE 183
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 183 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Access Method Command Prompt Exit or Access Previous Mode Router OSPF Conf From Global Configuration mode, use the router ospf command. console(config-router)# To exit to Global Configuration mode, use the exit command, or press + to Privileged EXEC mode Router RIP Config From Global Configuration mode, use the router rip command.
PAGE 184
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 184 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Command Prompt Exit or Access Previous Mode Gigabit Ethernet From Global Configuration mode, use the interface gigabitethernet command. Or, use the abbreviation interface gi. console (config-ifGiunit/slot/port# To exit to Global Configuration mode, use the exit command, or press + to Privileged EXEC mode. 10 Gigabit Ethernet From Global Configuration mode, use the interface tengigabitethernet command.
PAGE 185
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 185 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Access Method Command Prompt Tunnel From Global Configuration mode, use the interface tunnel command. Or, use the abbreviation interface tu. console(config-tunneltunnel- To exit to Global id)# Configuration Loopback Exit or Access Previous Mode mode, use the exit command, or press + to Privileged EXEC mode.
PAGE 186
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 186 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Easy Setup Wizard The Easy Setup Wizard guides the user in the basic initial configuration of a newly installed switch so that it can be immediately deployed and functional in its basic operation and be completely manageable through the Web, CLI and the remote Dell Network Manager. After initial setup, the user may enter to the system to set up more advanced configurations.
PAGE 187
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 187 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM If the user chooses not to use the wizard initially, the session defaults to the CLI mode with a warning to refer the documentation. During a subsequent login, the user may again elect not to run the setup wizard. Once the wizard has established configuration, however, the wizard is presented only if the user resets the switch to the factory default settings.
PAGE 188
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 188 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Figure 2-1.
PAGE 189
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 189 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example Session This section describes an Easy Setup Wizard session. Refer to the state diagram in the previous section for general flow. The following values used by the example session are not the only possible ones: • IP address for the VLAN 1 is 192.168.1.2:255.255.255.0. This address is on a different subnet than the OOB interface and in the same subnet as the default gateway.
PAGE 190
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 190 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM NOTE: In the following Easy Setup Wizard example, the possible user options are enclosed in [ ]. Also, where possible, default values are enclosed in []. If the user enters with no options defined, the default value is accepted. Help text is in parentheses.
PAGE 191
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 191 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Network Manager or other management interfaces to change this setting, and to add additional management system later. For more information on adding management systems, see the user documentation. To add a management station: Please enter the SNMP community string to be used. {public}: public Please enter the IP address of the Management System (A.B.C.D) or wildcard (0.0.0.0) to manage from any Management Station. {0.0.0.
PAGE 192
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 192 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Optionally you may request that the system automatically retrieve an IP address from the network via DHCP (this requires that you have a DHCP server running on the network). To setup an IP address: Please enter the IP address of the device (A.B.C.D) or enter "DHCP" (without the quotes) to automatically request an IP address from the network DHCP server. 192.168.1.2 Please enter the IP subnet mask (A.B.C.D or /nn): 255.255.255.
PAGE 193
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 193 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Thank you for using the Dell Easy Setup Wizard. You will now enter CLI mode. ..... console> Using CLI Functions and Tools The CLI has been designed to manage the switch’s configuration file system and to manage switch security. A number of resident tools exist to support these and other functions. Configuration Management All managed systems have software images and databases that must be configured, backed up and restored.
PAGE 194
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 194 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Table 2-6. File System Commands Command Description delete file Deletes file. filedescr file description Adds a description to a file (up to 20 characters can be used). copy source destination Copies a file from source file to destination file. Copying Files The copy command not only provides a method for copying files within the file system, but also to and from remote servers.
PAGE 195
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 195 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Special System Files The following special filenames are used to refer to special virtual system files, which are under control of the system and may not be removed or added. These file names are reserved and may not be used as user-defined files. When the user copies a local source file into one of these special files and the source file has an attached file description, it also is copied as the file description for the special file.
PAGE 196
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 196 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • The CLI is accessible from remote telnet through the IP address for the switch. IP addresses are assigned separately for the service port and the inband ports. • The CLI is accessible from a secure shell interface. • The CLI generates keys for SSH locally. • The serial session defaults to 9600 baud rate, eight data bits, non-parity and one stop bit.
PAGE 197
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 197 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Access Control In addition to authenticating a user, the CLI also assigns the user access to one of two security levels. Level 1 has read-only access. This level allow the user to read information but not configure the switch. The access to this level cannot be modified. Level 15 is the special access level assigned to the superuser of the switch.
PAGE 198
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 198 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syslogs The CLI uses syslog support to send logging messages to a remote syslog server. The user configures the switch to generate all logging messages to a remote log server. If no remote log server exists, then the CLI maintains a rolling log of at most the last 1000 critical system events.
PAGE 199
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 199 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM this case, the CLI suppresses repeated events from the same source and instead the CLI records one event within a period of time and includes that count as part of the log. Management ACL In addition to user access control, the system also manages access for in-band interfaces. The system allows individual hosts or subnets to access only specific management protocols.
PAGE 200
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 200 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • Operational code date • The board type • The CPU • Memory size To start the normal booting process, select item 1 in the Boot Menu. The following is a sample log for booting information. Boot Menu 3.2.0.1 CPU Card ID: 0x508541 /DskVol// - disk check in progress ...
PAGE 201
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 202
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 202 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ------------------------ allocation group size: 2 clusters - free space on volume: 10,852,352 bytes Boot Menu 3.2.0.1 Select an option. If no selection in 10 seconds then operational code will start. 1 - Start operational code. 2 - Start Boot Menu. Select (1, 2): Operational Code Date: Mon Jan 4 04:26:56 2010 Uncompressing..... Adding 0 symbols for standalone. CPU: Motorola E500 : Unknown system version. Processor #0.
PAGE 203
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 204
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 205
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 205 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Timebase: 66.666666 MHz, MEM: 266.666664 MHz, PCI: 66.666666 MHz, CPU: 533.333328 MHz PCI unit 0: Dev 0xb314, Rev 0x01, Chip BCM56314_A0, Driver BCM56314_A0 SOC unit 0 attached to PCI device BCM56314_A0 Adding BCM transport pointers Configuring CPUTRANS TX Configuring CPUTRANS RX Instantiating /download as rawFs, device = 0x20001 Formatting /download for DOSFS Instantiating /download as rawFs, device = 0x20001 Formatting...
PAGE 206
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 206 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM # of bad clusters: total free space: max contiguous free space: 0 1,010,176 1,010,176 bytes # of files: 0 # of folders: 0 total bytes in files: 0 # of lost chains: 0 total bytes in lost chains: 0 OK. (Unit 1 - Waiting to select management unit)> Welcome to Dell Easy Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard guides you through the initial switch configuration, and gets you up and running as quickly as possible.
PAGE 207
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 207 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Would you like to run the setup wizard (you must answer this question within 60 seconds)? [Y/N] n Thank you for using Dell Easy Set up Wizard. You will now enter CLI mode. Applying Global configuration, please wait ... Applying Interface configuration, please wait ...
PAGE 208
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 208 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Target Device..................................0x0050854 1 Size...........................................0x 91ced4 (9555668) Number of Components...........................3 Operational Code Size..........................0x790208 (7930376) Operational Code Offset........................0x74 (116) Operational Code FLASH flag....................1 Operational Code CRC...........................0x9EBE Operational Compression flag........
PAGE 209
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 209 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM File - Dell-Ent-esw-kinnick-pct.8541-V6RCSxw-6IQHSr3v2m0b1.opr []There is no output from this option.[] This is the output from the update boot code option: Do you wish to update Boot Code? (y/n) y Validating image2....OK Extracting boot code from image...CRC valid Erasing Boot Flash.....^^^^Done. Wrote 0x10000 bytes. Wrote 0x20000 bytes. Wrote 0x30000 bytes. Wrote 0x40000 bytes. Wrote 0x50000 bytes. Wrote 0x60000 bytes.
PAGE 210
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 210 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Wrote 0x100000 bytes. Validating Flash.....Passed Flash update completed.[][][][][]During the bootup sequence, if a user is connected using the serial interface, the system provides an escape key sequence to interrupt the bootup process and bring up a boot utility menu. The menu provides the users with the following: • The boot key sequence is 2 and may be typed only during the initial bootup sequence.
PAGE 211
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 212
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 213
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 214
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 214 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Monitoring Traps from CLI It is possible to connect to the CLI session and monitor the events or faults that are being sent as traps from the system. This feature is equivalent to the alarm-monitoring window in a typical network management system. The user enables events or monitor traps from the CLI by entering the command logging console.
PAGE 215
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 215 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 3 Layer 2 Commands The chapters that follow describe commands that conform to the OSI model data link layer (Layer 2). Layer 2 commands provide a logical organization for transmitting data bits on a particular medium. This layer defines the framing, addressing, and checksum functions for Ethernet packets.
PAGE 216
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 217
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 217 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 4 AAA Commands Management access to the switch is via telnet, HTTP, SSH, or the serial console (SNMP access is discussed in SNMP Commands). To ensure that only authorized users can access and change the configuration of the switch, users must be authenticated.
PAGE 218
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 218 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM support the concept of timeout, subsequent entries in the list are never attempted. For example, the local authentication method implementation does not supply a time-out value. If a list contains the local method, followed by the radius authentication method, the radius method is not attempted.
PAGE 219
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 219 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no aaa authentication dot1x default Parameter Description Parameter Description radius Uses the list of all authentication servers for authentication. ias Uses the internal authentication server. local Use the local authentication method. none Uses no authentication. Default Configuration No default authentication method is defined.
PAGE 220
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 220 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM aaa authentication enable Use the aaa authentication enable command in Global Configuration mode to set authentication for accessing higher privilege levels. To return to the default configuration, use the no form of this command. Syntax aaa authentication enable {default | list-name} method1 [method2...
PAGE 221
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 221 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Create a list by entering the aaa authentication enable list-name method command where list-name is any character string used to name this list. The method argument identifies the list of methods that the authentication algorithm tries in the given sequence. The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error, not if it fails to authenticate the user.
PAGE 222
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 222 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • list-name — Character string used to name the list of authentication methods activated when a user logs in. (Range: 1-15 characters) • method1 [method2...] — Specify at least one from the following table: Keyword Source or destination enable Uses the enable password for authentication. line Uses the line password for authentication. local Uses the local username database for authentication. none Uses no authentication.
PAGE 223
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 223 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example configures authentication login. console(config)# aaa authentication login default radius local enable none aaa authorization network default radius Use the aaa authorization network default radius command in Global Configuration mode to enable the switch to accept VLAN assignment by the RADIUS server.
PAGE 224
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 224 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM aaa ias-user username Use the aaa ias-user username command in Global Configuration mode to configure IAS users and their attributes. Username and password attributes are supported. The ias-user name is composed of up to 64 alphanumeric characters. This command also changes the mode to a user config mode. Use the no form of this command to remove the user from the internal user database.
PAGE 225
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 225 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM clear (IAS) Use the clear aaa ias-users command in Privileged EXEC mode to delete all IAS users. Syntax clear aaa ias-users Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 226
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 226 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • list-name — Uses the indicated list created with the aaa authentication enable command. (Range: 1-12 characters) Default Configuration Uses the default set with the command aaa authentication enable. Command Mode Line Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example specifies the default authentication method when accessing a higher privilege level console.
PAGE 227
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 227 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example defines password "xxxyyyzzz" to control access to user and privilege levels. console(config)# enable password xxxyyyzzz ip http authentication Use the ip http authentication command in Global Configuration mode to specify authentication methods for http server users.
PAGE 228
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 228 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error, not if it fails. To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error, specify none as the final method in the command line. For example, if none is specified as an authentication method after radius, no authentication is used if the RADIUS server is down.
PAGE 229
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 229 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The local user database is checked. This action has the same effect as the command ip https authentication local. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error, not if it fails. To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error, specify none as the final method in the command line.
PAGE 230
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 230 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Line Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example specifies the default authentication method for a console. console(config)# line console console(config-line)# login authentication default password (aaa IAS User Configuration) Use the password command in aaa IAS User Configuration mode to configure a password for a user.
PAGE 231
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 231 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 232
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 232 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration No password is specified. Command Mode Line Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example specifies a password "mcmxxyyy" on a line. console(config-line)# password mcmxxyyy password (User EXEC) Use the password command in User EXEC mode to allow a currently logged in user to change the password for only that user without having read/write privileges.
PAGE 233
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 233 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example shows the prompt sequence for executing the password command. console>password Enter old password:******** Enter new password:******** Confirm new password:******** show aaa ias-users Use the show aaa ias-users command in Privileged EXEC mode to display configured IAS users and their attributes.
PAGE 234
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 234 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console#show aaa ias-users UserName ------------------Client-1 Client-2 Following are the IAS configuration commands shown in the output of the show running-config command. Passwords shown in the command output are always encrypted.
PAGE 235
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 235 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays the authentication configuration.
PAGE 236
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 236 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show users accounts Parameter Description The following fields are displayed by this command. Parameter Description User Name Local user account’s user name. Privilege User’s access level (read only or read/write). Lockout Status Indicates whether the user account is locked out or not. Password Expiration Date Current password expiration date in date format. Lockout Displays the user’s lockout status (True or False).
PAGE 237
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 237 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM admin 15 --- --- False guest 15 --- --- False brcm1 1 --- --- False console#show users accounts long User Name -----------asd thisisaverylongusernameitisquitelong show users login-history Use the show users login-history command in Global Configuration mode to display information about the login history of users. Syntax show users login-history [long] • name — name of user.
PAGE 238
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 238 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console#show users login-history Login Time Username Protocol Location -------------------- --------- --------- ----------- Jan 19 2005 08:23:48 Bob Serial Jan 19 2005 08:29:29 Robert HTTP 172.16.0.8 Jan 19 2005 08:42:31 John SSH 172.16.0.1 Jan 19 2005 08:49:52 Betty Telnet 172.16.1.7 username Use the username command in Global Configuration mode to add a new user to the local user database.
PAGE 239
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 239 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description level The user level. Level 0 can be assigned by a level 15 user to another user to suspend that user’s access. Range: 0-15. Enter access level 1 for Read Access or 15 for Read/Write Access. encrypted Encrypted password entered, copied from another switch configuration. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 240
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 240 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM parameter must be a pre-existing local user. If the password strength feature is enabled, it checks for password strength and returns an appropriate error if it fails to meet the password strength criteria. Syntax username name password password [level level] [encrypted] Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description. Default Behavior This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 241
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 241 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Message Type Reason behind the failure Message Description 1 Exceeds Minimum Length of a Password. Password should be in the range of 8-64 characters in length. Set minimum password length to 0 by using the passwords min-length 0 command.
PAGE 242
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 242 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax username username unlock Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 243
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 243 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 5 ACL Commands Access to a switch or router can be made more secure through the use of Access Control Lists (ACLs) to control the type of traffic allowed into or out of specific ports. An ACL consists of a series of rules, each of which describes the type of traffic to be processed and the actions to take for packets that meet the classification criteria. Rules within an ACL are evaluated sequentially until a match is found, if any.
PAGE 244
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 244 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM classifier rule. The ACL logging feature allows these hardware hit counts to be collected on a per-rule basis and reported periodically to the network administrator using the system logging facility and an SNMP trap. The PowerConnect ACL permit/deny rule specification supports a log parameter that enables hardware hit count collection and reporting.
PAGE 245
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 245 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM containing this ACL rule is applied to an interface or bound to a VLAN, then the ACL rule is applied when the time-range with specified name becomes active. The ACL rule is removed when the time-range with specified name becomes inactive.
PAGE 246
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 246 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description assign-queue queue- Specifies the particular hardware queue for handling traffic that matches the rule. (Range: 0-6) id mirror interface Allows the traffic matching this rule to be copied to the specified interface. redirect interface This parameter allows the traffic matching this rule to be forwarded to the specified unit/slot/port. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 247
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 247 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM specified name does not exist, and the IP ACL containing this ACL rule is applied to an interface or bound to a VLAN, then the ACL rule is applied immediately. If a time range with the specified name exists, and the IP ACL containing this ACL rule is applied to an interface or bound to a VLAN, then the ACL rule is applied when the time-range with a specified name becomes active.
PAGE 248
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 248 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Use this command in Mac-Access-List Configuration mode to create a new rule for the current MAC access list. Each rule is appended to the list of configured rules for the list. The command is enhanced to accept the optional time-range parameter. The time-range parameter allows imposing a time limitation on the MAC ACL rule as defined by the parameter time-range-name.
PAGE 249
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 249 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description 0x0600-0xFFFF Specify custom ethertype value (hexadecimal range 0x06000xFFFF). vlan eq VLAN number. (Range 0-4095) cos Class of service. (Range 0-7) log Specifies that this rule is to be logged. time-range-name Use the time-range parameter to impose a time limitation on the MAC ACL rule as defined by the parameter time-rangename.
PAGE 250
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 250 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example configures a MAC ACL to deny traffic from MAC address 0806.c200.0000. console(config)#mac access-list extended DELL123 console(config-mac-access-list)#deny 0806.c200.0000 ffff.ffff.ffff any ip access-group Use the ip access-group command in Global and Interface Configuration modes to apply an IP based ACL on an Ethernet interface or a group of interfaces.
PAGE 251
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 251 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines Global mode command configures the ACL on all the interfaces, whereas the interface mode command does so for the interface.
PAGE 252
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 252 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines An optional sequence number may be specified to indicate the order of this access-list relative to the other access-lists already assigned to this interface and direction. A lower number indicates higher precedence order. If a sequence number already is in use for this interface and direction, the specified access-list replaces the currently attached access list using that sequence number.
PAGE 253
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 253 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines Use this command to create a mac access control list. The CLI mode is changed to Mac-Access-List Configuration when this command is successfully executed. Example The following example creates MAC ACL and enters MAC-Access-ListConfiguration mode.
PAGE 254
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 254 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config)#mac access-list extended rename DELL1 DELL2 service-acl input Use the service-acl input command in Interface Configuration mode to block Link Local Protocol Filtering (LLPF) protocol(s) on a given port. Use the no form of this command to unblock link-local protocol(s) on a given port.
PAGE 255
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 255 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines To specify multiple protocols, enter the protocol parameters together on the command line, separated by spaces. This command can only be entered once per interface if no intervening no service-acl input command has been entered. show service-acl interface This command displays the status of LLPF rules configured on a particular port or on all the ports.
PAGE 256
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 256 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Block DTP..................................Enable Block UDLD................................ Enable Block PAGP.................................Enable Block SSTP................................ Enable Block All................................. Enable show ip access-lists Use the show ip access-lists command in Privileged EXEC mode to display an IP ACL and time-range parameters.
PAGE 257
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 257 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ACL Name Vlan(s) Rules Interface(s) ----------------------------------------------------ACL40 1 ACL41 1 show mac access-list Use the show mac access-list command in Privileged EXEC mode to display a MAC access list and all of the rules that are defined for the MAC ACL. Use the [name] parameter to identify a specific MAC ACL to display.
PAGE 258
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 258 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Fields Description MAC ACL Name The name of the MAC access list. Rules The number of user-configured rules defined for the MAC ACL. The implicit 'deny all' rule defined at the end of every MAC ACL is not included. Interfaces 258 Displays the list of interfaces (unit/slot/port) to which the MAC ACL is attached in a given direction.
PAGE 259
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 259 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Address Table Commands 6 Static MAC Filtering allows the administrator to add a number of unicast or multicast MAC addresses directly to the forwarding database. This is typically a small number relative to the total size of the database. Associated with each static MAC address is a set of source ports, a set of destination ports and VLAN information.
PAGE 260
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 261
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 261 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example In this example, the mac address-table tables are cleared. console#clear mac address-table dynamic mac address-table aging-time Use the mac address-table aging-time command in Global Configuration mode to set the aging time of the address.
PAGE 262
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 262 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example In this example the MAC Address Table aging time is set to 400. console(config)#mac address-table aging-time 400 mac address-table multicast filtering Use the mac address-table multicast filtering command in Global Configuration mode to enable filtering of Multicast addresses.
PAGE 263
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 263 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM If switches exist on the VLAN, and IGMP snooping is not enabled, use the mac address-table multicast forward-all command to enable forwarding all Multicast packets to the Multicast routers. Example In this example, bridge Multicast filtering is enabled.
PAGE 264
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 264 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description interface-list Specify a comma separated list of interfaces, a range of interfaces, or a combination of both. Interfaces can be portchannel numbers or physical ports in unit/slot/port format. Default Configuration No forbidden addresses are defined. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Before defining forbidden ports, ensure that the Multicast group is registered.
PAGE 265
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 265 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description vlan vlan-id Valid VLAN ID (Range 1-4093). Default Configuration The default for this command is not forbidden. Command Mode Global configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example forbids forwarding unregistered multicast addresses on VLAN8.
PAGE 266
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 266 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration Forward-unregistered. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example In this example, all VLAN1 Multicast packets are forwarded.
PAGE 267
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 267 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines If routers exist on the VLAN, do not change the unregistered multicast addresses state to drop on the routers ports. NOTE: Do not use the mac address-table multicast forbidden forward-unregistered command with the mac address-table multicast forward-unregistered command on the same interface. Example The following example displays how to enable forwarding of unregistered multicast addresses.
PAGE 268
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 268 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description ip-multicast-address IP multicast address. interface interface- list Specify a comma separated list of interfaces, a range of interfaces, or a combination of both. Interfaces can be portchannel numbers or physical ports in unit/slot/port format. Default Configuration No Multicast addresses are defined.
PAGE 269
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 269 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax mac address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id interface {gigabitethernet | port-channel | tengigabitethernet} interface-id no mac address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id [interface {gigabitethernet | port-channel | tengigabitethernet} interface-id] Syntax Description Parameter Description mac-address A valid MAC address in the format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.
PAGE 270
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 270 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax port security [discard] no port security • discard — Discards frames with unlearned source addresses. This is the default if no option is indicated.
PAGE 271
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 271 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • max-addr — The maximum number of addresses that can be learning on the port. (Range: 0-600) Default Configuration The default value for this command is 100. Command Mode Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example shows using this command in Ethernet Interface Configuration mode.
PAGE 272
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 272 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines A MAC address can be displayed in IP format only if it is in the range 01:00:5e:00:00:00 through 01:00:5e:7f:ff:ff.
PAGE 273
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 273 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example In this example, Multicast MAC address table information is displayed. console#show mac address-table multicast Vlan MAC Address ----1 ------------------- Type ------- 0100.5E05.0505 Ports ------------------ Static Forbidden ports for multicast addresses: Vlan MAC Address ---- ----------------------- 1 Ports --------------------------- 0100.5E05.
PAGE 274
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 274 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example In this example, the Multicast configuration for VLAN 1 is displayed. console#show mac address-table filtering 1 Filtering: Enabled VLAN: 1 Mode: Forward-Unregistered show mac address-table Use the show mac address-table command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode to display all entries in the bridge-forwarding database.
PAGE 275
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 275 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example In this example, all classes of entries in the mac address-table are displayed. console#show mac address-table Aging time is 300 Sec Vlan Mac Address Type Port ---- ---------------- ---------- ----------0 001E.C9AA.AE19 Management CPU Interface: 1 001E.C9AA.AC19 Dynamic Gi1/0/21 1 001E.C9AA.AE1B Management Vl1 10 001E.C9AA.AE1B Management Vl10 90 001E.C9AA.
PAGE 276
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 276 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description interface-id Display information for a specific interface. Valid interfaces include physical ports and port channels. vlan-id Display entries for the specific VLAN only. The range is 1 to 4093. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 277
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 277 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description interface-id Specify an interface type; valid interfaces include physical ports and port channels. vlan-id Specify a valid VLAN, the range is 1 to 4093. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 278
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 278 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show mac address-table dynamic [address mac-address] [interface interfaceid] [vlan vlan-id] Parameter Description Parameter Description mac-address A MAC address with the format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx. interface-id Display information for a specific interface. Valid interfaces include physical ports and port channels. vlan-id Display entries for the specific VLAN only. The range is 1 to 4093.
PAGE 279
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 279 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 1 0001.02F1.0B33 Dynamic gi1/0/1 show mac address-table interface Use the show mac address-table command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode to display all entries in the mac address-table. Syntax show mac address-table interface interface-id [vlan vlan-id] Parameter Description Parameter Description interface-id Specify an interface type.Valid interfaces include physical ports and port channels. vlan-id Specify a valid VLAN.
PAGE 280
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 280 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ---- -------------- ---- ------------- 1 0000.0001.0000 Dynamic gi1/0/1 1 0000.8420.5010 Dynamic gi1/0/1 1 0000.E26D.2C2A Dynamic gi1/0/1 1 0000.E89A.596E Dynamic gi1/0/1 1 0001.02F1.0B33 Dynamic gi1/0/1 show mac address-table static Use the show mac address-table static command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode to display static entries in the bridge-forwarding database.
PAGE 281
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 281 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example In this example, all static entries in the bridge-forwarding database are displayed. console#show mac address-table static Vlan Mac Address Type Port ---- -------------- ----- ----- 1 gi1/0/1 0001.0001.0001 Static show mac address-table vlan Use the show mac address-table vlan command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode to display all entries in the bridge-forwarding database for the specified VLAN.
PAGE 282
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 282 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example In this example, all classes of entries in the bridge-forwarding database are displayed. console#show mac address-table vlan 1 Mac Address Table ------------------------------------Vlan Mac Address Type Ports ---- --------------- ------- ------- 1 0000.0001.0000 Dynamic gi1/0/1 1 0000.8420.5010 Dynamic gi1/0/1 1 0000.E26D.2C2A Dynamic gi1/0/1 1 0000.E89A.596E Dynamic gi1/0/1 1 0001.02F1.
PAGE 283
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 283 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example In this example, all classes of entries in the port-lock status are displayed. console#show ports security Port Status ---- ------ 1/0/1 Locked Action ---------Discard 1/0/2 Unlocked 1/0/3 Locked Maximum Trap Frequency --------- ------- ------3 Enable 100 28 - - Disable - Discard, Shutdown 8 The following table describes the fields in this example.
PAGE 284
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 284 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show ports security addresses {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel port-channel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port } Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Examples The following example displays dynamic addresses for port channel number 1/0/1.
PAGE 285
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 285 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 7 Auto-VoIP Commands Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) allows network users to make telephone calls using a computer network over a data network like the Internet. With the increased prominence of delay-sensitive applications (voice, video, and other multimedia applications) deployed in networks today, proper QoS configuration ensures high-quality application performance.
PAGE 286
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 286 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 287
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 288
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 288 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM --More-- or (q)uit The following example shows command output when a port is specified: console#show switchport voice gigabitethernet 1/0/1 Interface Auto VoIP Mode Traffic Class --------- -------------- ------------- Gi1/0/1 Disabled 6 The command output provides the following information: • AutoVoIP Mode—The Auto VoIP mode on the interface.
PAGE 289
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 290
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 291
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 291 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM CDP Interoperability Commands 8 Industry Standard Discovery Protocol (ISDP) is a proprietary Layer 2 network protocol which inter-operates with Cisco network equipment and is used to share information between neighboring devices. PowerConnect switches participate in the ISDP protocol and are able to both discover and be discovered by devices that support the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP).
PAGE 292
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 292 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console#clear isdp counters clear isdp table The clear isdp table command clears entries in the ISDP table. Syntax clear isdp table Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 293
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 293 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration ISDP sends version 2 packets by default. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config)#isdp advertise-v2 isdp enable The isdp enable command enables ISDP on the switch. User the “no” form of this command to disable ISDP. Use this command in global configuration mode to enable the ISDP function on the switch.
PAGE 294
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 294 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example enables isdp on interface 1/0/1. console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 console(config-if-1/0/1)#isdp enable isdp holdtime The isdp holdtime command configures the hold time for ISDP packets that the switch transmits. The hold time specifies how long a receiving device should store information sent in the ISDP packet before discarding it. The range is given in seconds.
PAGE 295
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 295 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM isdp timer The isdp timer command sets period of time between sending new ISDP packets. The range is given in seconds. Use the “no” form of this command to reset the timer to the default. Syntax isdp timer time no isdp timer Parameter Description Parameter Description time The time in seconds (range: 5–254 seconds). Default Configuration The default timer is 30 seconds.
PAGE 296
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 296 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console#show isdp Timer................................ 30 Hold Time............................ 180 Version 2 Advertisements............. Enabled Neighbors table last time changed.... 0 days 00:06:01 Device ID............................
PAGE 297
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 297 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console#show isdp entry Switch Device ID Switch Address(es): IP Address: 172.20.1.18 IP Address: 172.20.1.
PAGE 298
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 298 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Compiled Wed 21-Mar-07 12:20 by tinhuang show isdp interface The show isdp interface command displays ISDP settings for the specified interface. Syntax show isdp interface { all | gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port } Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 299
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 300
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 300 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show isdp neighbors {[ gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port | detail] } Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 301
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 301 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Interface 1/0/1 Port ID GigabitEthernet1/1 Holdtime 162 Advertisement Version 2 Entry last changed time 0 days 00:55:20 Version : Cisco IOS Software, Catalyst 4000 L3 Switch Software (cat4000-I9K91S-M), Version 12.2(25)EWA9, RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc3) Technical Support: http://www.cisco.com/techsupport Copyright (c) 1986-2007 by Cisco Systems, Inc.
PAGE 302
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 302 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ISDP Packets Transmitted....................... 127 ISDPv1 Packets Received........................ 0 ISDPv1 Packets Transmitted..................... 0 ISDPv2 Packets Received........................ 4253 ISDPv2 Packets Transmitted..................... 4351 ISDP Bad Header................................ 0 ISDP Checksum Error............................ 0 ISDP Transmission Failure...................... 0 ISDP Invalid Format............
PAGE 303
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 303 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Data Center Bridging Commands 9 NOTE: Data Center Bridging commands are only supported on the PCM8024-k switch. CLI commands and Dell OpenManage Switch Administrator pages are not available for other switch models.
PAGE 304
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 304 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example #2 console#clear priority-flow-control statistics portchannel 1 Example #3 console#clear priority-flow-control statistics datacenter-bridging Use the datacenter-bridging command for an ethernet or port-channel interface in order to enter the DataCenterBridging mode. Priority-FlowControl is configurable from within the DataCenterBridging mode.
PAGE 305
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 305 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM priority-flow-control mode on Use the priority-flow-control mode on command in Datacenter-Bridging mode to enable Priority-Flow-Control (PFC) on an interface. To disable Priority-Flow-Control, use the no form of the command. Syntax priority-flow-control mode on no priority-flow-control mode Default Configuration Priority-flow-control mode is disabled by default.
PAGE 306
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 306 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The default behavior is drop. Command Mode Datacenter-Bridging mode User Guidelines This command has no effect on interfaces not enabled for PFC. Example The following example creates a priority group that pauses dot1p priority 5 on all interfaces.
PAGE 307
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 307 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 308
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 309
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 309 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 1/g48 1-4,7 5,6 Enabled Active ch1 1-4,7 5,6 Enabled Active ch2 1-4,7 5,6 Enabled Active ... ... ... ... ...
PAGE 310
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 311
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 311 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 10 DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands In the majority of network configurations, DHCP clients and their associated servers do not reside on the same IP network or subnet. Therefore, some kind of third-party agent is required to transfer DHCP messages between clients and servers. Such an agent is known as a DHCP relay agent. The DHCP relay agent accepts DHCP requests from any routed interface, including VLANs.
PAGE 312
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 312 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration DHCP L2 Relay is disabled by default. Command Mode Global Configuration. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config)#dhcp l2relay dhcp l2relay (Interface Configuration) Use the dhcp l2relay command to enable DHCP L2 Relay for an interface. Use the "no" form of this command to disable DHCP L2 Relay for an interface.
PAGE 313
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 313 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM dhcp l2relay circuit-id Use the dhcp l2relay circuit-id command to enable setting the DHCP Option 82 Circuit ID for a VLAN. When enabled, the interface number is added as the Circuit ID in DHCP option 82. Use the "no" form of this command to disable setting the DHCP Option 82 Circuit ID.
PAGE 314
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 314 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax dhcp l2relay remote-id remoteId vlan vlan-range no dhcp l2relay remote-id remoteId vlan vlan-range Parameter Description Parameter Description remoteId The string to be used as the remote ID in the Option 82 (Range: 1 - 128 characters). Default Configuration Setting the DHCP Option 82 Remote ID is disabled by default. Command Mode Global Configuration. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 315
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 315 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Configuration Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port-channel). User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config-if-1/0/1)#dhcp l2relay trust dhcp l2relay vlan Use the dhcp l2relay vlan command to enable the L2 DHCP Relay agent for a set of VLANs. All DHCP packets which arrive on interfaces in the configured VLAN are subject to L2 Relay processing.
PAGE 316
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 317
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 317 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM DHCP Management Interface Commands 11 PowerConnect switches support an embedded DHCP client. Any IP interface can use DHCP to obtain an IP address. The DHCP client can run on multiple interfaces simultaneously. For IPv4, an IP interface can either use manually configured addresses or be enabled for DHCP. The options are mutually exclusive.
PAGE 318
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 318 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM renew dhcp show dhcp lease release dhcp Use the release dhcp command in Privileged EXEC mode to force the DHCPv4 client to release a leased address. Syntax release dhcp interface-id Parameter Description Parameter Description interface-id Any valid VLAN interface. See Interface Naming Conventions for interface representation. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 319
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 319 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console#release dhcp vlan2 renew dhcp Use the renew dhcp command in Privileged EXEC mode to force the DHCP client to immediately renew an IPv4 address lease. Syntax renew dhcp {interface-id | out-of-band} Parameter Description Parameter Description interface-id Any valid routing interface. See Interface Naming Conventions for interface representation. out-of-band Keyword to identify the out-of-band interface.
PAGE 320
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 320 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Examples The first example is for routing interfaces. console#renew dhcp vlan 2 The second example is for out-of-band port. console#renew dhcp out-of-band debug dhcp packet Use the debug dhcp packet command in Privileged EXEC mode to display debug information about DHCPv4 client activities and to trace DHCPv4 packets to and from the local DHCPv4 client. To disable debugging, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 321
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 321 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console#debug dhcp packet transmit The third example is for receive flow. console#debug dhcp packet receive show dhcp lease Use the show dhcp lease command in Privileged EXEC mode to display IPv4 addresses leased from a DHCP server. Syntax show dhcp lease [interface interface-id] Parameter Description Parameter Description interface-id Any valid IP interface (VLAN only).
PAGE 322
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 322 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Term Description DHCP Lease server The IPv4 address of the DHCP server that leased the address. State State of the DHCPv4 Client on this interface. DHCP transaction id The transaction ID of the DHCPv4 Client. Lease The time (in seconds) that the IP address was leased by the server. Renewal The time (in seconds) when the next DHCP renew Request is sent by DHCPv4 Client to renew the leased IP address.
PAGE 323
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 323 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 DHCP Lease server: 10.1.20.
PAGE 324
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 325
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 325 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM DHCP Snooping Commands 12 DHCP Snooping is a security feature that monitors DHCP messages between DHCP clients and DHCP server to filter harmful DHCP messages and build a bindings database of {MAC address, IP address, VLAN ID, interface} tuples that are considered authorized. The DHCP snooping application processes incoming DHCP messages.
PAGE 326
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 327
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 327 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM clear ip dhcp snooping statistics Use the clear ip dhcp snooping statistics command to clear all DHCP Snooping statistics. Syntax clear ip dhcp snooping statistics Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 328
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 328 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config)#ip dhcp snooping console(config-if-vlan1)#ip dhcp snooping ip dhcp snooping binding Use the ip dhcp snooping binding command to configure a static DHCP Snooping binding. Use the “no” form of this command to remove a static binding.
PAGE 329
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 329 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config)#ip dhcp snooping binding 00:00:00:00:00:01 vlan 10 10.131.12.134 interface 1/0/1 ip dhcp snooping database Use the ip dhcp snooping database command to configure the persistent storage location of the DHCP snooping database. This can be local to the switch or on a remote machine.
PAGE 330
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 330 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example The following example configures the storage location of the snooping database as local. console(config)#ip dhcp snooping database local The following example configures the storage location of the snooping database as remote. console(config)#ip dhcp snooping database tftp://10.131.11.1/db.
PAGE 331
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 331 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config)#ip dhcp snooping database write-delay 500 ip dhcp snooping limit Use the ip dhcp snooping limit command to control the maximum rate of DHCP messages. Use the no form of this command to reset the limit to the default.
PAGE 332
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 332 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip dhcp snooping log-invalid Use the ip dhcp snooping log-invalid command to enable logging of DHCP messages filtered by the DHCP Snooping application. Use the “no” form of this command to disable logging. Syntax ip dhcp snooping log-invalid no ip dhcp snooping log-invalid Default Configuration Logging of filtered messages is disabled by default.
PAGE 333
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 333 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration Ports are untrusted by default. Command Mode Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet) mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 334
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 334 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(config)#ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address show ip dhcp snooping Use the show ip dhcp snooping command to display the DHCP snooping global configuration. Syntax show ip dhcp snooping Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command.
PAGE 335
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 335 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM --------- -------- ---------------- 1/0/1 Yes No 1/0/2 No Yes 1/0/3 No Yes 1/0/4 No No 1/0/6 No No show ip dhcp snooping binding Use the show ip dhcp snooping binding command to display the DHCP snooping binding entries. Syntax show ip dhcp snooping binding [{ static | dynamic } ] [ interface interfaceid ] [ vlan vlan-id ] • static | dynamic— Use these keywords to filter by static or dynamic bindings.
PAGE 336
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 336 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM MAC Address IP Address VLAN Interface Lease time(Secs) ------------------ ------------ ---- --------- ------------- 00:02:B3:06:60:80 210.1.1.3 10 1/0/1 86400 00:0F:FE:00:13:04 210.1.1.4 10 1/0/1 86400 show ip dhcp snooping database Use the show ip dhcp snooping database command to display the DHCP snooping configuration related to the database persistence.
PAGE 337
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 337 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip dhcp snooping interfaces Use the show ip dhcp snooping interfaces command to show the DHCP Snooping status of the interfaces. Syntax show ip dhcp snooping interfaces [interface] • interface—A valid physical interface. Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 338
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 338 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 1/0/15 Yes 15 1 show ip dhcp snooping statistics Use the show ip dhcp snooping statistics command to display the DHCP snooping filtration statistics. Syntax show ip dhcp snooping statistics Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command.
PAGE 339
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 340
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 341
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 341 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands 13 Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI) is a security feature that rejects invalid and malicious ARP packets. The feature prevents a class of man-in-the-middle attacks, where an unfriendly station intercepts traffic for other stations by poisoning the ARP caches of its neighbors. The miscreant sends ARP requests or responses mapping another station IP address to its own MAC address.
PAGE 342
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 342 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration There are no ARP ACLs created by default. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config)#arp access-list tier1 clear ip arp inspection statistics Use the clear ip arp inspection statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode to reset the statistics for Dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) inspection on all VLANs.
PAGE 343
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 343 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console#clear ip arp inspection statistics ip arp inspection filter Use the ip arp inspection filter command to configure the ARP ACL to be used for a single VLAN or a range of VLANs to filter invalid ARP packets. If the static keyword is given, packets that do not match a permit statement are dropped without consulting the DHCP snooping bindings. Use the “no” form of this command to unconfigure the ARP ACL.
PAGE 344
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 344 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Configuring none for the limit means the interface is not rate limited for Dynamic ARP Inspection. Syntax ip arp inspection limit { none | rate pps [ burst interval seconds ] } no ip arp inspection limit • none — To set no rate limit. • pps — The number of packets per second (Range: 0–300). • seconds — The number of seconds (Range: 1–15). Default Configuration The default rate limit is 15 packets per second.
PAGE 345
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 345 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no ip arp inspection trust Default Configuration Interfaces are configured as untrusted by default. Command Mode Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet) mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 346
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 346 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration There is no additional validation enabled by default.
PAGE 347
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 347 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config)#ip arp inspection vlan 200-300 console(config)#ip arp inspection vlan 200-300 logging permit ip host mac host Use the permit ip host mac host command to configure a rule for a valid IP address and MAC address combination used in ARP packet validation. Use the “no” form of this command to delete an ARP ACL rule.
PAGE 348
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 348 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show arp access-list Use the show arp access-list command to display the configured ARP ACLs with the rules. Giving an ARP ACL name as the argument would display only the rules in that ARP ACL. Syntax show arp access-list [ acl-name ] acl-name — A valid ARP ACL name (Range: 1–31 characters). Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command.
PAGE 349
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 349 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show ip arp inspection [interfaces [interface-id] | statistics [vlan vlan-range] | vlan vlan-range] Parameter Description Parameter Description interfaces [interface-id] Display the Dynamic ARP Inspection configuration on all the DAI enabled interfaces. Giving an interface argument, it displays the values for that interface.
PAGE 350
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 350 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM DHCP Drops The number of packets dropped due to DHCP Snooping binding database match failure. ACL Drops The number of packets dropped due to ARP ACL rule match failure. DHCP Permits The number of packets permitted due to DHCP snooping binding database match. ACL Permits The number of packets permitted due to ARP ACL rule match. Bad Src MAC The number of packets dropped due to Source MAC validation failure.
PAGE 351
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 351 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM (pps) --------------- ----------- (seconds) ---------- --------------- 1/0/1 Untrusted 15 1 1/0/2 Untrusted 10 10 Following is an example of the show ip arp inspection statistics command.
PAGE 352
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 352 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description vlan-range A valid VLAN range. Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines The following global parameters are displayed: Parameter Description Source Mac Validation If Source Mac validation of ARP frame is enabled.
PAGE 353
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 354
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 355
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 355 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Email Alerting Commands 14 Email Alerting is an extension of the logging system. The PowerConnect logging system allows the user to configure a variety of destinations for log messages. This feature adds email configuration capabilities, by which the log messages are sent to a configured SMTP server such that an operator may receive the log in an e-mail account of their choice.
PAGE 356
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 357
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 357 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description severity If you specify a severity level, log messages at or above the severity level are emailed. The severity level may either be specified by keyword or as an integer from 0 to 7. The accepted keywords, and the numeric severity level each represents, are as follows.
PAGE 358
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 358 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM logging email urgent Use the logging email urgent command in Global Configuration mode to set the lowest severity level at which log messages are emailed in an urgent manner. To revert the urgent severity level to its default value, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 359
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 359 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Log messages at or above this severity level are considered urgent. By default, Emergency and Alert log messages are considered urgent. Urgent log messages are emailed immediately, one log message per email message, and do not wait for the log time to expire. Urgent log messages are not emailed unless you enable email alerting with the logging email command.
PAGE 360
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 360 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The default severity level is info(6). Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines You can filter log messages that appear in the buffered log by severity level. You can specify the severity level of log messages that are emailed.
PAGE 361
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 361 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration User Guidelines This command removes the configured to-addr field of email. logging email from-addr Use the logging email from-addr command in Global Configuration mode to configure the From address of the email. Use the no form of this command to remove the email source address.
PAGE 362
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 362 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax logging email message-type message-type subject subject no logging email message-type message-type subject Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration User Guidelines The user must enter the message-type parameter manually as tab and space bar completion do not work for this parameter.
PAGE 363
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 363 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. logging email test message-type Use the logging email test message-type command in Global Configuration mode to test whether or not an e-mail is being sent to an SMTP server.
PAGE 364
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 364 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show logging email statistics Use the show logging email statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode to show the statistics about the emails. The command displays information on how many emails are sent, how many emails failed, when the last email was sent, how long it has been since the last email was sent, how long it has been since the email changed to disabled mode.
PAGE 365
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 365 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. security Use the security command in Mail Server Configuration mode to set the email alerting security protocol. This enables and disables the switch to use TLS authentication with the SMTP Server.
PAGE 366
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 366 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM mail-server ip-address | hostname Use the mail-server ip-address | hostname command in Global Configuration mode to configure the SMTP server IP address and change the mode to Mail Server Configuration mode. The server address can be in the IPv4, IPv6, or DNS name format. Use the no form of this command to remove the configured SMTP server address.
PAGE 367
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 367 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM port (Mail Server Configuration Mode) Use the port command in Mail Server Configuration mode to configure the TCP port to use for communication with the SMTP server. Port can be set to 465 or 25. Use the no form of the command to revert the SMTP port to the default port. Syntax port port no port Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description. Default Configuration The default value is 25.
PAGE 368
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 368 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description. Default Configuration The default value for username is admin. Command Mode Mail Server Configuration User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. password (Mail Server Configuration Mode) Use the password command in Mail Server Configuration mode to configure the password required to authenticate to the email server.
PAGE 369
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 369 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show mail-server Use the show mail-server command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the configuration of all the mail servers or a particular mail server. Syntax show mail-server {ip-address | hostname | all} Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 370
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 370 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM SMTP server authentication details: Username: admin Mail server2 configuration: SMTP server IP Address: 10.131.1.31 SMTP server Port: 465 SMTP server security protocol: tls SMTP server authentication details: Username: admin console#show mail-server ip-address 10.131.1.11 SMTP server IP Address: 10.131.1.
PAGE 371
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 371 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 15 Ethernet Configuration Commands PowerConnect switches support a variety of configuration options to optimize network operations. Features such as flow-control and jumbo frames are supported along with a variety of commands to display traffic statistics as well as limit the effects of network loops or other network issues.
PAGE 372
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 372 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM On a storm control enabled interface, if the ingress rate of that type of packet (L2 broadcast, multicast, or unicast) is greater than the configured threshold level (as a percentage of port speed or as an absolute packets-per-second rate), the switch forwarding-plane discards the excess traffic. The speed and duplex commands control interface link speeds and autonegotiation.
PAGE 373
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 373 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example In the following example, the counters for port 1/0/1 are cleared. console#clear counters gigabitethernet 1/0/1 description Use the description command in Interface Configuration mode to add a description to an interface. To remove the description use the no form of this command.
PAGE 374
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 374 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/5 console(config-if-1/0/5)# description RD_SW#3 duplex Use the duplex command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the duplex operation of a given Ethernet interface. To restore the default, use the no form of this command. Syntax duplex {auto | half | full} no duplex Parameter Description Parameter Description auto Auto negotiation is enabled for the port.
PAGE 375
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 375 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example configures the duplex operation of gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5 to force full duplex operation. console(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/0/5 console(config-if)# duplex full flowcontrol Use the flowcontrol command in Global Configuration mode to configure the flow control. To disable flow control, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 376
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 376 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM NOTE: Additional forms of the interface command enable configuring VLANs, tunnels, the loopback interface, the out-of-band interface, and ranges of interfaces. See interface vlan, interface tunnel, interface loopback, and interface range. Syntax interface {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel port-channel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port} Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 377
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 377 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description port-range A list of valid ports to configure. Separate non-consecutive ports with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of ports. For more detailed information, see Operating on Multiple Objects (Range). port-type Shows all interfaces of the specified type. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 378
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 379
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 379 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show interfaces advertise Use the show interfaces advertise command in Privileged EXEC mode to display information about auto-negotiation advertisement. Syntax show interfaces advertise [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}] Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 380
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 380 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Admin Local Link ------ ------ ------ ------ -----Advertisement yes yes yes yes no show interfaces configuration Use the show interfaces configuration command in User EXEC mode to display the configuration for all configured interfaces.
PAGE 381
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 382
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 382 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show interfaces counters Use the show interfaces counters command in User EXEC mode to display traffic seen by the interface. Use the command in either User EXEC mode or Privileged EXEC mode to display Priority Flow Control (PFC) traffic seen by the interface, including Received PFC Frames and Transmitted PFC Frames for a given ethernet or port-channel interface.
PAGE 383
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 383 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 2/0/1 0 0 3/0/1 8789 27 Ch InOctets InUcastPkts ---- ---------- --------- 1 27889 928 Ch OutOctets OutUcastPkts ---- ---------- --------- 1 23739 882 The following example displays counters for Ethernet port 1/0/1.
PAGE 384
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 384 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Deferred Transmissions: 0 Late Collisions: 0 Excessive Collisions: 0 Oversize Packets: 0 Internal MAC Rx Errors: 0 Received Pause Frames: 0 Transmitted Pause Frames: 0 The following table describes the fields shown in the display: Field Description InOctets Counted received octets. InUcastPkts Counted received Unicast packets. InMcastPkts Counted received Multicast packets. InBcastPkts Counted received Broadcast packets.
PAGE 385
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 385 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Field Description Late Collisions Counted times that a collision is detected later than one slot time into the transmission of a packet. Excessive Collisions Counted frames for which transmission fails due to excessive collisions. Oversize Packets Counted frames received that exceed the maximum permitted frame size. Internal MAC Rx Errors A count of frames for which reception fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error.
PAGE 386
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 386 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console>show interfaces description Port Description ---- ----------------------------------------------------1/0/1 Port that should be used for management only 2/0/1 2/0/2 Ch Description ---- ----------- 1 Output show interfaces status Use the show interfaces status command in User EXEC mode to display the status for all configured interfaces.
PAGE 387
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 387 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the status for all configured interfaces.
PAGE 388
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 389
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 390
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 390 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show statistics Use the show statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode to display detailed statistics for a specific port or for the entire switch. Syntax show statistics {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port |switchport | port-channel port-channel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port} Parameter Description Parameter Description unit/slot/port A valid interface. See Interface Naming Conventions for interface representation.
PAGE 391
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 391 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Packets Received 512-1023 Octets............... 4824 Packets Received 1024-1518 Octets.............. 479543 Packets Received > 1522 Octets................. 0 Packets RX and TX 64 Octets.................... 94516 Packets RX and TX 65-127 Octets................ 483312 Packets RX and TX 128-255 Octets............... 101329 Packets RX and TX 256-511 Octets............... 163696 Packets RX and TX 512-1023 Octets..............
PAGE 392
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 392 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Reserved Address Discards...................... 0 Broadcast Storm Recovery....................... 0 CFI Discards................................... 0 Upstream Threshold............................. 0 Total Packets Transmitted (Octets)............. 3604988 Packets Transmitted 64 Octets.................. 45566 Packets Transmitted 65-127 Octets.............. 886 Packets Transmitted 128-255 Octets.............
PAGE 393
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 393 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM GVRP PDUs Transmitted.......................... 0 GVRP Failed Registrations...................... 0 BPDU: sent 44432, received 0 EAPOL Frames Transmitted....................... 0 EAPOL Start Frames Received.................... 0 Time Since Counters Last Cleared............... 1 day 0 hr 41 min 44 sec The following example shows statistics for the entire switch.
PAGE 394
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 394 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM VLAN Deletes................................... 0 Time Since Counters Last Cleared............... 1 day 0 hr 42 min 13 sec console# The following example shows statistics for the entire switch. console#show statistics switchport Total Packets Received (Octets)................ 0 Packets Received Without Error................. 0 Unicast Packets Received....................... 0 Multicast Packets Received.....................
PAGE 395
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 395 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM VLAN Deletes................................... 0 Time Since Counters Last Cleared... 0 day 18 hr 1 min 59 sec show statistics switchport Use the show statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode to display detailed statistics for a specific port or for the entire switch. Syntax show statistics {interface-id |switchport} Parameter Description Parameter Description interface-id Interface id.
PAGE 396
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 396 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Unicast Packets Received....................... 0 Multicast Packets Received..................... 0 Broadcast Packets Received..................... 0 Receive Packets Discarded...................... 0 Octets Transmitted............................. 0 Packets Transmitted Without Errors............. 0 Unicast Packets Transmitted.................... 0 Multicast Packets Transmitted.................. 0 Broadcast Packets Transmitted.........
PAGE 397
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 397 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show storm-control Use the show storm-control command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the configuration of storm control. Syntax show storm-control [all | {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}] Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 398
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 398 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM shutdown Use the shutdown command in Interface Configuration mode to disable an interface. To restart a disabled interface, use the no form of this command. Syntax shutdown no shutdown Default Configuration The interface is enabled. Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port-Channel, Tunnel, Loopback) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 399
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 399 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no speed Parameter Description Parameter Description 10 Configures the port to 10 Mbps operation. 100 Configures the port to 100 Mbps operation. 1000 Configures the port to 1000 Mbps operation. 10000 Configures the port to 10 Gbps operation. auto The port automatically detects the speed it should run based on the port at the other end of the link.
PAGE 400
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 400 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM storm-control broadcast Use the storm-control broadcast command in Interface Configuration mode to enable broadcast storm recovery mode for a specific interface. If the mode is enabled, broadcast storm recovery is active, and if the rate of L2 broadcast traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic will be dropped.
PAGE 401
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 401 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM When you use the no storm-control multicast command to "disable" stormcontrol after having set the level or rate to a non-default value, that value is still set but is not active until you re-enable storm-control. Syntax storm-control multicast [level | rate] no storm-control multicast • level— The configured rate as a percentage of link-speed. • rate — The configured rate in kilobits per second (kbps).
PAGE 402
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 402 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax storm-control unicast [level | rate] no storm-control unicast • level— The configured rate as a percentage of link-speed. • rate — The configured rate in kilobits per second (kbps). (Range: 0-100) Default Configuration The default value is 5. Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 403
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 403 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • groupid--Identifies which group this port will be protected in. (Range: 0-2) Default Configuration No protected switchports are defined. Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures Ethernet port 1/0/1 as a member of protected group 1.
PAGE 404
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 404 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example assigns the name "protected" to group 1. console(config-if-1/0/1)#switchport protected 1 name protected show switchport protected Use the show switchport protected command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the status of all the interfaces, including protected and unprotected interfaces.
PAGE 405
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 405 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Name.........................................
PAGE 406
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 407
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 407 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Ethernet CFM Commands 16 Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) is the OAM Protocol provision for end-to-end service layer OAM in carrier Ethernet networks. CFM provides mechanisms to support the operator in performing connectivity checks, fault detection, fault verification and isolation, and fault notification per service in the network domain of interest. Unlike Ethernet OAM defined in IEEE 802.
PAGE 408
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 408 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ethernet cfm mep archive-hold-time show ethernet cfm statistics ethernet cfm mip level debug cfm ethernet cfm domain Use the ethernet cfm domain command in Global Configuration mode to enter into maintenance domain config mode for an existing domain. Use the optional level parameter to create a domain and enter into maintenance domain config mode.
PAGE 409
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 409 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines Each domain must have a unique name and level, for example, one cannot create a domain qwerty at level 2 if domain qwerty already exists at level 1. Likewise, one cannot create a domain dvorak at level 2 if a domain of any name exists at level 2. Example In this example, a domain vin is created at level 1.
PAGE 410
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 410 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Maintenance domain config mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console(config-cfm-mdomain)#service serv1 vlan 10 ethernet cfm cc level Use the ethernet cfm cc level command in Global Configuration mode to initiate sending continuity checks (CCMs) at the specified interval and level on a VLAN monitored by an existing domain. Use the no form of the command to cease send CCMs.
PAGE 411
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 411 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration CCMs are not sent by default. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console(config)#ethernet cfm cc level 1 vlan 15 interval 10 ethernet cfm mep level Use the ethernet cfm mep level command in Interface Configuration mode to create a Maintenance End Point (MEP) on an interface at the specified level and direction.
PAGE 412
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 412 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example creates a maintenance endpoint at level 1 with mpid 1010 on vlan 10. console(config-if-Gi1/0/3)#ethernet cfm mep level 1 direction up mpid 1010 vlan 10 ethernet cfm mep enable Use the ethernet cfm mep enable command in Interface Configuration mode to enable a MEP at the specified level and direction.
PAGE 413
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 413 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines The maintenance domain must exist for it to be enabled. Example The following example enables a maintenance endpoint at level 1 with mpid 1010 on vlan 10. console(config-if-Gi1/0/3)#ethernet cfm mep enable level 1 vlan 10 mpid 1010 ethernet cfm mep active Use the ethernet cfm mep active command in Interface Configuration mode to activate a MEP at the specified level and direction.
PAGE 414
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 414 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ethernet cfm mep archive-hold-time Use the ethernet cfm mep archive-hold-time command in Interface Configuration mode to maintain internal information on a missing MEP. Use the no form of the command to return the interval to the default value.
PAGE 415
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 415 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ethernet cfm mip level 0-7 Parameter Description Parameter Description level Maintenance association level Default Configuration No MIPs are preconfigured. Command Mode Interface Configuration User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 416
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 416 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description mac-addr The destination MAC address for which the connectivity needs to be verified. Either MEP ID or the MAC address option can be used. remote-mpid The MEP ID for which connectivity is to be verified; i.e. the destination MEP ID. domain Name of the maintenance domain (an alphanumeric string of up to 43 characters in length). vlan-id A VLAN associated with the maintenance domain. Range: 14094.
PAGE 417
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 417 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax traceroute ethernet cfm {mac mac-addr| remote-mpid 1-8191} {domain domain name | level 0-7 } vlan vlan-id mpid 1-8191 [ttl 1-255] Parameter Description Parameter Description level Maintenance association level mac-addr The destination MAC address for which the route needs to be traced. Either MEP ID or the MAC address option can be used. remote-mpid The MEP ID for which connectivity needs to be verified; i.e.
PAGE 418
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 418 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ethernet cfm errors Use the show ethernet cfm errors command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the cfm errors. Syntax show ethernet cfm errors {domain domain-id | level 0-7} Parameter Description Parameter Description domain Name of the maintenance domain (an alphanumeric string of up to 43 characters in length). level Maintenance association level Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 419
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 419 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show ethernet cfm domain {brief |domain-id} Parameter Description Parameter Description domain Name of the maintenance domain (an alphanumeric string of up to 43 characters in length). Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 420
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 420 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local {level 0-7 | interface interfaceid | domain domain-name} Parameter Description Parameter Description domain Name of the maintenance domain (an alphanumeric string of up to 43 characters in length). level Maintenance association level interface-id Show all MPs associated with the interface. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 421
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 421 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote {level 0-7 | domain domainname | detail [ mac mac-address | mep MEPId] [domain domain-name | level 0-7] [vlan vlan-id]} Parameter Description Parameter Description domain Name of the maintenance domain (an alphanumeric string of up to 43 characters in length). level Maintenance association level mac-address The destination MAC address for which the information is desired.
PAGE 422
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 422 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ethernet cfm statistics Use the show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the CFM statistics. Syntax show ethernet cfm statistics [domain domain-name | level 0-7] Parameter Description Parameter Description domain-name Name of the maintenance domain (an alphanumeric string of up to 43 characters in length).
PAGE 423
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 424
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 424 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description event CFM events pdu CFM PDUs ccm Continuity check messages ltm Link trace messages lbm Loopback messages tx Transmit only rx Receive only all Everything Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 425
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 426
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 427
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 427 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 17 GVRP Commands GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) is used to propagate VLAN membership information throughout the network. GVRP is based on the Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP), which defines a method of propagating a defined attribute (that is, VLAN membership) throughout the network. GVRP allows both end stations and the networking device to issue and revoke declarations relating to membership in VLANs.
PAGE 428
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 428 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax clear gvrp statistics [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port }] Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example clears all the GVRP statistics information on port 1/0/8.
PAGE 429
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 429 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The default timer values are as follows: • Join timer — 20 centiseconds • Leave timer — 60 centiseconds • Leaveall timer — 1000 centiseconds Command Mode Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet) mode User Guidelines The following relationships for the various timer values must be maintained: • Leave time must be greater than or equal to three times the join time.
PAGE 430
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 430 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration GVRP is globally disabled. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example globally enables GVRP on the device. console(config)#gvrp enable gvrp enable (interface) Use the gvrp enable command in Interface Configuration mode to enable GVRP on an interface. To disable GVRP on an interface, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 431
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 431 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Membership in untagged VLAN would be propagated in a same way as a tagged VLAN. In such cases it is the administrator’s responsibility to set the PVID to be the untagged VLAN VID. Example The following example enables GVRP on gigabit ethernet 1/0/8.
PAGE 432
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 432 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-if-1/0/8)#gvrp registration-forbid gvrp vlan-creation-forbid Use the gvrp vlan-creation-forbid command in Interface Configuration mode to disable dynamic VLAN creation. To disable dynamic VLAN creation, use the no form of this command. Syntax gvrp vlan-creation-forbid no gvrp vlan-creation-forbid Default Configuration By default, dynamic VLAN creation is enabled.
PAGE 433
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 433 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show gvrp configuration [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port } ] Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 434
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 434 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show gvrp error-statistics Use the show gvrp error-statistics command in User EXEC mode to display GVRP error statistics. Syntax show gvrp error-statistics [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port }] Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 435
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 435 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 1/0/3 0 0 0 0 0 1/0/4 0 0 0 0 0 show gvrp statistics Use the show gvrp statistics command in User EXEC mode to display GVRP statistics. Syntax show gvrp statistics [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port }] Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 436
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 437
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 437 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IGMP Snooping Commands 18 Snooping of Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) messages is a feature that allows PowerConnect switches to forward multicast traffic intelligently on the switch. Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host group. Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses, which range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
PAGE 438
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 438 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM interface within a specified length of time (multicast router present expiration time), that interface is removed from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached. The multicast router present expiration time is configurable using management. The default value for the multicast router expiration time is zero, which indicates an infinite timeout (that is, no expiration).
PAGE 439
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 439 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines IGMP snooping is enabled on static VLANs only and is not enabled on Private VLANs or their community VLANs. Example The following example globally enables IGMP snooping. console(config)# ip igmp snooping ip igmp snooping (interface) Use the ip igmp snooping command in Interface Configuration mode to enable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on a specific interface.
PAGE 440
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 440 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip igmp snooping host-time-out Use the ip igmp snooping host-time-out command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the host-time-out. If an IGMP report for a Multicast group is not received for a host time-out period from a specific port, this port is deleted from the member list of that Multicast group. To reset to the default host time-out, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 441
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 441 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IGMP leave was received from a specific port, the current port is deleted from the member list of that Multicast group. To configure the default leave-timeout, use the no form of this command. Syntax ip igmp snooping leave-time-out [time-out | immediate-leave] no ip igmp snooping leave-time-out • time-out — Specifies the leave-time-out in seconds.
PAGE 442
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 442 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ip igmp snooping mrouter-time-out time-out no ip igmp snooping mrouter-time-out • time-out — mrouter timeout in seconds for IGMP. (Range: 1–3600) Default Configuration The default value is 300 seconds. Command Mode Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures the mrouter timeout to 200 seconds.
PAGE 443
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 443 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. show ip igmp snooping groups Use the show ip igmp snooping groups command in User EXEC mode to display the Multicast groups learned by IGMP snooping. Syntax show ip igmp snooping groups [vlan vlan-id] [address ip-multicast-address] • vlan_id — Specifies a VLAN ID value.
PAGE 444
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 444 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ---- ----------- ------- 1 224-239.130 | 2.2.3 1/0/1, 2/0/2 19 224-239.130 | 2.2.8 1/0/9-1/0/11 IGMP Reporters that are forbidden statically: --------------------------------------------Vlan IP Address ---- ------------------ 1 224-239.130 | 2.2.
PAGE 445
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 445 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IGMP Snooping Admin Mode.................... Disabled Fast Leave Mode............................. Disabled Group Membership Interval................... 260 Max Response Time........................... 10 Multicast Router Present Expiration Time.... 300 show ip igmp snooping mrouter Use the show ip igmp snooping mrouter command in Privileged EXEC mode to display information on dynamically learned Multicast router interfaces.
PAGE 446
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 446 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ip igmp snooping vlan-id no ip igmp snooping Default Configuration IGMP snooping is disabled on VLAN interfaces by default. Command Mode VLAN Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example enables IGMP snooping on VLAN 2.
PAGE 447
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 447 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no ip igmp snooping fast-leave • vlan id — Number assigned to the VLAN. Default Configuration IGMP snooping fast-leave mode is disabled on VLANs by default. Command Mode VLAN Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example enables IGMP snooping fast-leave mode on VLAN 2.
PAGE 448
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 448 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The default group membership interval time is 260 seconds. Command Mode VLAN Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures an IGMP snooping group membership interval of 520 seconds.
PAGE 449
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 449 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode VLAN Configuration mode User Guidelines When using IGMP Snooping Querier, this parameter should be less than the value for the IGMP Snooping Querier query interval. Example The following example sets the maximum response time to 60 seconds on VLAN 2. console(config-vlan)#ip igmp snooping maxresponse 2 60 ip igmp snooping mcrtrexpiretime This command sets the Multicast Router Present Expiration time.
PAGE 450
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 450 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines The mcrexpiretime should be less than the group membership interval. Example The following example sets the multicast router present expiration time on VLAN 2 to 60 seconds.
PAGE 451
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 451 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 19 IGMP Snooping Querier Commands The IGMP/MLD Snooping Querier is an extension to the IGMP/MLD Snooping feature. IGMP/MLD Snooping Querier allows the switch to simulate an IGMP/MLD router in a Layer 2-only network, thus removing the need to have an IGMP/MLD Router to collect and refresh the multicast group membership information. The querier function simulates a small subset of the IGMP/MLD router functionality.
PAGE 452
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 452 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM source address when generating periodic queries. The no form of this command disables IGMP Snooping Querier on the system. Use the optional address parameter to set or reset the querier address. If a VLAN has IGMP Snooping Querier enabled, and IGMP Snooping is operationally disabled on it, IGMP Snooping Querier functionality is disabled on that VLAN.
PAGE 453
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 453 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example enables IGMP snooping querier in VLAN Configuration mode. console(config-vlan)#ip igmp snooping querier 1 address 10.19.67.1 ip igmp snooping querier election participate This command enables the Snooping Querier to participate in the Querier Election process when it discovers the presence of another Querier in the VLAN.
PAGE 454
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 454 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console#vlan database console(config-vlan)#ip igmp snooping querier election participate ip igmp snooping querier query-interval This command sets the IGMP Querier Query Interval time, which is the amount of time in seconds that the switch waits before sending another periodic query. The no form of this command sets the IGMP Querier Query Interval time to its default value.
PAGE 455
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 455 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip igmp snooping querier timer expiry This command sets the IGMP Querier timer expiration period which is the time period that the switch remains in Non-Querier mode after it has discovered that there is a Multicast Querier in the network. The no form of this command sets the IGMP Querier timer expiration period to its default value.
PAGE 456
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 456 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ip igmp snooping querier version version no ip igmp snooping querier version • version — IGMP version. (Range: 1–2) Default Configuration The querier version default is 2. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets the IGMP version of the querier to 1.
PAGE 457
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 457 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Admin Mode Indicates whether or not IGMP Snooping Querier is active on the switch. Admin Version Indicates the version of IGMP that will be used while sending out the queries. Source IP Address Shows the IP address that is used in the IPv4 header when sending out IGMP queries. It can be configured using the appropriate command.
PAGE 458
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 458 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Elected Querier Indicates the IP address of the Querier that has been designated as the Querier based on its source IP address. This field will be 0.0.0.0 when Querier Election Participate mode is disabled. When the optional argument detail is used, the command shows the global information and the information for all Querier enabled VLANs. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 459
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 459 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IP Addressing Commands 20 Interfaces on the PowerConnect switches support a variety of capabilities to support management of the switch. In addition to performing switching and routing of network traffic, PowerConnect switches act as a host for management of the switch.
PAGE 460
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 460 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM clear host Use the clear host command in Privileged EXEC mode to delete entries from the host name-to-address cache. Syntax clear host {name | *} • name — Host name to be deleted from the host name-to-address cache. (Range: 1-255 characters) • * — Deletes all entries in the host name-to-address cache. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 461
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 461 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console# console#configure console(config)#clear ip address-conflict-detect interface out-of-band Use the interface out-of-band command to bring up the OOB port configuration menu.
PAGE 462
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 462 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-if)# ip address (Out-of-Band) Use the ip address command in Interface Configuration mode to set an IP address for the service port. Use the no form of this command to return the ip address configuration to its default value. Syntax ip address {ip-address {mask | prefix-length} | dhcp} no ip address Parameter Description Parameter Description ip-address Specifies a valid IP address.
PAGE 463
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 463 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines When setting the netmask/prefix length on an IPv4 address, a space is required between the address and the mask or prefix length. Setting an IP address on the out-of-band port enables switch management over the service port. Example The following examples configure the service port with IP address 131.108.1.27 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and the same IP address with prefix length of 24 bits.
PAGE 464
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 464 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console# console#configure console(config)#ip address-conflict-detect run ip address dhcp (Interface Config) Use the ip address dhcp command in Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode to enable the DHCPv4 client on an interface. Syntax ip address dhcp no ip address dhcp Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description.
PAGE 465
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 465 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • The command no ip address removes the interface’s primary address only if configured through DHCP and sets the interface method to None. It does not remove a manually configured address. In addition to leasing an IP address and subnet mask, the DHCP client may learn the following parameters from a DHCP server: • The IPv4 address of a default gateway.
PAGE 466
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 466 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration No default gateway is defined. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines When the system does not have a more specific route to a packet’s destination, it sends the packet to the default gateway. The system installs a default IPv4 route with the gateway address as the next hop address. The route preference is 253.
PAGE 467
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 467 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example enables the IP Domain Naming System (DNS)-based host name-to-address translation. console(config)#ip domain-lookup ip domain-name Use the ip domain-name command in Global Configuration mode to define a default domain name used to complete unqualified host names.
PAGE 468
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 468 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example defines a default domain name of dell.com. console(config)#ip domain-name dell.com ip host Use the ip host command in Global Configuration mode to define static host name-to-address mapping in the host cache. To delete the name-to-address mapping, use the no form of this command. Syntax ip host name address no ip host name • name — Host name. • address — IP address of the host.
PAGE 469
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 469 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip name-server Use the ip name-server command in Global Configuration mode to define available IPv4 or IPv6 name servers. To delete a name server, use the no form of this command. Syntax ip name-server server-address1 [server-address2 … server-address8] no ip name-server [server-address1 … server-address8] • server-address — Valid IPv4 or IPv6 addresses of the name server.
PAGE 470
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 470 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ipv6 address { prefix/prefix-length [eui64] | autoconfig | dhcp } no ipv6 address • prefix —Consists of the bits of the address to be configured. • prefix-length —Designates how many of the high-order contiguous bits of the address make up the prefix. • eui64— The optional eui-64 field designates that IPv6 processing on the interfaces is enabled using an EUI-64 interface ID in the low order 64 bits of the address.
PAGE 471
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 471 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Configure a default gateway on vlan 10 console(config)#no ipv6 address autoconfig console(config)#no ipv6 address 2003::6/64 console(config)#no ipv6 address 2001::/64 eui64 console(config)#no ipv6 address ipv6 address dhcp Use the ipv6 address dhcp command in Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode to enable the DHCPv6 client on an IPv6 interface.
PAGE 472
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 472 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Use the no ipv6 address dhcp command to release a leased address and to disable DHCPv6 on an interface. The command no ipv6 address does not disable the DHCPv6 client on the interface. This command will fail if DHCPv6 server has been configured on the interface. Examples In the following example, DHCPv6 is enabled on interface vlan2.
PAGE 473
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 473 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show arp switch Use the show arp switch command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the ARP cache entries learned on the management port. Syntax show arp switch Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines NOTE: This command only shows ARP entries used by the management interface. It is logically separate from the ARP table used by the routing interfaces.
PAGE 474
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 474 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • Host name. (Range: 1–255 characters). The command allows spaces in the host name when specified in double quotes. For example, console(config)#snmp-server host "host name" Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays information about IP hosts.
PAGE 475
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 475 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. The command provides the following information. Term Description Address Conflict Detection Status Whether the switch has detected an address conflict on any IP address.
PAGE 476
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 476 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Address Conflict Detection Status..No Conflict Detected show ip helper-address Use the show ip helper-address command in Privileged EXEC mode to display IP helper addresses configuration. Syntax show ip helper-address [intf-address] • intf-address — IP address of a routing interface. (Range: Any valid IP address) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 477
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 477 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IPv6 Access List Commands 21 Access to a switch or router can be made more secure through the use of Access Control Lists (ACLs) to control the type of traffic allowed into or out of specific ports. An ACL consists of a series of rules, each of which describes the type of traffic to be processed and the actions to take for packets that meet the classification criteria.
PAGE 478
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 478 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM { deny | permit} (IPv6 ACL) This command creates a new rule for the current IPv6 access list. Each rule is appended to the list of configured rules for the list. A rule may either deny or permit traffic according to the specified classification fields. At a minimum, either the every keyword or the protocol, source address, and destination address values must be specified.
PAGE 479
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 479 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description every Allows all protocols. icmpv6 | ipv6 | tcp Protocol to match, specified as keywords icmp, igmp, ipv6, tcp, | udp | udp or as a standard protocol number from 1–255. protocolnumber any | sourceipv6 prefix/ prefixlength any matches any source IP address. Or, you can specify a source IPv6 addressed expressed as a prefix/prefixlength.
PAGE 480
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 480 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode IPv6-Access-List Configuration mode User Guidelines Users are permitted to add rules, but if a packet does not match any userspecified rules, the packet is dropped by the implicit “deny all” rule. The 'no' form of this command is not supported, since the rules within an IPv6 ACL cannot be deleted individually.
PAGE 481
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 481 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ipv6 access-list name no ipv6 access-list name • name — Alphanumeric string of 1 to 31 characters uniquely identifying the IPv6 access list. Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command.
PAGE 482
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 482 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(Config)#ipv6 access-list rename DELL_IP6 DELL_IP6_NEW_NAME ipv6 traffic-filter The ipv6 traffic-filter command either attaches a specific IPv6 Access Control List (ACL) to an interface or associates it with a VLAN ID in a given direction.
PAGE 483
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 483 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • sequence seq-num — Order of access list relative to other access lists already assigned to this interface and direction. (Range: 1–4294967295) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 484
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 484 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Rule Status Status (Active/Inactive) of the IPv6 ACL rule. Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example The following example displays configuration information for the IPv6 ACLs.
PAGE 485
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 485 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Action......................................... permit Protocol....................................... 255(ipv6) Source IP Address.............................. 2001:DB8::/32 The command output provides the following information: Field Description Rule Number The ordered rule number identifier defined within the IPv6 ACL. Action Displays the action associated with each rule. The possible values are Permit or Deny.
PAGE 486
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 487
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 487 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 22 IPv6 MLD Snooping Commands In IPv6, Multicast Listener Discover (MLD) snooping performs functions similar to IGMP snooping in IPv4. With MLD snooping, IPv6 multicast data is selectively forwarded to a list of ports that want to receive the data, instead of being flooded to all ports in a VLAN. This list is constructed by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets.
PAGE 488
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 488 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave The ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave command enables or disables MLD Snooping snooping immediate-leave admin mode on a selected interface or VLAN. Enabling fast-leave allows the switch to immediately remove the layer 2 LAN interface from its forwarding table entry upon receiving an MLD done message for that multicast group without first sending out MAC-based general queries to the interface.
PAGE 489
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 489 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ipv6 mld snooping groupmembership-interval The ipv6 mld snooping groupmembership-interval command sets the MLD Group Membership Interval time on a VLAN or interface. The Group Membership Interval time is the amount of time in seconds that a switch waits for a report from a particular group on a particular interface before deleting the interface from the entry. This value must be greater than the MLDv2 Maximum Response time value.
PAGE 490
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 490 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group in that interface. This value must be less than the MLD Query Interval time value. The range is 1 to 3599 seconds. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping maxresponse [vlan-id] [seconds] no ipv6 mld snooping maxresponse [vlan-id] • vlan_id — Specifies a VLAN ID value in VLAN Database mode. • seconds — MLD maximum response time in seconds.
PAGE 491
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 491 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no ipv6 mld snooping mcrtexpiretime [vlan-id] • • vlan_id — Specifies a VLAN ID value in VLAN Database mode. seconds — multicast router present expiration time in seconds. (Range: 1–3600) Default Configuration The default multicast router present expiration time is 300 seconds. Command Mode Interface Configuration mode. VLAN Database mode.
PAGE 492
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 492 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping ipv6 mld snooping (Interface) The ipv6 mld snooping (Interface) command enables MLD Snooping on an interface. If an interface has MLD Snooping enabled and it becomes a member of a port-channel (LAG), MLD Snooping functionality is disabled on that interface.
PAGE 493
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 493 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ipv6 mld snooping no ipv6 mld snooping Default Configuration MLD Snooping is disabled. Command Mode Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet) mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 494
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 494 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config-vlan)#ipv6 mld snooping 1 show ipv6 mld snooping The show ipv6 mld snooping command displays MLD Snooping information. Configured information is displayed whether or not MLD Snooping is enabled.
PAGE 495
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 495 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • VLANs Enabled for MLD Snooping — VLANs on which MLD Snooping is enabled. When you specify an interface or VLAN, the following information displays: • MLD Snooping Admin Mode — Indicates whether MLD Snooping is active on the interface or VLAN. • Fast Leave Mode — Indicates whether MLD Snooping Fast-leave is active on the VLAN.
PAGE 496
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 496 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines To see the full Multicast address table (including static addresses) use the show bridge address-table command. Example console#show ipv6 mld snooping groups Vlan Ipv6 Address Type Ports ---- ----------------------- ------- --------------------------- 1 3333.0000.0003 Dynamic 1/0/1,1/0/3 2 3333.0000.0004 Dynamic 1/0/1,1/0/3 2 3333.0000.
PAGE 497
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 498
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 499
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 499 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IPv6 MLD Snooping Querier Commands 23 IGMP/MLD Snooping Querier is an extension of the IGMP/MLD Snooping feature. IGMP/MLD Snooping Querier allows the switch to simulate an IGMP/MLD router in a Layer 2-only network, thus removing the need to have an IGMP/MLD Router to collect the multicast group membership information. The querier function simulates a small subset of the IGMP/MLD router functionality.
PAGE 500
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 500 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ipv6 mld snooping querier Use the ipv6 mld snooping querier command to enable MLD Snooping Querier on the system. Use the "no" form of this command to disable MLD Snooping Querier. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping querier no ipv6 mld snooping querier Default Configuration MLD Snooping Querier is disabled by default. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 501
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 501 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode VLAN Database mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config-vlan)#ipv6 mld snooping querier 10 ipv6 mld snooping querier address Use the ipv6 mld snooping querier address command to set the global MLD Snooping Querier address. Use the "no" form of this command to reset the global MLD Snooping Querier address to the default.
PAGE 502
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 502 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ipv6 mld snooping querier election participate Use the ipv6 mld snooping querier election participate command to enable the Snooping Querier to participate in the Querier Election process when it discovers the presence of another Querier in the VLAN. When this mode is enabled, if the Snooping Querier finds that the other Querier's source address is higher than the Snooping Querier's address, it stops sending periodic queries.
PAGE 503
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 503 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ipv6 mld snooping querier query-interval interval ipv6 mld snooping querier query-interval • interval — Amount of time that the switch waits before sending another general query. (Range: 1–1800 seconds) Default Configuration The default query interval is 60 seconds.
PAGE 504
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 504 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The default timer expiration period is 60 seconds. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config)#ipv6 mld snooping querier timer expiry 222 show ipv6 mld snooping querier Use the show ipv6 mld snooping querier command to display MLD Snooping Querier information.
PAGE 505
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 505 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM MLD Snooping Querier Mode Indicates whether or not MLD Snooping Querier is active on the switch. Querier Address Shows the IP Address which will be used in the IPv6 header while sending out MLD queries. MLD Version Indicates the version of MLD that will be used while sending out the queries. This is defaulted to MLD v1 and it can not be changed.
PAGE 506
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 506 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Last Querier Address Indicates the IP address of the most recent Querier from which a Query was received. MLD Version Indicates the version of MLD.
PAGE 507
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 507 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IP Source Guard Commands 24 NOTE: IP Source Guard commands are supported by PCM8024. IP Source Guard (IPSG) is a security feature that filters IP packets based on source ID. The source ID may either be source IP address or a {source IP address, source MAC address} pair. The network administrator configures whether enforcement includes the source MAC address. The network administrator can configure static authorized source IDs.
PAGE 508
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 508 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ip verify source Default Configuration By default, IPSG is disabled on all interfaces. Command Mode Interface Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 509
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 509 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(config-if-1/0/1)#ip verify source portsecurity ip verify binding Use the ip verify binding command in Global Configuration mode to configure static bindings. Use the no form of the command to remove the IPSG entry. Syntax ip verify binding macaddr vlan ipaddr interface Default Configuration By default, there will not be any static bindings configured.
PAGE 510
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 510 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console#show ip verify interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 show ip verify source interface Use the show ip verify source interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the bindings configured on a particular interface.
PAGE 511
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 511 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show ip source binding Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 512
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 513
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 513 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 25 iSCSI Optimization Commands NOTE: The iSCSI commands are only supported on the PCM6348, PCM8024, and PCM8024-k switches. The commands will have different capabilties depending on the switch. CLI commands and Dell OpenManage Switch Administrator pages are not available for other switch models.
PAGE 514
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 514 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM QoS treatment is accomplished by monitoring traffic to detect packets used by iSCSI stations to establish iSCSI sessions and connections. Data from these exchanges is used to create classification rules that assign the traffic between the stations to a configured traffic class. Packets in the flow are queued and scheduled for egress on the destination port based on these rules.
PAGE 515
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 515 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines Changing the aging time has the following behavior: • When aging time is increased, current sessions will be timed out according to the new value. • When aging time is decreased, any sessions that have been dormant for a time exceeding the new setting will be immediately deleted from the table. All other sessions will continue to be monitored against the new time out value.
PAGE 516
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 516 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description remark Mark the iSCSI frames with the configured DSCP when egressing the switch. Default Configuration By default, frames are not remarked. The default vpt setting for iSCSI is 5, which the default classofservice dot1p mapping assigns to queue 2. Command Mode Global Configuration mode. User Guidelines The remark option only applies to DSCP values. Remarking is not available for vpt values.
PAGE 517
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 517 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example configures iSCSI packets to receive CoS treatment using DiffServ Code Point AF 41 and configures remarking of transmitted iSCSI packets. console(config)#iscsi cos dscp 10 remark iscsi enable The iscsi enable command globally enables iSCSI globally. To disable iSCSI awareness use the no form of this command. Syntax iscsi enable no iscsi enable Default Configuration iSCSI is disabled by default.
PAGE 518
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 518 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example iSCSI is globally enabled. console(config)#iscsi enable iscsi target port Use the iscsi target port command in Global Configuration mode to configure iSCSI port(s), target addresses and names. To delete iSCSI port(s) or target ports, use the no form of this command. Syntax iscsi target port tcp-port-1 [tcp-port-2.
PAGE 519
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 519 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration iSCSI well-known ports 3260 and 860 are configured by default but can be removed as any other configured target. Command Mode Global Configuration mode.
PAGE 520
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 520 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show iscsi Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example The following example displays the iSCSI configuration.
PAGE 521
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 521 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Index TCP Port IP Address IP Address Mask TCP Port Target IP Address Name show iscsi sessions Use the show iscsi sessions command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the iSCSI status. Syntax show iscsi sessions [detailed] • detailed — Displayed list has additional data when this option is used. Default Configuration If not specified, sessions are displayed in short mode (not detailed). Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode.
PAGE 522
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 522 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ----------------------------------------------------Target: iqn.103-1.com.storage-vendor:sn.43338. storage.tape:sys1.xyz Session 3: Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.12 Session 4: Initiator: iqn.1995-05.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.10 Console# show iscsi sessions detailed Target: iqn.1993-11.com.diskvendor:diskarrays.sn.45678 ----------------------------------------------------Session 1: Initiator: iqn.1992-04.com.
PAGE 523
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 523 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ----------------------------------------------------Initiator: iqn.1995-05.com.os-vendor.plan9:cdrom.10 Time started: 17-Aug-2008 21:04:50 Time for aging out: 2 min ISID: 22 Initiator Initiator Target Target IP address TCP port IP address IP port 172.16.1.30 49200 172.16.1.20 30001 172.16.1.30 49201 172.16.1.
PAGE 524
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 525
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 525 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Link Dependency Commands 26 Link dependency allows the link status of a group of interfaces to be made dependent on the link status of other interfaces. The effect is that the link status of a group that depends on another interface either mirrors or inverts the link status of the depended-on interface.
PAGE 526
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 526 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The default configuration for a group is down, i.e. the group members will mirror the depended-on link status by going down when all depended-on interfaces are down. Command Mode Link Dependency mode User Guidelines The action up command will cause the group members to be up when no depended-on interfaces are up.
PAGE 527
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 527 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(config)#link-dependency group 1 console(config-linkDep-group-1)# add gigabitethernet Use this command to add member gigabit Ethernet port(s) to the dependency list. Syntax add gigabitethernet intf-list • intf-list — List of Ethernet interfaces in unit/slot/port format. Separate nonconsecutive ports with a comma and no spaces. Use a hyphen to designate the range of ports.
PAGE 528
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 528 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • intf-list — List of Ethernet interfaces in unit/slot/port format. Separate nonconsecutive ports with a comma and no spaces. Use a hyphen to designate the range of ports. (Range: Valid Ethernet interface list or range) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 529
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 529 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Link Dependency mode User Guidelines No specific guidelines Example console(config-depend-1)#add port-channel 10-12 depends-on Use this command command to add the dependent Ethernet ports or port channels list. Use the no depends-on command to remove the dependent Ethernet ports or port-channels list.
PAGE 530
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 530 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Examples console(config-linkDep-group-1)#depends-on gigabitethernet 1/0/10 console(config-linkDep-group-1)#depends-on portchannel 6 show link-dependency Use the show link-dependency command to show the link dependencies configured for a particular group. If no group is specified, then all the configured link-dependency groups are displayed. Syntax show link-dependency [group GroupId] • GroupId — Link dependency group identifier.
PAGE 531
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 531 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM The following command shows link dependencies for group 2 only.
PAGE 532
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 533
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 533 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM LLDP Commands 27 The IEEE 802.1AB standard defines the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP). This protocol allows stations residing on an 802 LAN to advertise major capabilities, physical descriptions, and management information to physically adjacent devices, allowing a network management system (NMS) to access and display this information.
PAGE 534
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 534 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM The receive function accepts incoming LLDPDU frames and stores information about the remote stations. Both local and remote data may be displayed by the user interface and retrieved using SNMP as defined in the LLDP MIB definitions. The component maintains one remote entry per physical network connection.
PAGE 535
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 535 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays how to clear the LLDP remote data. console#clear lldp remote-data clear lldp statistics Use the clear lldp statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode to reset all LLDP statistics. Syntax clear lldp statistics Default Configuration By default, the statistics are only cleared on a system reset.
PAGE 536
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 536 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM lldp notification Use the lldp notification command in Interface Configuration mode to enable remote data change notifications. To disable notifications, use the no form of this command. Syntax lldp notification no lldp notification Default Configuration By default, notifications are disabled on all supported interfaces. Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 537
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 537 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • interval — The smallest interval in seconds at which to send remote data change notifications. (Range: 5–3600 seconds) Default Configuration The default value is 5 seconds. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays how to set the interval value to 10 seconds.
PAGE 538
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 538 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays how to enable the LLDP receive capability. console(config-if-1/0/3)#lldp receive lldp timers Use the lldp timers command in Global Configuration mode to set the timing parameters for local data transmission on ports enabled for LLDP. To return any or all parameters to factory default, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 539
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 539 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Examples The following example displays how to configure LLDP to transmit local information every 1000 seconds. console(config)#lldp timers interval 1000 The following example displays how to set the timing parameter at 1000 seconds with a hold multiplier of 8 and a 5 second delay before reinitialization.
PAGE 540
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 540 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM lldp transmit-mgmt Use the lldp transmit-mgmt command in Interface Configuration mode to include transmission of the local system management address information in the LLDPDUs. To cancel inclusion of the management information, use the no form of this command. Syntax lldp transmit-mgmt no lldp transmit-mgmt Default Configuration By default, management address information is not included.
PAGE 541
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 541 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • sys-name — Transmits the system name TLV • sys-desc — Transmits the system description TLV • sys-cap — Transmits the system capabilities TLV • port desc — Transmits the port description TLV Default Configuration By default, no optional TLVs are included. Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 542
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 542 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the current LLDP configuration summary.
PAGE 543
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 543 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Examples This example show how the information is displayed when you use the command with the all parameter.
PAGE 544
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 544 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Examples These examples show advertised LLDP local data in two levels of detail.
PAGE 545
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 545 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM System Capabilities Enabled: bridge Management Address: Type: IPv4 Address: 192.168.17.25 — — — show lldp remote-device Use the lldp remote-device command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the current LLDP remote data. This command can display summary information or detail for each interface. Syntax show lldp remote-device {detail interface | interface | all} • detail — Includes detailed version of remote data.
PAGE 546
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 547
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 547 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Examples The following examples shows an example of the display of current LLDP traffic statistics. console#show lldp statistics all LLDP Device Statistics Last Update.................................. 0 days 22:58:29 Total Inserts................................ 1 Total Deletes................................ 0 Total Drops.................................. 0 Total Ageouts..........
PAGE 548
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 548 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Fields Description Total Drops Number of times a complete set of information advertised by a remote device could not be inserted due to insufficient resources. Total Ageouts Number of times any remote data entry has been deleted due to time-to-live (TTL) expiration. Transmit Total Total number of LLDP frames transmitted on the indicated port. Receive Total Total number of valid LLDP frames received on the indicated port.
PAGE 549
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 549 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Multicast VLAN Registration Commands 28 Multicast VLAN registration (MVR) is a method for consolidating multicast traffic from multiple VLANs onto a single VLAN. A typical usage scenario would be the distribution of a multicast group to a switch using a single VLAN where the switch has users in different VLANs subscribing to the multicast group.
PAGE 550
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 550 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Commands in this Chapter This chapter explains the following commands: mvr mvr type mvr group mvr vlan group mvr mode show mvr mvr querytime show mvr members mvr vlan show mvr interface mvr immediate show mvr traffic mvr Use the mvr command in Global Config and Interface Config modes to enable MVR. Use the no form of this command to disable MVR.
PAGE 551
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 551 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM mvr group Use the mvr group command in Global Config mode to add an MVR membership group. Use the no form of the command to remove an MVR membership group. Syntax mvr group A.B.C.D [count] no mvr group A.B.C.D [count] Parameter Description Parameter Description A.B.C.D Specify a multicast group. count Specifies the number of multicast groups to configure.
PAGE 552
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 552 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config)#mvr group 239.0.1.0 100 console(config)#mvr vlan 10 mvr mode Use the mvr mode command in Global Config mode to change the MVR mode type. Use the no form of the command to set the mode type to the default value. Syntax mvr mode {compatible | dynamic} no mvr mode Parameter Description Parameter Description compatible Do not allow membership joins on source ports.
PAGE 553
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 553 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax mvr querytime 1–100 no mvr querytime Parameter Description Parameter Description querytime The query time is a maximum time to wait for an IGMP membership report on a receiver port before removing the port from the multicast group. The query time only applies to receiver ports. The query time is specified in tenths of a second. Default Configuration The default value is 5 tenths of a second.
PAGE 554
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 554 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM mvr vlan Use the mvr vlan command in Global Config mode to set the MVR multicast VLAN. Use the no form of the command to set the MVR multicast VLAN to the default value. Syntax mvr vlan 1–4094 no mvr vlan Parameter Description Parameter Description vlan The VLAN specifies the port on which multicast data is expected to be received. Source ports should belong to this VLAN. Default Configuration The default value is 1.
PAGE 555
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 555 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax mvr immediate no mvr immediate Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description. Default Configuration The default value is Disabled. Command Mode Interface Config User Guidelines Immediate leave should only be configured on ports with a single receiver. When immediate leave is enabled, a receiver port will leave a group on receipt of a leave message.
PAGE 556
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 556 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax mvr type { receiver | source } no mvr type Parameter Description Parameter Description receiver Configure the port as a receiver port. Receiver ports are ports over which multicast data will be sent but not received. source Configure the port as a source port. Source ports are ports over which multicast data is received or sent. Default Configuration The default value is None.
PAGE 557
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 558
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 558 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command statically configures a port to receive the specified multicast group on the specified VLAN. This command only applies to receiver ports in compatible mode. It also applies to source ports in dynamic mode. In dynamic mode, receiver ports can also join multicast groups using IGMP messages.
PAGE 559
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 559 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description MVR Max Multicast Groups The maximum number of multicast groups that is supported by MVR. MVR Current Multicast groups The current number of MVR groups allocated. MVR Query Response Time The current MVR query response time. MVR Mode The current MVR mode. It can be compatible or dynamic. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 560
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 560 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show mvr members Use the show mvr members command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the MVR membership groups allocated. Syntax show mvr members [A.B.C.D] Parameter Description The parameter is a valid multicast address in IPv4 dotted notation. The following table explains the output parameters. Parameter Description MVR Group IP MVR group multicast IP address. Status The status of the specific MVR group.
PAGE 561
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 561 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM MVR Group IP Status Members ------------------ --------------- --------------------- 224.1.1.1 INACTIVE 1/0/1, 1/0/2, 1/0/3 console#show mvr members 224.1.1.1 MVR Group IP Status Members ------------------ --------------- --------------------- 224.1.1.1 INACTIVE 1/0/1, 1/0/2, 1/0/3 show mvr interface Use the show mvr interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the MVR enabled interfaces configuration.
PAGE 562
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 562 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Immediate Leave The state of immediate mode. It can be enabled or disabled. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC User Guidelines The following table lists the completion messages.
PAGE 563
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 563 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show mvr traffic Use the show mvr traffic command in Privileged EXEC mode to display global MVR statistics. Syntax show mvr traffic Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC User Guidelines The following table lists the completion messages.
PAGE 564
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 564 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description IGMP Report V1 Transmitted Number of transmitted IGMP Reports V1. IGMP Report V2 Transmitted Number of transmitted IGMP Reports V2. IGMP Leave Transmitted Number of transmitted IGMP Leaves. IGMP Packet Receive Failures Number of failures on receiving the IGMP packets. IGMP Packet Transmit Failures Number of failures on transmitting the IGMP packets. console#show mvr traffic IGMP Query Received........
PAGE 565
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 565 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Port Aggregator Commands 29 This chapter explains the following commands: add ethernet negotiation duplex port-aggregator group minimum active uplinks show bridge address-table mtu disable speed add ethernet Use the add ethernet command to add member Ethernet ports to the Aggregator Group. To remove member Ethernet ports from the Aggregator Group/Zone, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 566
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 566 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(config)#port-aggregator group 1 console(config-aggregator-1)#add ethernet 1/g1 console(config-aggregator-1)# duplex Use the duplex command in port aggregator configuration mode to configure the full/half duplex operation of all member ports in the aggregator group/zone. To restore the default, use the no form of this command. Syntax duplex [half | full] no duplex • half — Force half-duplex operation.
PAGE 567
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 567 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM minimum active uplinks Use the minimum active uplinks command to set the minimum number of uplinks to be active for the Group. For example, if the number of uplink ports in the group is 2 and the number of internal ports is 4. If the user sets the minimum active uplink ports to be 2, then both the uplink ports should be active; otherwise, all the internal ports in the Group will be brought down.
PAGE 568
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 568 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax mtu disable no mtu disable Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Port Aggregator mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 569
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 569 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console(config)#port-aggregator group 1 console(config-aggregator-1)#negotiation console(config-aggregator-1)# port-aggregator group Use the port-aggregator group command to enter the Port Aggregator mode to configure aggregator group attributes. To remove all the attributes on the specified group, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 570
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 570 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show bridge address-table Use the show bridge address-table command to show the MAC address table for a particular aggregator group. [port-aggregator group is an optional parameter in the command, and if not specified, it shows all the MAC entries in all the Groups. Syntax show bridge address-table [port-aggregator group < GroupId >] • GroupId — Port Aggregator group identifier.
PAGE 571
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 571 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM speed Use the speed command in port aggregator configuration mode to configure the speed of all member ports in the aggregator group/zone. To restore the default, use the no form of this command. Syntax speed [10 | 100 ] no speed • 10 — Configures the port to 10 Mbps operation. • 100 — Configures the port to 100 Mbps operation. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 572
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 573
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 573 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Port Channel Commands 30 Care must be taken while enabling this type of configuration. If the Partner System is not 802.3AD compliant or the Link Aggregation Control protocol is not enabled, there may be network instability.
PAGE 574
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 574 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM A LAG can be either static or dynamic not both. It cannot have some members participate in the protocol while other members not participate. Additionally, it is not possible to change a LAG from static to dynamic via the CLI. You must remove the member ports from the static LAG and then add them to the dynamic LAG. VLANs and LAGs When members are added to a LAG, they are removed from all existing VLAN membership.
PAGE 575
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 575 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM A LAG failure of one or more of the links does not stop traffic in any manner. Upon failure, the flows mapped to a link are dynamically reassigned to the remaining links of the LAG. Similarly when links are added to a LAG, the conversations may need to be shifted to a new link. The purpose of link aggregation is to increase bandwidth between two switches. It is achieved by aggregating multiple ports in one logical group.
PAGE 576
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 576 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM The hashing algorithm is configurable for each LAG. Typically, an administrator is able to choose from hash algorithms utilizing the following attributes of a packet to determine the outgoing port: • Source MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet. • Source IP and Source TCP/UDP fields of the packet. • Destination MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet.
PAGE 577
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 577 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Manual Aggregation of LAGs PowerConnect switching supports the manual addition and deletion of links to aggregates. In the manual configuration of aggregates, the ports send their Actor Information (LACPDUs) to the partner system in order to find a suitable Partner to form an aggregation. When the Partner System neglects to respond using LACPDUs, the PowerConnect switching aggregates manually.
PAGE 578
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 578 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • on — Forces the port to join a channel without LACP. • auto — Forces the port to join a channel with LACP. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example shows how port 1/0/5 is configured to port-channel 1 without LACP.
PAGE 579
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 579 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example enters the context of port-channel 1. console(config)# interface port-channel 1 console(config-if-po1)# interface range port-channel Use the interface range port-channel command in Global Configuration mode to execute a command on multiple port channels at the same time. Syntax interface range port-channel {port-channel-range | all} • port-channel-range — List of port-channels to configure.
PAGE 580
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 580 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM hashing-mode Use the hashing-mode command to set the hashing algorithm on trunk ports. Use the no hashing-mode command to set the hashing algorithm on Trunk ports to the default (3). Syntax hashing-mode mode • mode — Mode value in the range of 1 to 7.
PAGE 581
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 581 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM lacp auto Use the lacp auto command to set the LACP (Link Aggregation) mode to dynamic for that Aggregator Group. This means that when more than one uplink port is in the Group, those uplink ports will be enabled automatically with dynamic LACP. Syntax lacp auto Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Port Aggregator mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 582
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 582 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Port Aggregator mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console(config)#port-aggregator group 2 console(config-aggregator-2)#lacp off console(config-aggregator-2)# lacp port-priority Use the lacp port-priority command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the priority value for physical ports.
PAGE 583
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 583 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example configures the priority value for port 1/0/8 to 247. console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/8 console(config-if-1/0/8)#lacp port-priority 247 lacp static Use the lacp static command to set the LACP (Link Aggregation) mode to static for that Aggregator Group. This means that when more than one uplink port is in the Group, those uplink ports will be enabled automatically with static LACP.
PAGE 584
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 584 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax lacp system-priority value no lacp system-priority • value — Port priority value. (Range: 1–65535) Default Configuration The default system priority value is 1. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures the system priority to 120.
PAGE 585
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 585 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example assigns an administrative LACP timeout for port 1/0/8 to a long timeout value. console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/8 console(config-if-1/0/8)#lacp timeout long no lacp Use the no lacp command to set the LACP (Link Aggregation) mode to default for that Aggregator Group.
PAGE 586
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 586 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM port-channel min-links Use the port-channel min-links command in Interface Configuration (portchannel) mode to set the minimum number of links that must be up in order for the port channel interface to be declared up. Use the no form of the command to return the configuration to the default value (1).
PAGE 587
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 587 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC User Guidelines No specific guidelines.
PAGE 588
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 588 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show lacp {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel port-channelnumber | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port [{parameters | statistics}] Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example shows how to display LACP Ethernet interface information.
PAGE 589
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 590
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 590 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example shows statistics about port-channel 1. console#show statistics port-channel 1 Total Packets Received (Octets)................ 0 Packets Received > 1522 Octets................. 0 Packets RX and TX 64 Octets....................
PAGE 591
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 591 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Total Packets Received with MAC Errors......... 0 Jabbers Received............................... 0 Fragments/Undersize Received................... 0 Alignment Errors............................... 0 --More-- or (q)uit FCS Errors..................................... 0 Overruns....................................... 0 Total Received Packets Not Forwarded........... 0 Local Traffic Frames........................... 0 802.
PAGE 592
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 592 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Tx Oversized................................... 0 Underrun Errors................................ 0 Total Transmit Packets Discarded............... 0 Single Collision Frames........................ 0 Multiple Collision Frames...................... 0 Excessive Collision Frames..................... 0 Port Membership Discards....................... 0 802.3x Pause Frames Transmitted................ 0 GVRP PDUs received.....................
PAGE 593
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 593 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Port Monitor Commands 31 PowerConnect switches allow the user to monitor traffic with an external network analyzer. The external network analyzer can use any of the Ethernet ports as a probe port. The probe port transmits a mirror copy of the traffic being probed. Network traffic transmission is always disrupted whenever a configuration change is made for port monitoring.
PAGE 594
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 594 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM monitor session show monitor session monitor session Use the monitor session command in Global Configuration mode to configure a probe port and a monitored port for monitor session (port monitoring). Use the src-interface parameter to specify the interface to monitor. Use rx to monitor only ingress packets, or use tx to monitor only egress packets.
PAGE 595
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 595 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines The source of a monitoring session must be configured before the destination can be configured. Example The following examples show a simple port level configuration that mirrors both transmitted and received packet from one port to another.
PAGE 596
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 597
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 597 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM QoS Commands 32 Quality of Service (QoS) technologies are intended to provide guaranteed timely delivery of specific application data to a particular destination. In contrast, standard IP-based networks are designed to provide best effort data delivery service. Best effort service implies that the network delivers the data in a timely fashion, although there is no guarantee.
PAGE 598
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 598 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM A user configures an ACL permit rule to force its matching traffic stream to a specific egress interface, bypassing any forwarding decision normally performed by the device. The interface can be a physical port or a LAG. The redirect interface rule action is independent of, but compatible with, the assign queue rule action. ACLs can be configured to apply to a VLAN instead of an interface.
PAGE 599
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 599 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM – • Untrusted Port Default Priority Queue Configuration This enables PowerConnect switches to support a wide variety of delay sensitive video and audio multicast applications. CoS mapping tables, port default priority, and hardware queue parameters may be configured on LAG interfaces as well as physical port interfaces.
PAGE 600
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 600 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM process is also used for cases where a trusted port mapping is unable to be honored, such as when a nonIP packet arrives at a port configured to trust the IP precedence or IP DSCP value. PCM6220 Limitations The PCM6220 switch does not support out-bound service policies or ACLs.
PAGE 601
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 602
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 602 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays how to change the queue ID to 4 for the associated traffic stream. console(config-policy-classmap)#assign-queue 4 class Use the class command in Policy-Map Class Configuration mode to create an instance of a class definition within the specified policy for the purpose of defining treatment of the traffic class through subsequent policy attribute statements.
PAGE 603
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 603 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM class-map Use the class-map command in Global Configuration mode to define a new DiffServ class of type match-all. To delete the existing class, use the no form of this command. Syntax class-map match-all class-map-name [{ipv4 | ipv6}] no class-map match-all class-map-name • class-map-name — a case-sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters uniquely identifying an existing DiffServ class.
PAGE 604
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 604 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • classname — The name of an existing DiffServ class. (Range: 1–31 characters) • newclassname — A case-sensitive alphanumeric string. (Range: 1–31 characters) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays how to change the name of a DiffServ class from "DELL" to "DELL1.
PAGE 605
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 605 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration or Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port-channel) mode User Guidelines None Example The following example configures mapping for user priority 1 and traffic class 2.
PAGE 606
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 606 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays mapping for IP DSCP 1 and traffic class 2. console(config)#classofservice ip-dscp-mapping 1 2 classofservice trust Use the classofservice trust command in either Global Configuration mode or Interface Configuration mode to set the class of service trust mode of an interface.
PAGE 607
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 607 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Examples The following example displays how you set the class of service trust mode of an interface to trust dot1p (802.1p) packet markings when in Global Configuration mode.
PAGE 608
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 608 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM cos-queue min-bandwidth Use the cos-queue min-bandwidth command in either Global Configuration mode or Interface Configuration mode to specify the minimum transmission bandwidth for each interface queue. To restore the default for each queue’s minimum bandwidth value, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 609
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 609 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax cos-queue {random-detect queue-id1 [queue-id2..queue-idn]} no cos-queue {random-detect queue-id1 [queue-id2..queue-idn]} Parameter Description Parameter Description queue-id An integer indicating the queue-id which is to be enabled for WRED. Range 0-6. Up to 7 queues may be simultaneously specified. Default Configuration WRED queue management policy is disabled by default.
PAGE 610
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 610 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM cos-queue strict Use the cos-queue strict command in either Global Configuration mode or Interface Configuration mode to activate the strict priority scheduler mode for each specified queue. To restore the default weighted scheduler mode for each specified queue, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 611
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 611 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM diffserv Use the diffserv command in Global Configuration mode to set the DiffServ operational mode to active. While disabled, the DiffServ configuration is retained and can be changed, but it is not activated. When enabled, DiffServ services are activated. To set the DiffServ operational mode to inactive, use the no form of this command. Syntax diffserv no diffserv Default Configuration This command default is enabled.
PAGE 612
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 612 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays how to specify that matching packets are to be dropped at ingress.
PAGE 613
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 613 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays how to mark all packets with a CoS value. console(config-policy-classmap)#mark cos 7 mark ip-dscp Use the mark ip-dscp command in Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode to mark all packets for the associated traffic stream with the specified IP DSCP value.
PAGE 614
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 614 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM mark ip-precedence Use the mark ip-precedence command in Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode to mark all packets for the associated traffic stream with the specified IP precedence value. Syntax mark ip-precedence prec-value • prec-value — Specifies the IP precedence value as an integer. (Range: 0–7) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode User Guidelines.
PAGE 615
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 615 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax match class-map refclassname no match class-map refclassname • refclassname — The name of an existing DiffServ class whose match conditions are being referenced by the specified class definition. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Class-Map Configuration mode User Guidelines • The parameters refclassname and class-map-name can not be the same.
PAGE 616
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 616 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-classmap)#no match class-map Dell match cos Use the match cos command in Class-Map Configuration mode to add to the specified class definition a match condition for the class of service value (the only tag in a single-tagged packet or the first or outer 802.1Q tag of a doubleVLAN tagged packet).
PAGE 617
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 617 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • macaddr — Specifies any valid layer 2 MAC address formatted as six twodigit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons. • macmask — Specifies a valid layer 2 MAC address bit mask formatted as six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons. This address bit mask does not need to be contiguous. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 618
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 618 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Class-Map Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays adding a match condition using the specified IP address and bit mask. console(config-classmap)#match dstip 10.240.1.1 10.240.0.
PAGE 619
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 619 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(config-classmap)#match dstip6 2001:DB8::/32 match dstl4port Use the match dstl4port command in Class-Map Configuration mode to add to the specified class definition a match condition based on the destination layer 4 port of a packet using a single keyword or a numeric notation. Syntax match dstl4port {portkey | port-number} • portkey — Specifies one of the supported port name keywords.
PAGE 620
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 620 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM match ethertype Use the match ethertype command in Class-Map Configuration mode to add to the specified class definition a match condition based on the value of the ethertype. Syntax match ethertype {keyword | 0x0600-0xffff } • keyword — Specifies either a valid keyword or a valid hexadecimal number. The supported keywords are appletalk, arp, ibmsna, ipv4, ipv6, ipx, mplsmcast, mplsucast, netbios, novell, pppoe, rarp.
PAGE 621
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 621 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • label - The value to match in the Flow Label field of the IPv6 header (Range 0-1048575). Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Ipv6-Class-Map Configuration mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example The following example adds a rule to match packets whose IPv6 Flow Label equals 32312.
PAGE 622
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 622 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Class-Map Configuration mode User Guidelines The ip dscp, ip precedence, and ip tos match conditions are alternative ways to specify a match criterion for the same Service Type field in the IP header but with a slightly different user notation. To specify a match on all DSCP values, use the match ip tos tosbits tosmask command with tosbits set to "0" (zero) and tosmask set to hex "03.
PAGE 623
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 623 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines The ip dscp, ip precedence, and ip tos match conditions are alternative ways to specify a match criterion for the same Service Type field in the IP header but with a slightly different user notation. To specify a match on all precedence values, use the match ip tos tosbits tosmask command with tosbits set to "0" (zero) and tosmask set to hex "1F.
PAGE 624
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 624 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines The ip dscp, ip precedence, and ip tos match conditions are alternative ways to specify a match criterion for the same Service Type field in the IP header but with a slightly different user notation. This specification is the free form version of the IP DSCP/Precedence/TOS match specification in that you have complete control of specifying which bits of the IP Service Type field are checked.
PAGE 625
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 625 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays adding a match condition based on the "ip" protocol name keyword. console(config-classmap)#match protocol ip match source-address mac Use the match source-address mac command in Class-Map Configuration mode to add to the specified class definition a match condition based on the source MAC address of the packet.
PAGE 626
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 626 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM match srcip Use the match srcip command in Class-Map Configuration mode to add to the specified class definition a match condition based on the source IP address of a packet. Syntax match srcip ipaddr ipmask • ipaddr — Specifies a valid IP address. • ipmask — Specifies a valid IP address bit mask. Note that although this IP address bit mask is similar to a subnet mask, it does not need to be contiguous.
PAGE 627
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 627 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • source-ipv6-prefix —IPv6 prefix in IPv6 global address format. • prefix-length —IPv6 prefix length value. Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Ipv6-Class-Map Configuration mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 628
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 628 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays how to add a match condition using the "snmp" port name keyword. console(config-classmap)#match srcl4port snmp match vlan Use the match vlan command in Class-Map Configuration mode to add to the specified class definition a match condition based on the value of the layer 2 VLAN Identifier field.
PAGE 629
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 629 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM mirror Use the mirror command in Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode to mirror all the data that matches the class defined to the destination port specified. Syntax mirror interface • interface — Specifies the Ethernet port to which data needs to be copied. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 630
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 630 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • datarate — Data rate in kilobits per second (kbps). (Range: 1–4294967295) • burstsize — Burst size in Kbps (Range: 1–128) • conform action — Indicates what happens when the packet is conforming to the policing rule: it could be dropped, it could have its COS modified, it could have its IP precedence modified, or it could have its DSCP modified. The same actions are available for packets that do not conform to the policing rule.
PAGE 631
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 631 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax policy-map policyname [in|out] no policy-map policyname Parameter Description Parameter Description policyname Specifies the DiffServ policy name as a unique case-sensitive alphanumeric string of characters. (Range: 1–31 alphanumeric characters.) in The policy is applied on ingress. Must be specified to create new DiffServ policies. An existing policy can be selected without specifying "in" or "out".
PAGE 632
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 632 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM redirect Use the redirect command in Policy-Class-Map Configuration mode to specify that all incoming packets for the associated traffic stream are redirected to a specific egress interface (physical port or port-channel). Syntax redirect interface • interface — Specifies any valid interface.
PAGE 633
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 633 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description policymapname Specifies the DiffServ policy name as a unique case-sensitive alphanumeric string. (Range: 1–31 alphanumeric characters.) in Apply the policy on ingress. out Apply the policy on egress. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 634
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 634 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show class-map Use the show class-map command in Privileged EXEC mode to display all configuration information for the specified class. Syntax show class-map [classname] • classname — Specifies the valid name of an existing DiffServ class. (Range: 1–31 characters) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 635
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 635 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Class Name..................................... ipv4 Class Type..................................... All Class Layer3 Protocol.......................... ipv4 Match Criteria Values ---------------------------- ------------------------------------Source IP Address 2.2.2.2 (255.255.255.0) console#show class-map stop_http_class Class Name..................................... stop_http_class Class Type.................................
PAGE 636
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 636 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines If the interface is specified, the 802.1p mapping table of the interface is displayed. If omitted, the most recent global configuration settings are displayed. Example The following example displays the dot1p traffic class mapping and user priorities.
PAGE 637
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 637 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show classofservice ip-dscp-mapping Use the show classofservice ip-dscp-mapping command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the current IP DSCP mapping to internal traffic classes for a specific interface. Syntax show classofservice ip-dscp-mapping • Command is supported only globally. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 638
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 639
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 640
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 640 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 58 3 59 3 60 3 61 3 62 3 63 3 console# show classofservice trust Use the show classofservice trust command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the current trust mode setting for a specific interface. Syntax show classofservice trust [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}] Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 641
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 641 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show diffserv Use the show diffserv command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the DiffServ general information, which includes the current administrative mode setting as well as the current and maximum number of DiffServ components. Syntax show diffserv Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 642
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 642 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show diffserv service interface Use this command in Privileged EXEC mode to display policy service information for the specified interface. Syntax show diffserv service interface {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port} {in|out} Parameter Description Parameter Description in Show ingress policies. out Show engress policies. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 643
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 643 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM No policy is attached to this interface in this direction. show diffserv service interface port-channel Syntax Description show diffserv service interface port-channel channel-group {in|out} Parameter Description Parameter Description channel-group A valid port-channel in the system. (Range: 1–18) in Show ingress policies. out Show engress policies. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 644
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 644 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show diffserv service brief Use the show diffserv service brief command in Privileged EXEC mode to display all interfaces in the system to which a DiffServ policy has been attached. Syntax show diffserv service brief Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 645
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 645 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines If the interface is specified, the class-of-service queue configuration of the interface is displayed. If omitted, the most recent global configuration settings are displayed. Examples The following example displays the COS configuration with no unit/slot/port or port-channel parameter.
PAGE 646
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 646 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console#show interfaces cos-queue gigabitethernet 1/0/1 Interface...................................... 1/0/1 Interface Shaping Rate......................... 0 Queue Id Min.
PAGE 647
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 647 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Minimum Bandwidth The minimum transmission bandwidth guarantee for the queue, expressed as a percentage. A value of 0 means bandwidth is not guaranteed and the queue operates using best-effort. This value is a configured value. Scheduler Type Indicates whether this queue is scheduled for transmission using a strict priority or a weighted scheme. This value is a configured value.
PAGE 648
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 648 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show policy-map Use the show policy-map command in Privileged EXEC mode to display all configuration information for the specified policy. Syntax show policy-map [policyname] • policyname — Specifies the name of a valid existing DiffServ policy. (Range: 1-31) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 649
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 649 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show policy-map interface {gigabithethernet | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port} {in|out} Parameter Description Parameter Description in Show inbound service policies. out Show outbound service policies. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 650
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 650 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM In Discarded Packets......................... 0 Class Name................................... DELL In Discarded Packets......................... 0 show service-policy Use the show service-policy command in Privileged EXEC mode to display a summary of policy-oriented statistics information for all interfaces. Syntax show service-policy Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 651
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 651 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 1/0/5 Down DELL 1/0/6 Down DELL 1/0/7 Down DELL 1/0/8 Down DELL 1/0/9 Down DELL 1/0/10 Down DELL traffic-shape Use the traffic-shape command in Global Configuration mode and Interface Configuration mode to specify the maximum transmission bandwidth limit for the interface as a whole.
PAGE 652
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 652 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays the setting of traffic-shape to a maximum bandwidth of 1024 Kbps.
PAGE 653
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 653 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 33 RADIUS Commands Managing and determining the validity of users in a large network can be significantly simplified by making use of a single database of accessible information supplied by an Authentication Server. These servers commonly use the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) protocol as defined by RFC 2865.
PAGE 654
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 654 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM auth-port radius-server deadtime show aaa servers deadtime radius-server host show radius statistics key radius-server key source-ip msgauth radius-server retransmit timeout name (RADIUS server) radius-server source-ip usage aaa accounting network default start-stop group radius Use the aaa accounting network default start-stop group radius command to enable RADIUS accounting on the switch.
PAGE 655
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 655 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM acct-port Use the acct-port command to set the port that connects to the RADIUS accounting server. Use the "no" form of this command to reset the port to the default. Syntax acct-port port no acct-port • port — The layer 4 port number of the accounting server (Range: 1 65535). Default Configuration The default value of the port number is 1813.
PAGE 656
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 656 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • auth-port-number — Port number for authentication requests. (Range: 1 65535) Default Configuration The default value of the port number is 1812. Command Mode Radius mode User Guidelines The host is not used for authentication if set to 0. User must enter the mode corresponding to a specific Radius server before executing this command. Example The following example sets the port number 2412 for authentication requests.
PAGE 657
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 657 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The default deadtime interval is 0 minutes. Command Mode Radius mode User Guidelines If only one RADIUS server is configured, it is recommended to use a deadtime interval of 0. Example The following example specifies a deadtime interval of 60 minutes. console(config)#radius-server host 192.143.120.
PAGE 658
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 658 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example specifies an authentication and encryption key of “lion-king”. console(config)#radius-server host acct 3.2.3.2 console(Config-acct-radius)#key keyacct msgauth Use the msgauth command to enable the message authenticator attribute to be used for the RADIUS Authenticating server being configured. Use the “no” form of this command to disable the message authenticator attribute.
PAGE 659
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 659 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no name Parameter Description Parameter Description servername The name for the RADIUS server (Range: 1 - 32 characters). Default Configuration The default RADIUS server name is Default-RADIUS-Server. Command Mode Radius mode User Guidelines Names may only be set for authentication servers, not for accounting servers. Names may consist of alphanumeric characters and the underscore, dash and blanks.
PAGE 660
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 660 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM primary Use the primary command to specify that a configured server should be the primary server in the group of authentication servers which have the same server name. Multiple primary servers can be configured for each group of servers which have the same name.
PAGE 661
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 661 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The default priority is 0. Command Mode Radius mode User Guidelines User must enter the mode corresponding to a specific Radius server before executing this command. Example The following example specifies a priority of 10 for the designated server. console(config)#radius-server host 192.143.120.
PAGE 662
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 662 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines If only one RADIUS server is configured, it is recommended that the deadtime interval be left at 0. Example The following example sets the minimum interval for a RADIUS server will not be contacted after becoming unresponsive.
PAGE 663
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 663 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Radius servers are keyed by the host name, therefore it is advisable to use unique server host names. Example The following example specifies a Radius server host with the following characteristics: Server host IP address — 192.168.10.1 console(config)#radius-server host 192.168.10.
PAGE 664
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 664 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets the authentication and encryption key for all Radius communications between the device and the Radius server to “dellserver.
PAGE 665
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 665 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM radius-server source-ip Use the radius-server source-ip command in Global Configuration mode to specify the source IP address used for communication with Radius servers. To return to the default, use the no form of this command. 0.0.0.0 is interpreted as a request to use the IP address of the outgoing IP interface. Syntax radius-server source-ip source no radius-server source-ip • source — Specifies the source IP address.
PAGE 666
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 666 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • timeout — Specifies the timeout value in seconds. (Range: 1–30) Default Configuration The default value is 3 seconds. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets the interval for which a switch waits for a server host to reply to 5 seconds.
PAGE 667
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 667 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example of the retransmit command specifies five retries. console(config)#radius-server host 192.143.120.123 console(config-radius)#retransmit 5 show aaa servers Use the show aaa servers command to display the list of configured RADIUS servers and the values configured for the global parameters of the RADIUS client.
PAGE 668
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 668 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Field Description Configured Authentication Servers The number of RADIUS Authentication servers that have been configured. Configured Accounting Servers The number of RADIUS Accounting servers that have been configured. Named Authentication Server Groups The number of configured named RADIUS server groups. Named Accounting Server Groups The number of configured named RADIUS server groups.
PAGE 669
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 669 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Global values -------------------------------------------Number of Configured Authentication Servers.... Number of Configured Accounting Servers........ Number of Named Authentication Server Groups... Number of Named Accounting Server Groups....... Number of Retransmits.......................... Timeout Duration............................... Deadtime....................................... Source IP.....................................
PAGE 670
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 670 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Source IP : 0.0.0.0 RADIUS Attribute 4 Mode : Disable RADIUS Attribute 4 Value : 0.0.0.0 console#show radius-servers accounting name Server Name Host Address Port Type ---------------------- -------------- ------ ---------Default-RADIUS-Server 2.2.2.2 1813 Secondary console#show radius-servers name Default-RADIUS-Server RADIUS Server Name.......................... Default-RADIUS-Server Current Server IP Address..............
PAGE 671
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 671 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description accounting | authentication The type of server (accounting or authentication). ipaddress The RADIUS server host IP address. hostname Host name of the Radius server host. (Range: 1–158 characters). The command allows spaces in the host name when specified in double quotes. For example, console(config)#snmp-server host "host name" servername The alias used to identify the server.
PAGE 672
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 672 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Field Description Responses The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server. Malformed Responses The number of malformed RADIUS Accounting Response packets received from this server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or signature attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed accounting responses.
PAGE 673
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 673 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Field Description Access Challenges The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets, including both valid and invalid packets, that were received from this server. Malformed Access The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets Responses received from this server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or signature attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses.
PAGE 674
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 674 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Pending Requests.............................. 0 Timeouts...................................... 0 Unknown Types................................. 0 Packets Dropped............................... 0 console#show radius statistics name Default_RADIUS_Server RADIUS Server Name............................ Default_RADIUS_Server Server Host Address........................... 192.168.37.200 Access Requests............................... 0.
PAGE 675
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 675 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • source — A valid source IP address. Default Configuration The IP address is of the outgoing IP interface. Command Mode Radius mode User Guidelines User must enter the mode corresponding to a specific Radius server before executing this command. Example The following example specifies 10.240.1.23 as the source IP address. console(config)#radius-server host 192.143.120.123 console(config-radius)#source-ip 10.240.1.
PAGE 676
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 676 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines User must enter the mode corresponding to a specific Radius server before executing this command. Example The following example specifies the timeout setting for the designated Radius Server. console(config)#radius-server host 192.143.120.123 console(config-radius)#timeout 20 usage Use the usage command in Radius mode to specify the usage type of the server.
PAGE 677
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 677 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Spanning Tree Commands 34 The Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) component complies with IEEE 802.1s by efficiently navigating VLAN traffic over separate interfaces for multiple instances of Spanning Tree. IEEE 802.1D, Spanning Tree and IEEE 802.1w, Rapid Spanning Tree are supported through the IEEE 802.1s implementation. The difference between the RSTP and STP (IEEE 802.
PAGE 678
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 678 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM port. In this way, the root guard enforces the position of the root bridge. In MSTP scenario the port may be designated in one of the instances while being alternate in the CIST, and so on. Root guard is a per port (not a per port per instance command) configuration so all the MSTP instances this port participates in should not be in root role. STP BPDU Filtering - STP BPDU filtering applies to all operational edge ports.
PAGE 679
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 679 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM clear spanning-tree detected-protocols Use the clear spanning-tree detected-protocols command in Privileged EXEC mode to restart the protocol migration process (force the renegotiation with neighboring switches) on all interfaces or on the specified interface.
PAGE 680
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 680 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode MST mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example shows how to exit the MST configuration mode and save changes. console(config)#spanning-tree mst configuration console(config-mst)#exit instance (mst) Use the instance command in MST mode to map VLANS to an MST instance. Syntax instance instance-id {add | remove} vlan vlan-range • instance-ID — ID of the MST instance.
PAGE 681
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 681 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM All VLANs that are not explicitly mapped to an MST instance are mapped to the common and internal spanning tree (CIST) instance (instance 0) and cannot be unmapped from the CIST. For two or more switches to be in the same MST region, they must have the same VLAN mapping, the same configuration revision number, and the same name.
PAGE 682
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 683
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 683 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example sets the configuration name to “region1”. console(config)#spanning-tree mst configuration console(config-mst)#name region1 revision (mst) Use the revision command in MST mode to identify the configuration revision number. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command. Syntax revision version no revision • version — Configuration revision number.
PAGE 684
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 684 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show spanning-tree [{gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | port-channel portchannel-number | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port}] [instance instance-id] show spanning-tree [detail] [active | blockedports] | [instance instance-id] show spanning-tree mst-configuration Parameter Description Parameter Description detail Displays detailed information. active Displays active ports only. blockedports Displays blocked ports only.
PAGE 685
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 685 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Root Port Gi1/0/1 Hello Time 2 Sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec TxHoldCount 6 sec Bridge ID Priority 32768 Address 001E.C9AA.AD1B Hello Time 2 Sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec Interfaces Name State ------ -------- --------- --------- ---- ----- ---------- Prio.Nbr Cost Sts Role Restricted Gi1/0/1 Enabled 128.1 20000 FWD Root No Gi1/0/2 Enabled 128.2 0 DIS Disb No Gi1/0/3 Enabled 128.
PAGE 686
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 686 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Path Cost 20000 Root Port Gi1/0/1 Hello Time 2 Sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec Bridge ID Priority 32768 Address 001E.C9AA.AD1B Hello Time 2 Sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec Number of topology changes 1 last change occurred 0d0h17m7s ago Times: hold 6, hello 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Port Gi1/0/1 Enabled State: Forwarding Role: Root Port id: 128.
PAGE 687
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 687 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Designated bridge Priority: 32768 Address: 0010.1882.1C53 Designated port id: 128.48 Designated path cost: 0 CST Regional Root: 80:00:00:10:18:82:1C:53 CST Port Cost: 0 BPDU: sent 24, received 504 Port Gi1/0/5 Enabled State: Forwarding Role: Designated Port id: 128.5 Port Cost: 20000 Root Protection: No Designated bridge Priority: 32768 Address: 001E.C9AA.AD1B Designated port id: 128.
PAGE 688
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 688 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines The following fields are displayed: Field Description Spanning Tree Admin Mode Enabled or disabled Spanning Tree Version Version of 802.1 currently supported (IEEE 802.1s, IEEE 802.1w, or IEEE 802.1d) based upon the mode parameter. BPDU Protection Mode Enabled or disabled. BPDU Filter Mode Enabled or disabled. BPDU Flooding Mode Enabled or disabled.
PAGE 689
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 689 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM BPDU Filter Mode.................. Disabled Configuration Name................ 00-1E-C9-AA-AC-84 Configuration Revision Level...... 0 Configuration Digest Key.......... 0xac36177f50283cd4b83821d8ab26de62 Configuration Format Selector..... 0 spanning-tree Use the spanning-tree command in Global Configuration mode to enable spanning-tree functionality. To disable spanning-tree functionality, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 690
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 690 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM spanning-tree auto-portfast Use the spanning-tree auto-portfast command to set the port to auto portfast mode. This enables the port to become a portfast port if it does not see any BPDUs for 3 seconds. Use the “no” form of this command to disable auto portfast mode. Syntax spanning-tree auto-portfast no spanning-tree auto-portfast Default Configuration Auto portfast mode is disabled by default.
PAGE 691
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 691 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no spanning-tree bpdu flooding Default Configuration This feature is disabled by default. Command Mode Global Configuration mode Usage Guidelines There are no usage guidelines for this command. Example console#spanning-tree bpdu flooding spanning-tree bpdu-protection Use the spanning-tree bpdu-protection command in Global Configuration mode to enable BPDU protection on a switch.
PAGE 692
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 692 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration BPDU protection is not enabled. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example enables BPDU protection. console(config)#spanning-tree bpdu-protection spanning-tree cost Use the spanning-tree cost command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the external spanning-tree path cost for a port.
PAGE 693
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 693 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet) mode User Guidelines This command configures the external cost. Since by default each switch is in its own region, the external cost is considered in determining the spanning tree of the network. This command is also used to configure the rstp path cost. Example The following example configures the spanning-tree cost on 1/0/5 to 35000.
PAGE 694
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 694 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example disables spanning-tree on 1/0/5. console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/5 console(config-if-1/0/5)#spanning-tree disable spanning-tree forward-time Use the spanning-tree forward-time command in Global Configuration mode to configure the spanning-tree bridge forward time, which is the amount of time a port remains in the listening and learning states before entering the forwarding state.
PAGE 695
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 695 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM spanning-tree guard The spanning-tree guard command selects whether loop guard or root guard is enabled on an interface. If neither is enabled, the port operates in accordance with the multiple spanning tree protocol. Use the “no” form of this command to disable loop guard or root guard on the interface. Syntax spanning-tree guard { root | loop | none } • root — Enables root guard.
PAGE 696
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 696 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax spanning-tree loopguard default no spanning-tree loopguard default Default Configuration Loop guard is disabled by default. Command Mode Global Configuration mode Usage Guidelines There are no usage guidelines for this command. Example The following example enables spanning-tree loopguard functionality on all ports.
PAGE 697
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 697 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines When configuring the Max-Age the following relationships should be satisfied: 2*(Forward-Time - 1) >= Max-Age Max-Age >= 2*(Hello-Time + 1) Example The following example configures the spanning-tree bridge maximum-age to 10 seconds.
PAGE 698
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 698 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM spanning-tree mode Use the spanning-tree mode command in Global Configuration mode to configure the spanning-tree protocol. To return to the default configuration, use the no form of this command. Syntax spanning-tree mode {stp | rstp | mst} no spanning-tree mode • stp — Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is enabled. • rstp — Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is enabled. • mst — Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) is enabled.
PAGE 699
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 699 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax spanning-tree mst configuration Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines For two or more switches to be in the same MST region, they must have the same VLAN mapping, the same configuration revision number and the same name. Example The following example configures an MST region.
PAGE 700
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 700 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • cost — The port path cost. (Range: 0–200,000,000) Default Configuration The default value is 0, which signifies that the cost will be automatically calculated based on port speed.
PAGE 701
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 701 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description instance-id ID of the spanning-tree instance. (Range: 1-4094) priority The port priority. (Range: 0-240 in multiples of 16.) Default Configuration The default port-priority for IEEE STP is 128.
PAGE 702
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 702 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description instance-id ID of the spanning-tree instance. (Range: 1-4094) priority Sets the switch priority for the specified spanning-tree instance. This setting affects the likelihood that the switch is selected as the root switch. A lower value increases the probability that the switch is selected as the root switch.
PAGE 703
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 703 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration PortFast mode is disabled. Command Mode Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet) mode User Guidelines This command only applies to access ports. The command is to be used only with interfaces connected to end stations. Otherwise, an accidental topology loop could cause a data packet loop and disrupt switch and network operations.
PAGE 704
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 704 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode Usage Guidelines There are no usage guidelines for this command. Example The following example discards BPDUs received on spanning-tree ports in portfast mode. console#spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default spanning-tree portfast default Use the spanning-tree portfast default command to enable Portfast mode only on access ports.
PAGE 705
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 705 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example enables Portfast mode on all access ports. console(config)#spanning-tree portfast default spanning-tree port-priority Use the spanning-tree port-priority command in Interface Configuration mode to configure port priority. To reset the default port priority, use the no form of this command. Syntax spanning-tree port-priority priority no spanning-tree port-priority • priority — The port priority.
PAGE 706
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 706 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM spanning-tree priority Use the spanning-tree priority command in Global Configuration mode to configure the spanning-tree priority. The priority value is used to determine which bridge is elected as the root bridge. To reset the default spanning-tree priority use the no form of this command. Syntax spanning-tree priority priority no spanning-tree priority • priority — Priority of the bridge.
PAGE 707
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 707 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration TCN propagation is disabled by default. Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel) mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example The following example configures spanning-tree tcnguard on 4/0/1.
PAGE 708
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 708 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example sets the maximum number of BPDUs sent to 6.
PAGE 709
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 709 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM TACACS+ Commands 35 TACACS+ provides access control for networked devices via one or more centralized servers, similar to RADIUS this protocol simplifies authentication by making use of a single database that can be shared by many clients on a large network. TACACS+ is based on the TACACS protocol (described in RFC1492) but additionally provides for separate authentication, authorization and accounting services.
PAGE 710
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 710 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Commands in this Chapter This chapter explains the following commands: key tacacs-server host port tacacs-server key priority tacacs-server timeout show tacacs timeout key Use the key command in TACACS Configuration mode to specify the authentication and encryption key for all TACACS communications between the device and the TACACS server. This key must match the key used on the TACACS daemon.
PAGE 711
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 711 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM port Use the port command in TACACS Configuration mode to specify a server port number. Syntax port [ port-number ] • port-number — The server port number. If left unspecified, the default port number is 49. (Range: 0–65535) Default Configuration The default port number is 49. Command Mode TACACS Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 712
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 712 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode TACACS Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example shows how to specify a server priority of 10000. console(tacacs)#priority 10000 show tacacs Use the show tacacs command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the configuration and statistics of a TACACS+ server. Syntax show tacacs [ip-address] • ip-address — The name or IP address of the host.
PAGE 713
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 713 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IP address Port Timeout Priority --------------- ----- ------- -------- 10.254.24.162 49 Global 0 tacacs-server host Use the tacacs-server host command in Global Configuration mode to configure a TACACS+ server. This command enters into the TACACS+ configuration mode. To delete the specified hostname or IP address, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 714
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 714 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config)#tacacs-server host 172.16.1.1 console(tacacs)# tacacs-server key Use the tacacs-server key command in Global Configuration mode to set the authentication and encryption key for all TACACS+ communications between the switch and the TACACS+ daemon. To disable the key, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 715
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 715 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config)#tacacs-server key @#$%^&*()_+={}][<>.,/';:| tacacs-server timeout Use the tacacs-server timeout command in Global Configuration mode to set the interval during which a switch waits for a server host to reply. To restore the default, use the no form of this command. Syntax tacacs-server timeout [ timeout ] no tacacs-server timeout • timeout — The timeout value in seconds.
PAGE 716
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 716 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • timeout — The timeout value in seconds. (Range: 1–30) Default Configuration If left unspecified, the timeout defaults to the global value. Command Mode TACACS Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example This example shows how to specify the timeout value.
PAGE 717
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 717 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM VLAN Commands 36 PowerConnect 802.1Q VLANs are an implementation of the Virtual Local Area Network, specification 802.1Q. Operating at Layer 2 of the OSI model, the VLAN is a means of parsing a single network into logical user groups or organizations as if they physically resided on a dedicated LAN segment of their own. In reality, this virtually defined community may have individual members scattered across a large, extended LAN.
PAGE 718
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 718 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM two TPID values can be different or the same. VLAN normalization, source MAC learning, and forwarding are based on the S-TAG value in a received frame. PowerConnect supports configuring one outer VLAN TPID value per switch. The global default TPID is 0x88A8, which indicates a Virtual Metropolitan Area Network (VMAN).
PAGE 719
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 719 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM its own VLAN. Additionally, protocol-based classification allows an administrator to assign nonroutable protocols, such as NetBIOS or DECnet, to larger VLANs than routable protocols like IPX or IP. This maximizes the efficiency gains that are possible with VLANs. In port-based VLAN classification, the Port VLAN Identifier (PVID) is associated with the physical ports.
PAGE 720
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 721
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 721 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The default for this command is 802.1Q. The default S-TAG TPID, when double-tagging is enabled, is 0x88A8. The default C-TAG TPID when double vlan tagging is enabled is 0x8100. Command Mode Global Configuration, Interface Configuration mode User Guidelines This command configures the TPID value on the outer VLAN (S-VLAN).
PAGE 722
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 722 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures the VLAN 1 IP address of 131.108.1.27 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0. console(config)#interface vlan 1 console(config-vlan)#ip address 131.108.1.27 255.255.255.
PAGE 723
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 723 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines Commands used in the interface range context are executed independently on each interface in the range. If the command returns an error on one of the interfaces, an error message is displayed and execution continues on other interfaces. Example The following example groups VLAN 221 till 228 and VLAN 889 to receive the same command.
PAGE 724
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 724 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays how to enable Double VLAN Tunneling at gigabit ethernet port 1/0/1. console(config-if-1/0/1)#mode dvlan-tunnel name (VLAN Configuration) Use the name command in VLAN Configuration mode to configure the VLAN name. To return to the default configuration, use the no form of this command. NOTE: This command cannot be configured for a range of interfaces (range context).
PAGE 725
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 725 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example configures a VLAN name of office2 for VLAN 2. console(config)#interface vlan 2 console(config-vlan)#name "RDU-NOC Management VLAN" protocol group Use the protocol group command in VLAN Database mode to attach a VLAN ID to the protocol-based group identified by groupid. A group may only be associated with one VLAN at a time. However, the VLAN association can be changed.
PAGE 726
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 726 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays how to attach the VLAN ID "100" to the protocol-based VLAN group "3." console#vlan database console(config-vlan)#protocol group 3 100 protocol vlan group Use the protocol vlan group command in Interface Configuration mode to add the physical unit/slot/port interface to the protocol-based group identified by groupid. A group may have more than one interface associated with it.
PAGE 727
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 727 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays how to add a physical port interface to the group ID of "2." console(config-if-1/0/1)#protocol vlan group 2 protocol vlan group all Use the protocol vlan group all command in Global Configuration mode to add all physical interfaces to the protocol-based group identified by groupid. A group may have more than one interface associated with it.
PAGE 728
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 728 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays how to add all physical interfaces to the protocol-based group identified by group ID "2." console(config)#protocol vlan group all 2 show dvlan-tunnel Use the show dvlan-tunnel command in Privileged EXEC mode to display all interfaces enabled for Double VLAN Tunneling.
PAGE 729
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 729 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show dvlan-tunnel interface Use the show dvlan-tunnel interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to display detailed information about Double VLAN Tunneling for the specified interface or all interfaces. Syntax show dvlan-tunnel interface {gigabithethernet unit/slot/port | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port | all} • all — Displays information for all interfaces. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 730
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 730 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM EtherType This field represents a 2-byte hex EtherType to be used as the first 16 bits of the DVLAN tunnel. The three different EtherType tags are: (1) 802.1Q, which represents the commonly used value of 0x8100. (2) vMAN, which represents the commonly used value of 0x88A8. (3) If EtherType is not one of these two values, it is a custom tunnel value, representing any value in the range of 0 to 65535.
PAGE 731
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 732
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 732 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 73 Out The following example displays switchport configuration individually for 1/0/2.
PAGE 733
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 733 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ---- --------- 73 Out The following example displays switchport configuration individually for 2/0/19.
PAGE 734
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 734 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 2922 Community A1 untagged Static show port protocol Use the show port protocol command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the Protocol-Based VLAN information for either the entire system or for the indicated group. Syntax show port protocol {groupid | all} • groupid — The protocol-based VLAN group ID, which is automatically generated when you create a protocol-based VLAN group with the vlan protocol group command.
PAGE 735
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 735 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show vlan Use the show vlan command in Privileged EXEC mode to display detailed information, including interface information and dynamic VLAN type, for a specific VLAN. The ID is a valid VLAN identification number.
PAGE 736
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 736 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ----- --------------- ------------- -------------- 2 VLAN0002 Gi1/0/11-20 Dynamic (DOT1X) console#show vlan id 3 VLAN Name Ports Type ----- --------------- ------------- -------------- 3 VLAN0003 Gi1/0/21-24 Dynamic (GVRP) show vlan association mac Use the show vlan association mac command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the VLAN associated with a specific configured MAC address.
PAGE 737
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 737 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM MAC Address VLAN ID ----------------------- ------- 0001.0001.0001.0001 1 console# show vlan association subnet Use the show vlan association subnet command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the VLAN associated with a specific configured IP-Address and netmask. If no IP Address and net mask are specified, the VLAN associations of all the configured IP-subnets are displayed.
PAGE 738
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 738 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM The IP Subnet to VLAN association does not exist. switchport access vlan Use the switchport access vlan command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the VLAN ID when the interface is in access mode. To reconfigure the default, use the no form of this command. Syntax switchport access vlan vlan-id no switchport access vlan • vlan-id — A valid VLAN ID of the VLAN to which the port is configured.
PAGE 739
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 739 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM switchport forbidden vlan Use the switchport forbidden vlan command in Interface Configuration mode to forbid adding specific VLANs to a port. To revert to allowing the addition of specific VLANs to the port, use the remove parameter of this command. Syntax switchport forbidden vlan {add vlan-list | remove vlan-list} • add vlan-list — List of valid VLAN IDs to add to the forbidden list.
PAGE 740
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 740 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM switchport general acceptable-frame-type tagged-only Use the switchport general acceptable-frame-type tagged-only command in Interface Configuration mode to discard untagged frames at ingress. To enable untagged frames at ingress, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 741
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 741 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM switchport general allowed vlan remove vlan-list • add vlan-list — List of VLAN IDs to add. Separate nonconsecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces. Use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. • remove vlan-list — List of VLAN IDs to remove. Separate nonconsecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces. Use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. • tagged — Sets the port to transmit tagged packets for the VLANs.
PAGE 742
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 742 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax switchport general ingress-filtering disable no switchport general ingress-filtering disable Default Configuration Ingress filtering is enabled. Command Mode Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example shows how to enables port ingress filtering on 1/0/8.
PAGE 743
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 743 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The default value for the vlan-id parameter is 1 when the VLAN is enabled. Otherwise, the value is 4093. Command Mode Interface Configuration (gigabitethernet, port-channel, tengigabitethernet) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example shows how to configure the PVID for 1/0/8, when the interface is in general mode.
PAGE 744
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 744 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description trunk A trunk port connects two switches. A trunk port may belong to multiple VLANs. A trunk port accepts only packets tagged with the VLAN IDs of the VLANs to which the trunk is a member or untagged packets if configured with a PVID. A trunk only transmits tagged packets. general Full 802.1q support VLAN interface. A general mode port is a combination of both trunk and access ports capabilities.
PAGE 745
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 745 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description vlan–list Set the list of allowed VLANs that can receive and send traffic on this interface in tagged format when in trunking mode. The default is all. The vlan–list format is as follows: The vlan-list format is all | [add | remove | except] vlan–atom [, vlan–atom...] where: all specifies all VLANs from 1 to 4093.
PAGE 746
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 746 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#switchport trunk allowed vlan 1-1024 console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#switchport trunk allowed vlan except 1,2,3,5,7,11,13 vlan Use the vlan command in VLAN Database mode to configure a VLAN. To delete a VLAN, use the no form of this command. Syntax vlan vlan-range no vlan vlan-range • vlan-range — A list of valid VLAN IDs to be added.
PAGE 747
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 747 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM vlan (Global Config) Use the vlan command in Global Configuration mode to configure a VLAN. To delete a VLAN, use the no form of this command. Syntax vlan {vlan–id | vlan–range} no vlan {vlan–id | vlan–range} Parameter Description Parameter Description vlan–id A valid VLAN ID. (Range: 2–4093) vlan–range A list of valid VLAN IDs. List separate, non-consecutive VLAN IDs separated by commas (without spaces).
PAGE 748
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 748 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM vlan association mac Use the vlan association mac command in VLAN Database mode to associate a MAC address to a VLAN. The maximum number of MAC-based VLANs is 256. Syntax vlan association mac mac-address vlanid no vlan association mac mac-address mac-address — MAC address to associate. (Range: Any MAC address in the format xxxx.xxxx.xxxx) vlanid — VLAN to associate with subnet.
PAGE 749
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 749 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • ip-address — Source IP address. (Range: Any valid IP address) • subnet-mask — Subnet mask. (Range: Any valid subnet mask) • vlanid — VLAN to associated with subnet. (Range: 1-4093) Default Configuration No assigned ip-subnet. Command Mode VLAN Database mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example associates IP address with VLAN ID 100.
PAGE 750
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 750 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example enters the VLAN database mode. console(config)#vlan database console(config-vlan)# vlan makestatic This command changes a dynamically created VLAN (one that is created by GVRP registration) to a static VLAN (one that is permanently configured and defined). The ID is a valid VLAN identification number. VLAN range is 24093. Syntax vlan makestatic vlan-id • vlan-id — Valid vlan ID. Range is 2–4093.
PAGE 751
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 751 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM vlan protocol group Use the vlan protocol group command in Global Configuration mode to add protocol-based groups to the system. When a protocol group is created, it is assigned a unique group ID number. The group ID is used to identify the group in subsequent commands. Use the no form of the command to remove the specified VLAN protocol group name from the system.
PAGE 752
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 752 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM vlan protocol group add protocol Use the vlan protocol group add protocol command in Global Configuration mode to add a protocol to the protocol-based VLAN groups identified by groupid. A group may have more than one protocol associated with it. Each interface and protocol combination can be associated with one group only.
PAGE 753
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 753 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config)#vlan protocol group add protocol 2 ethertype 0xXXXX vlan protocol group name This is a new command for assigning a group name to vlan protocol group id. Syntax vlan protocol group name groupid groupName no vlan protocol group name groupid • groupid—The protocol-based VLAN group ID, which is automatically generated when you create a protocol-based VLAN group with the vlan protocol group command.
PAGE 754
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 754 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax vlan protocol group remove groupid • groupid — The protocol-based VLAN group ID, which is automatically generated when you create a protocol-based VLAN group with the vlan protocol group command. To see the group ID associated with the name of a protocol group, use the show port protocol all command. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 755
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 755 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description index Internal interface ID. This optional parameter is listed in the configuration file for all VLAN routing interfaces. When a nonstop forwarding failover occurs, this information enables the system to correlate checkpointed state information with the proper interfaces and their configuration. Default Configuration Routing is not enabled on any VLANs by default.
PAGE 756
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 757
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 757 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Voice VLAN Commands 37 The Voice VLAN feature enables switch ports to carry voice traffic with defined priority so as to enable separation of voice and data traffic coming onto the port. Using Voice VLAN ensures that sound quality of an IP phone is safeguarded from deterioration when the data traffic on the port is high. The switch can be configured to support voice VLAN on a port connecting to the VoIP phone.
PAGE 758
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 758 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM voice vlan This command is used to enable the voice vlan capability on the switch. Syntax voice vlan no voice vlan Parameter Ranges Not applicable Command Mode Global Configuration Usage Guidelines Not applicable Default Value This feature is disabled by default. Example console(config)#voice vlan console(config)#no voice vlan voice vlan (Interface) This command is used to enable the voice vlan capability on the interface.
PAGE 759
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 759 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description auth Enables/disables authentication on the voice vlan port. data Observe the priority on received voice vlan traffic (trusted mode). dot1p Configure Voice VLAN 802.1p priority tagging for voice traffic. dscp Configure DSCP value for voice traffic on the voice vlan port. (Range: 0–64). none Allow the IP phone to use its own configuration to send untagged voice traffic.
PAGE 760
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 760 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-if-Gi1/0/1)#voice vlan untagged voice vlan data priority This command is to either trust or not trust (untrust) the data traffic arriving on the voice VLAN port. Syntax voice vlan data priority { trust | untrust } • trust —Trust the dot1p priority or DSCP values contained in packets arriving on the voice vlan port.
PAGE 761
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 761 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM When the interface parameter is specified: Voice VLAN Mode The admin mode of the voice VLAN on the interface. Voice VLAN ID The voice VLAN ID. Voice VLAN Priority The Dot1p priority for the voice VLAN on the port. Voice VLAN Untagged The tagging option for the voice VLAN traffic. Voice VLAN COS Override The Override option for the voice traffic arriving on the port.
PAGE 762
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 763
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 763 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 38 802.1x Commands Local Area Networks (LANs) are often deployed in environments that permit the attachment of unauthorized devices. The networks also permit unauthorized users to attempt to access the LAN through existing equipment. In such environments, the administrator may desire to restrict access to the services offered by the LAN.
PAGE 764
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 764 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Whenever an operator configures a port in Dot1x authentication mode and selects the authentication method as internal, then the user credentials received from the Dot1x supplicant is validated against the IDAS by Dot1x component. The Dot1x application accesses the Dot1x user database to check whether the user credentials present in the authentication message corresponds to a valid user or not.
PAGE 765
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 765 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Guest VLAN The Guest VLAN feature allows a PowerConnect switch to provide a distinguished service to unauthenticated users (not rogue users who fail authentication). This feature provides a mechanism to allow visitors and contractors to have network access to reach external network with no ability to surf internal LAN. When a client that does not support 802.1X is connected to an unauthorized port that is 802.
PAGE 766
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 766 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM client is authenticated and is undisturbed by the failure condition(s). The reasons for failure are logged and buffered into the local logging database such that the operator can track the failure conditions. RADIUS-based Dynamic VLAN Assignment If VLAN assignment is enabled in the RADIUS server then as part of the response message, the RADIUS server sends the VLAN ID which the client is requested to use in the 802.
PAGE 767
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 767 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 802.1x Advanced Features dot1x guest-vlan dot1x unauth-vlan show dot1x advanced 802.1x Option 81 radius-server attribute 4 dot1x dynamic-vlan enable Use the dot1x dynamic-vlan enable command in Global Configuration mode to enable the capability of creating VLANs dynamically when a RADIUS–assigned VLAN does not exist in the switch. Use the no form of the command to disable this capability.
PAGE 768
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 768 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM dot1x initialize This command begins the initialization sequence on the specified port. This command is only valid if the control mode for the specified port is auto or mac-based. If the control mode is not auto or mac-based, an error will be returned. Syntax dot1x initialize [interface interface-id] Syntax Description Parameter Description interface-id The port to be initialized.
PAGE 769
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 769 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 770
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 770 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example sets the number of times that the switch sends an EAP-request/identity frame to 6. console(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/0/16 console(config-if-1/0/16)# dot1x max-req 6 dot1x max-users Use the dot1x max-users command in Interface Configuration mode to set the maximum number of clients supported on the port when MAC-based 802.1X authentication is enabled on the port.
PAGE 771
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 771 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-if-1/0/2)#dot1x max-users 3 dot1x port-control Use the dot1x port-control command in Interface Configuration mode to enable the IEEE 802.1X operation on the port. Syntax dot1x port-control {force-authorized | force-unauthorized | auto | macbased} no dot1x port-control • auto — Enables 802.1x authentication on the interface and causes the port to transition to the authorized or unauthorized state based on the 802.
PAGE 772
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 772 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines It is recommended that you disable the spanning tree or enable spanning-tree PortFast mode on 802.1x edge ports (ports in auto state that are connected to end stations), in order to go immediately to the forwarding state after successful authentication. When configuring a port to use MAC-based authentication, the port must be in switchport general mode.
PAGE 773
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 773 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console# dot1x re-authenticate gigabitethernet 1/0/16 dot1x reauthentication Use the dot1x reauthentication command in Interface Configuration mode to enable periodic re-authentication of the client. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command. Syntax dot1x reauthentication no dot1x reauthentication Default Configuration Periodic re-authentication is disabled.
PAGE 774
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 774 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Default Configuration Dot1x monitor mode is disabled. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example enables 802.1x globally.
PAGE 775
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 775 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines It is recommended that the user set the dot1x timeout guest-vlan-period to at least three times the while timer, so that at least three EAP Requests are sent, before assuming that the client is a dot1x unaware client. Example The following example sets the dot1x timeout guest vlan period to 100 seconds.
PAGE 776
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 776 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Change the default value of this command only to adjust for unusual circumstances, such as unreliable links or specific behavioral problems with certain clients and authentication servers. To provide a faster response time to the user, enter a smaller number than the default. Example The following example sets the number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange to 3600.
PAGE 777
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 777 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example sets the number of seconds between re-authentication attempts to 300. console(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/0/16 console(config-if-1/0/16)# dot1x timeout reauthperiod 300 dot1x timeout server-timeout Use the dot1x timeout server-timeout command in Interface Configuration mode to set the time that the switch waits for a response from the authentication server.
PAGE 778
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 778 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-if-1/0/1)# dot1x timeout servertimeout 3600 dot1x timeout supp-timeout Use the dot1x timeout supp-timeout command in Interface Configuration mode to set the time that the switch waits for a response before retransmitting an Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)-request frame to the client. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 779
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 779 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM dot1x timeout tx-period Use the dot1x timeout tx-period command in Interface Configuration mode to set the number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)-request/identity frame from the client before resending the request. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 780
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 780 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show dot1x Use the show dot1x command in Privileged EXEC mode to display: • A summary of the global dot1x configuration. • Summary information of the dot1x configuration for a specified port or all ports. • Detailed dot1x configuration for a specified port • Dot1x statistics for a specified port, depending on the tokens used.
PAGE 781
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 781 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Field Description Monitor Mode Indicates whether the Dot1x Monitor mode on the switch is enabled or disabled. Example console#show dot1x Administrative Mode..............Enabled VLAN Assignment Mode.............Disabled Monitor Mode.....................
PAGE 782
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 782 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Reason Actual reason behind the successful or failure authentication. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console#show dot1x authentication-history all detail Time Stamp............................... Mar 22 2010 01:16:31 Interface................................ Gi1/0/2 MAC-Address..
PAGE 783
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 784
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 784 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines The following fields are displayed by this command. Field Description Clients Indicates the number of Dot1x clients authenticated using Authenticated using Monitor mode. Monitor Mode Clients Indicates the number of Dot1x clients authenticated using Authenticated using 802.1x authentication process. Dot1x The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display.
PAGE 785
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 785 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Clients Authenticated using Dot1x.............. 1 Logical Interface.............................. 16 Interface...................................... gi1/0/2 User Name...................................... 000102030405 Supp MAC Address............................... 00:01:02:03:04:05 Session Time................................... 518 Filter Id...................................... VLAN Id........................................
PAGE 786
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 786 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console#show dot1x interface gigabitethernet 1/0/10 Administrative Mode............... Disabled Dynamic VLAN Creation Mode........ Disabled Monitor Mode......................
PAGE 787
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 787 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM VLAN Assigned.................................. Supplicant Timeout............................. 30 Guest-vlan Timeout............................. 30 Server Timeout (secs).......................... 30 MAB mode (configured).......................... Disabled MAB mode (operational)......................... Disabled Authenticator PAE State........................ Initialize Backend Authentication State...................
PAGE 788
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 788 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console#show dot1x statistics gigabitethernet 1/0/2 Port........................................... 1/0/2 EAPOL Frames Received.......................... 0 EAPOL Frames Transmitted....................... 0 EAPOL Start Frames Received.................... 0 EAPOL Logoff Frames Received................... 0 Last EAPOL Frame Version....................... 0 Last EAPOL Frame Source........................ 0000.0000.
PAGE 789
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 789 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Field Description EapolRespFramesRx The number of valid EAP Response frames (other than Resp/Id frames) that have been received by this Authenticator. EapolReqIdFramesTx The number of EAP Req/Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator. EapolReqFramesTx The number of EAP Request frames (other than Rq/Id frames) that have been transmitted by this Authenticator.
PAGE 790
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 790 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays 802.1x users. console#show dot1x users Port Username --------- --------1/0/1 Bob 1/0/2 John Switch# show dot1x users username Bob Port Username --------- --------1/0/1 Bob The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display: Field Description Username The username representing the identity of the Supplicant.
PAGE 791
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 791 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description interface–id Any valid interface. See Interface Naming Conventions for interface representation. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console#clear dot1x authentication-history Purge all entries from the log.
PAGE 792
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 792 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no dot1x guest-vlan • vlan-id — The ID of a valid VLAN to use as the guest VLAN (Range: 04093). Default Configuration The guest VLAN is disabled on the interface by default. Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode User Guidelines Configure the guest VLAN before using this command. Example The following example sets the guest VLAN on port 1/0/2 to VLAN 10.
PAGE 793
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 793 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines Configure the unauthenticated VLAN before using this command. Example The following example set the unauthenticated VLAN on port 1/0/2 to VLAN 20. console(config-if-1/0/2)#dot1x unauth-vlan 20 show dot1x advanced Use the show dot1x advanced command in Privileged EXEC mode to display 802.1x advanced features for the switch or for the specified interface. The output of this command has been updated in release 2.
PAGE 794
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 794 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM VLAN --------- --------- Vlan --------------- 1/0/1 Disabled Disabled 1/0/2 10 20 1/0/3 Disabled Disabled 1/0/4 Disabled Disabled 1/0/5 Disabled Disabled 1/0/6 Disabled Disabled console#show dot1x advanced gigabitethernet 1/0/2 Port Guest Unauthenticated VLAN --------1/0/2 --------- Vlan --------------- 10 20 802.
PAGE 795
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 795 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration If a RADIUS server has been configured on the switch, the default attribute 4 value is the RADIUS server IP address. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets the NAS IP address in RADIUS attribute 4 to 192.168.10.22. console(config)#radius-server attribute 4 192.168.10.22 802.
PAGE 796
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 796 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 796 802.
PAGE 797
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 797 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 39 Layer 3 Commands The chapters that follow describe commands that conform to the OSI model’s Network Layer (Layer 3). Layer 3 commands perform a series of exchanges over various data links to deliver data between any two nodes in a network. These commands define the addressing and routing structure of the Internet.
PAGE 798
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 799
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 799 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ARP Commands 40 When a host has an IP packet to send on an Ethernet network, it must encapsulate the IP packet in an Ethernet frame. The Ethernet header requires a destination MAC address. If the destination IP address is on the same network as the sender, the sender uses the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to determine the MAC address associated with destination IP address.
PAGE 800
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 800 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ARP Aging Dynamic entries in the ARP cache are aged. When an entry for a neighbor router reaches its maximum age, the system sends an ARP request to the neighbor router to renew the entry. Entries for neighbor routers should remain in the ARP cache as long as the neighbor continues to respond to ARP requests. ARP cache entries for neighbor hosts are renewed more selectively.
PAGE 801
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 801 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax arp ip-address hardware-address no arp ip-address • ip-address — IP address of a device on a subnet attached to an existing routing interface. • hardware-address — A unicast MAC address for that device. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 802
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 802 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The default integer value is 896. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example defines an arp cachesize of 500. console(config)#arp cachesize 500 arp dynamicrenew Use the arp dynamicrenew command in Global Configuration mode to enable the ARP component to automatically renew dynamic ARP entries when they age out.
PAGE 803
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 803 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM entry is reset to 0 without removing the entry from the hardware. Traffic to the host continues to be forwarded in hardware without interruption. If the entry is not being used to forward data packets, then the entry is deleted from the ARP cache, unless the dynamic renew option is enabled. If the dynamic renew option is enabled, the system sends an ARP request to renew the entry.
PAGE 804
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 804 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example removes the specified IP address from arp cache. console#arp purge 192.168.1.10 arp resptime Use the arp resptime command in Global Configuration mode to configure the ARP request response timeout. To return the response timeout to the default value, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 805
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 805 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM arp retries Use the arp retries command in Global Configuration mode to configure the ARP count of maximum requests for retries. To return to the default value, use the no form of this command. Syntax arp retries integer no arp retries • integer — The maximum number of requests for retries. (Range: 0-10) Default Configuration The default value is 4 retries.
PAGE 806
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 806 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The default value is 1200 seconds. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example defines 900 seconds as the timeout. console(config)#arp timeout 900 clear arp-cache Use the clear arp-cache command in Privileged EXEC mode to remove all ARP entries of type dynamic from the ARP cache.
PAGE 807
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 807 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console#clear arp-cache gateway clear arp-cache management Use the clear arp-cache management command to clear all entries that show as management arp entries in the show arp command. Syntax clear arp-cache management Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 808
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 808 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IP Address MAC Address Interface Type Age --------------- ----------------- -------------- -------- ----------10.27.20.241 001A.A0FF.F662 Management Dynamic n/a 10.27.20.243 0019.B9D1.29A3 Management Dynamic n/a console#clear arp-cache management ip local-proxy-arp Use the ip local proxy-arp command in Interface Configuration mode to enable proxying of ARP requests.
PAGE 809
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 809 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM next hops in its route to the destination are through interfaces other than the interface that received the ARP request. Use the no form of the command to disable proxy ARP on a router interface. Syntax ip proxy-arp no ip proxy-arp Default Configuration Enabled is the default configuration. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 810
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 810 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC and Privileged EXEC modes User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example shows show arp command output. console#show arp Age Time (seconds)............................. 1200 Response Time (seconds)........................ 1 Retries........................................ 4 Cache Size............................
PAGE 811
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 811 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 41 DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP). It also captures the behavior of BOOTP relay agents and DHCP participants can inter operate with BOOTP participants. The host RFC’s standardize the configuration parameters which can be supplied by the DHCP server to the client.
PAGE 812
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 812 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • Internet access cost is greatly reduced by using automatic assignment as Static IP addresses are considerably more expensive to purchase than are automatically allocated IP addresses. • Using DHCP a centralized management policy can be implemented as the DHCP server keeps information about all the subnets. This allows a system operator to update a single server when configuration changes take place.
PAGE 813
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 813 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ip dhcp pool [pool-name] no ip dhcp pool [pool-name] Parameter Description Parameter Description pool-name The name of an existing or new DHCP address pool. The pool name can be up to 31 characters in length and can contain the following characters: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, ’-’, ’_’, ’ ’. Enclose the entire pool name in quotes if an embedded blank is to appear in the pool name.
PAGE 814
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 814 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • Client DNS server – dns-server • NetBIOS WINS Server – netbios-name-server • NetBIOS Node Type – netbios-node-type • Client default router – default-router • Client address lease time – lease Administrators may also configure manual bindings for clients using the in DHCP Pool Configuration mode.
PAGE 815
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 815 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-dhcp-pool)#network 192.168.21.0 /24 console(config-dhcp-pool)#domain-name powerconnect.com console(config-dhcp-pool)#dns-server 192.168.22.3 192.168.23.3 console(config-dhcp-pool)#netbios-name-server 192.168.22.2 192.168.23.2 console(config-dhcp-pool)#netbios-node-type h-node console(config-dhcp-pool)#lease 2 12 console(config-dhcp-pool)#default-router 192.168.22.1 192.168.23.
PAGE 816
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 816 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console(config-dhcp-pool)#bootfile ntldr clear ip dhcp binding Use the clear ip dhcp binding command in Privileged EXEC mode to remove automatic DHCP server bindings. Syntax clear ip dhcp binding {ip-address | *} Parameter Description Parameter Description * Clear all automatic dhcp bindings. ip-address Clear a specific binding.
PAGE 817
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 817 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM clear ip dhcp conflict Use the clear ip dhcp conflict command in Privileged EXEC mode to remove DHCP server address conflicts. Use the show ip dhcp conflict command to display address conflicts detected by the DHCP server. Syntax clear ip dhcp conflict {ip-address | *} Parameter Description Parameter Description * Clear all dhcp conflicts. ip-address Clear a specific address conflict.
PAGE 818
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 818 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no client-identifier Parameter Description Parameter Description unique-identifier The identifier of the Microsoft DHCP client. The client identifier is specified as 7 bytes of the form XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX where X is a hexadecimal digit. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 819
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 819 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no client-name Parameter Description Parameter Description name The name of the DHCP client. The client name is specified as up to 31 printable characters. Default Configuration There is no default client name. Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration mode User Guidelines Use the show ip dhcp pool command to display pool configuration parameters.
PAGE 820
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 820 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no default-router Parameter Description Parameter Description ip-address1 The IPv4 address of the first default router for the DHCP client. ip-address2 The IPv4 address of the second default router for the DHCP client. Default Configuration No default router is configured. Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console(config-dhcp-pool)#default-router 192.168.22.
PAGE 821
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 821 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description ip-address1 Valid IPv4 address. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode IP DHCP Pool Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. domain-name (IP DHCP Pool Config) Use the domain-name command in IP DHCP Pool Configuration mode to set the DNS domain name which is provided to a DHCP client by the DHCP server.
PAGE 822
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 822 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM hardware-address Use the hardware-address command in DHCP Pool Configuration mode to specify the MAC address of a client to be manually assigned an address. Use the no form of the command to remove the MAC address assignment. Syntax hardware-address hardware-address no hardware-address Parameter Description Parameter Description hardware-address MAC address of the client. Either the XXXX.XXXX.
PAGE 823
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 823 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM host Use the host command in DHCP Pool Configuration mode to specify a manual binding for a DHCP client host. Use the no form of the command to remove the manual binding. Syntax host ip-address [netmask|prefix-length] no host Parameter Description Parameter Description ip-address IPv4 address to be manually assigned to the host identified by the client identifier.
PAGE 824
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 824 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip dhcp bootp automatic Use the ip dhcp bootp automatic command in Global Configuration mode to enable automatic BOOTP address assignment. By default, BOOTP clients are not automatically assigned addresses, although they may be assigned a static address. Use the no form of the command to disable automatic BOOTP client address assignment.
PAGE 825
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 825 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no ip dhcp conflict logging Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description. Default Configuration Conflict logging is enabled by default. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 826
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 826 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description High-address An IPv4 address indicating the ending range for exclusion from automatic DHCP address assignment. The high-address must be numerically greater than the low-address. Default Configuration By default, no IP addresses are excluded from the lists configured by the IP DHCP pool configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 827
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 827 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description count The number of ping packets sent to detect an address in use. The default is 2 packets. Range 0, 2-10. A value of 0 turns off address detection. Use the no form of the command to return the setting to the default value. Default Configuration The command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 828
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 828 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description days The number of days for the lease duration. Range 0-59. Default is 1. hours The number of hours for the lease duration. Range 0-23. There is no default. minutes The number of minutes for the lease duration. Range 0-59. There is no default. infinite The lease does not expire. Default Configuration The default is a 1 day lease.
PAGE 829
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 829 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description ip-address IPv4 address Default Configuration There is no default name server configured. Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration mode User Guidelines Use the show ip dhcp pool command to display pool configuration parameters. Up to eight name server addresses may be specified.
PAGE 830
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 830 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description type The NetBIOS node type can be b-node, h-node, m-node or pnode. Default Configuration There is no default NetBIOS node type configured. Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration mode User Guidelines Use the show ip dhcp pool command to display pool configuration parameters.
PAGE 831
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 831 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description network-number A valid IPv4 address mask A valid IPv4 network mask with contiguous left-aligned bits. prefix-length An integer indicating the number of leftmost bits in the network-number to use as a prefix for allocating cells. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 832
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 832 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines Use the show ip dhcp pool command to display pool configuration parameters. The IPv4 address is conveyed in the SIADDR field of the DHCP OFFER, DHCP ACK, DHCP INFORM ACK and DHCP BOOTREPLY messages. Example console(config-dhcp-pool)#next-server 192.168.21.2 option Use the option command in DHCP Pool Configuration mode to supply arbitrary configuration information to a DHCP client.
PAGE 833
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 833 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration mode User Guidelines The option information must match the selected option type and length. Options cannot be longer than 255 characters in length. The option information is conveyed in the TLV specified by the code parameter in the DHCP OFFER, DHCP ACK, DHCP INFORM ACK and DHCP BOOTREPLY messages.
PAGE 834
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 834 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Figure 41-1.
PAGE 835
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 835 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Figure 41-1.
PAGE 836
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 836 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(config-dhcp-pool)#option 4 ascii "ntpservice.com " console(config-dhcp-pool)#option 42 ip 192.168.21.1 console(config-dhcp-pool)#option 29 hex 01 console(config-dhcp-pool)#option 59 hex 00 00 10 01 console(config-dhcp-pool)#option 25 hex 01 ff service dhcp Use the service dhcp command in Global Configuration mode to enable local IPv4 DHCP server on the switch.
PAGE 837
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 837 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax sntp ip-address no sntp Parameter Description Parameter Description ip-address The IPv4 address of the NTP server to use for time services. Default Configuration There is no default IPv4 NTP server configured. Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration mode User Guidelines Use the show ip dhcp pool command to display pool configuration parameters.
PAGE 838
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 838 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description address A valid IPv4 address Default Configuration The command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. show ip dhcp conflict Use the show ip dhcp conflict command in User EXEC mode to display DHCP address conflicts for all relevant interfaces or a specified interface.
PAGE 839
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 839 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. show ip dhcp global configuration Use the show ip dhcp global configuration command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the DHCP global configuration. Syntax show ip dhcp server statistics Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 840
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 840 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description poolname Name of the pool. (Range: 1-32 characters) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. show ip dhcp server statistics Use the show ip dhcp server statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the DHCP server binding and message counters.
PAGE 841
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 841 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console#show ip dhcp server statistics Automatic Bindings............................. 100 Expired Bindings............................... 32 Malformed Bindings............................. 0 Messages ---------- Received ---------- DHCP DISCOVER.................................. 132 DHCP REQUEST................................... 132 DHCP DECLINE................................... 0 DHCP RELEASE..............................
PAGE 842
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 843
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 844
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 844 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.fm Examples The following examples clears DHCPv6 statistics for VLAN 11. console#clear ipv6 dhcp interface vlan 11 statistics\ dns-server (IPv6 DHCP Pool Config) Use the dns-server command in IPv6 DHCP Pool Configuration mode to set the IPv6 DNS server address which is provided to a DHCPv6 client by the DHCPv6 server.
PAGE 845
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 845 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.fm Syntax domain-name domain no domain-name domain • domain — DHCPv6 domain name. (Range: 1–255 characters) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode IPv6 DHCP Pool Configuration mode User Guidelines DHCPv6 pool can have multiple number of domain names with maximum of 8.
PAGE 846
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 846 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.fm • pool-name — DHCPv6 pool name. (Range: 1-31 characters) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example enters IPv6 DHCP Pool Configuration mode.
PAGE 847
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 847 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.fm Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel) mode User Guidelines If relay-address is an IPv6 global address, then relay-interface is not required. If relay-address is a link-local or multicast address, then relay-interface is required.
PAGE 848
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 848 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.fm • rapid-commit — Is an option that allows for an abbreviated exchange between the client and server. • pref-value — Preference value —used by clients to determine preference between multiple DHCPv6 servers. (Range: 0-4294967295) Default Configuration The default preference value is 20. Rapid commit is not enabled by default.
PAGE 849
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 849 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.fm Parameter Description Parameter Description prefix/prefix-length Delegated IPv6 prefix. client-DUID Client DUID (e.g. 00:01:00:09:f8:79:4e:00:04:76:73:43:76'). hostname Client hostname used for logging and tracing. (Range: 0-31 characters.) The command allows spaces in the host name when specified in double quotes.
PAGE 850
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 850 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.fm The following example defines a unique local address prefix with the MAC address 00:1D:BA:06:37:64 converted to EUI-64 format and a preferred lifetime of 5 days.
PAGE 851
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 851 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.fm show ipv6 dhcp Use the show ipv6 dhcp command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the DHCPv6 server name and status. Syntax show ipv6 dhcp Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 852
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 852 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.fm Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC and User EXEC modes User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the configured DHCP pool based on the entered IPv6 address.
PAGE 853
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 853 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.fm Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes User Guidelines Statistics are shown depending on the interface mode (relay, server, or client). Examples The following examples display DHCPv6 information for VLAN 11 when configured in relay mode. console> show ipv6 dhcp interface vlan 11 IPv6 Interface................................
PAGE 854
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 854 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.fm DHCPv6 Malformed Packets Received.............. 0 Received DHCPv6 Packets Discarded.............. 0 Total DHCPv6 Packets Received.................. 0 DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets Transmitted....... 0 DHCPv6 Reply Packets Transmitted............... 0 DHCPv6 Reconfig Packets Transmitted............
PAGE 855
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 855 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.fm User Guidelines This command shows the DHCP status. Information displayed depends on the mode. The command output provides the following information for an interface configured in client mode. Not all fields will be shown for an inactive client.
PAGE 856
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 856 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.fm Example The following example shows the output from this command when the device has leased an IPv6 address from the DHCPv6 server on interface 1/0/1. NOTE: Note that the interface is in client mode. console#show ipv6 dhcp interface vlan 2 IPv6 Interface................................. Vl2 Mode.......................................
PAGE 857
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 857 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.fm DHCPv6 Solicit Packets Received................ 0 DHCPv6 Request Packets Received................ 0 DHCPv6 Confirm Packets Received................ 0 DHCPv6 Renew Packets Received.................. 0 DHCPv6 Rebind Packets Received................. 0 DHCPv6 Release Packets Received................ 0 DHCPv6 Decline Packets Received.....
PAGE 858
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 858 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.fm Syntax show ipv6 dhcp pool poolname • poolname — Name of the pool. (Range: 1-32 characters) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the configured DHCP pool.
PAGE 859
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 859 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.fm Example The following example displays the DHCPv6 server name and status. console> show ipv6 dhcp statistics DHCPv6 Interface Global Statistics -----------------------------------DHCPv6 Solicit Packets Received................ 0 DHCPv6 Request Packets Received................ 0 DHCPv6 Confirm Packets Received................
PAGE 860
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 860 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM FILE LOCATION: C:\My Documents\ActiveProjects\2CSPC7000-SWUM400 Dell Zeiss CLI Guide\working\DHCPv6.
PAGE 861
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 861 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 43 DVMRP Commands Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) is a dense mode multicast protocol and is most appropriate for use in networks where bandwidth is relatively plentiful and there is at least one multicast group member in each subnet. DVMRP assumes that all hosts are part of a multicast group until it is informed of multicast group changes.
PAGE 862
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 862 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration Disabled is the default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets VLAN 15’s administrative mode of DVMRP to active.
PAGE 863
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 863 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures a metric of 5 for VLAN 15. console(config)#interface vlan 15 console(config-if-vlan15)#ip dvmrp metric 5 show ip dvmrp Use the show ip dvmrp command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the system-wide information for DVMRP. Syntax show ip dvmrp Default Configuration This command has no default condition.
PAGE 864
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 864 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM DVMRP INTERFACE STATUS Interface Interface Mode Protocol State --------- -------------- -------------- show ip dvmrp interface Use the show ip dvmrp interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the interface information for DVMRP on the specified interface. Syntax show ip dvmrp interface vlan vlan-id • vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID. Default Configuration This command has no default condition.
PAGE 865
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 865 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default condition. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the neighbor information for DVMRP. console(config)#show ip dvmrp neighbor No neighbors available.
PAGE 866
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 866 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays the next hop information on outgoing interfaces for routing multicast datagrams. console(config)#show ip dvmrp nexthop Next Hop Source IP Source Mask Interface Type -------------- -------------- --------- ------ show ip dvmrp prune Use the show ip dvmrp prune command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the table that lists the router’s upstream prune information.
PAGE 867
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 867 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip dvmrp route Use the show ip dvmrp route command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the multicast routing information for DVMRP. Syntax show ip dvmrp route Default Configuration This command has no default condition. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the multicast routing information for DVMRP.
PAGE 868
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 869
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 869 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 44 GMRP Commands The GARP Multicast Registration Protocol provides a mechanism that allows networking devices to dynamically register (and de-register) Group membership information with the MAC networking devices attached to the same segment, and for that information to be disseminated across all networking devices in the bridged LAN that support Extended Filtering Services.
PAGE 870
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 870 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM The registration and de-registration of membership results in the multicast table being updated with a new entry or the existing entry modified. This ensures that the networking device receives multicast frames from all ports but forwards them through only those ports for which GMRP has created Group registration entry (for that multicast address).
PAGE 871
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 871 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example In this example, GMRP is globally enabled. console(config)#gmrp enable show gmrp configuration Use the show gmrp configuration command in Global Configuration mode and Interface Configuration mode to display GMRP configuration. Syntax show gmrp configuration Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description. Default Configuration GMRP is disabled by default.
PAGE 872
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 873
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 873 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IGMP Commands 45 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is the multicast group membership discovery protocol used for IPv4 multicast groups. Three versions of IGMP exist. Versions one and two are widely deployed. Since IGMP is used between end systems (often desktops) and the multicast router, the version of IGMP required depends on the end-user operating system being supported.
PAGE 874
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 874 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IGMPv2 introduced a Leave Group message, which is sent by a host when it leaves a multicast group for which it was the last host to send an IGMP Report message. Receipt of this message causes the Querier possibly to reduce the remaining lifetime of its state for the group, and to send a groupspecific IGMP Query message to the multicast group.
PAGE 875
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 875 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip igmp Use the ip igmp command in Global Configuration mode to set the administrative mode of IGMP in the system to active. IGMP only operates over VLAN interfaces. Syntax ip igmp no ip igmp Default Configuration Disabled is the default state. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example globally enables IGMP.
PAGE 876
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 876 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The default last member query count is 2. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets 10 as the number of VLAN 2 Group-Specific Queries.
PAGE 877
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 877 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures 2 seconds as the Maximum Response Time inserted in VLAN 15’s Group-Specific Queries.
PAGE 878
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 878 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example configures a 10-second query interval for VLAN 15. console(config)#interface vlan 15 console(config-if-vlan15)#ip igmp query-interval 10 ip igmp query-max-response-time Use the ip igmp query-max-response-time command in Internet Configuration mode to configure the maximum response time interval for the specified interface.
PAGE 879
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 879 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip igmp robustness Use the ip igmp robustness command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the robustness that allows tuning of the interface, that is, tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If a subnet is expected to have significant loss, the robustness variable may be increased for the interface. Syntax ip igmp robustness robustness no ip igmp robustness • robustness — Robustness variable.
PAGE 880
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 880 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no ip igmp startup-query-count • count — The number of startup queries. (Range: 1-20) Default Configuration The default count value is 2. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets for VLAN 15 the number of queries sent out on startup at 10.
PAGE 881
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 881 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets at 10 seconds the interval between general queries sent at startup for VLAN 15.
PAGE 882
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 882 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-if-vlan15)#ip igmp version 2 show ip igmp Use the show ip igmp command in Privileged EXEC mode to display systemwide IGMP information. Syntax show ip igmp Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays system-wide IGMP information. console#show ip igmp IGMP Admin Mode.....
PAGE 883
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 883 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip igmp groups Use the show ip igmp groups command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC modes to display the registered multicast groups on the interface. If detail is specified, this command displays the registered multicast groups on the interface in detail.
PAGE 884
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 884 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip igmp interface Use the show ip igmp interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the IGMP information for the specified interface. Syntax show ip igmp interface [interface-type interface-number] Syntax Description Parameter Description interface-type interface-number Interface type of VLAN and a valid VLAN ID. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 885
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 885 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Startup Query Interval (secs) ................. 31 Startup Query Count............................ 2 Last Member Query Interval (1/10 of a second).. 10 Last Member Query Count........................ 2 show ip igmp membership Use the show ip igmp membership command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the list of interfaces that have registered in the multicast group.
PAGE 886
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 886 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip igmp interface stats Use the show ip igmp interface stats command in User EXEC mode to display the IGMP statistical information for the interface. The statistics are only displayed when the interface is enabled for IGMP. Syntax show ip igmp interface stats vlan vlan-id • vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 887
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 887 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip igmp router-alert-optional Use the ip igmp router-alert-optional command to set IGMP to not require the Router-Alert field. Syntax ip igmp router-alert-optional no ip igmp router-alert-optional Default Value The Router-Alert field is not required by default.
PAGE 888
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 889
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 889 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IGMP Proxy Commands 46 IGMP Proxy is used by the router on IPv4 systems to enable the system to issue IGMP host messages on behalf of hosts that the system discovered through standard IGMP router interfaces, thus acting as proxy to all its hosts residing on its router interfaces. PowerConnect supports IGMP Version 3, Version 2 and Version 1.
PAGE 890
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 890 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration Disabled is the default configuration. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example enables the IGMP Proxy on the VLAN 15 router.
PAGE 891
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 891 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example resets the host interface status parameters of the IGMP Proxy router. console(config)#interface vlan 15 console(config-if-vlan15)#ip igmp-proxy reset-status ip igmp-proxy unsolicited-report-interval Use the ip igmp-proxy unsolicited-report-interval command in Interface Configuration mode to set the unsolicited report interval for the IGMP Proxy router.
PAGE 892
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 892 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip igmp-proxy Use the show ip igmp-proxy command in Privileged EXEC mode to display a summary of the host interface status parameters. It displays status parameters only when IGMP Proxy is enabled. Syntax show ip igmp-proxy Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 893
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 893 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Proxy Start Frequency........................ 1 show ip igmp-proxy interface Use the show ip igmp-proxy interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to display a detailed list of the host interface status parameters. It displays status parameters only when IGMP Proxy is enabled. Syntax show ip igmp-proxy interface Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 894
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 894 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip igmp-proxy groups Use the show ip igmp-proxy groups command in Privileged EXEC mode to display a table of information about multicast groups that IGMP Proxy reported. It displays status parameters only when IGMP Proxy is enabled. Syntax show ip igmp-proxy groups Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 895
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 895 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays complete information about multicast groups that IGMP Proxy has reported. console#show ip igmp-proxy groups detail Interface Index................................
PAGE 896
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 897
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 897 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 47 IP Helper/DHCP Relay Commands The IP Helper feature provides the ability for a router to forward configured UDP broadcast packets to a particular IP address. This allows applications to reach servers on non-local subnets. This is possible even when the application is designed to assume a server is always on a local subnet or when the application uses broadcast packets to reach the server (with the limited broadcast address 255.
PAGE 898
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 898 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Protocol UDP Port Number DNS 53 NetBIOS Name Server 137 NetBIOS Datagram Server 138 TACACS Server 49 Time Service 37 DHCP 67 Trivial File Transfer Protocol 69 Certain preexisting configurable DHCP relay options do not apply to relay of other protocols. These options are unchanged. The user may optionally set a DHCP maximum hop count or minimum wait time. The relay agent relays DHCP packets in both directions.
PAGE 899
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 899 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • The protocol field in the IP header must be UDP (17). • The destination UDP port must match a configured relay entry. DHCP relay cannot be enabled and disabled globally. IP helper can be enabled or disabled globally. Enabling IP helper enables DHCP relay.
PAGE 900
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 900 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Enable DHCP Relay using the ip helper enable command. Example The following example defines a maximum hopcount of 6. console(config)#bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount 6 bootpdhcprelay minwaittime Use the bootpdhcprelay minwaittime command in Global Configuration mode to configure the minimum wait time in seconds for BootP/DHCP Relay on the system.
PAGE 901
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 901 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example defines a minimum wait time of 10 seconds. console(config)#bootpdhcprelay minwaittime 10 clear ip helper statistics Use the clear ip helper statistics command to reset to 0 the statistics displayed in show ip helper statistics. Syntax clear ip helper statistics Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command.
PAGE 902
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 902 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Default Configuration This is enabled by default for a DHCP relay agent. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Enable DHCP Relay using the ip helper enable command. Interface configuration takes precedence over global configuration. However if there is no interface configuration then global configuration is followed. This check is enabled by default.
PAGE 903
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 903 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description none (Optional) Disables the command function. Default Configuration This check is enabled by default. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode User Guidelines Enable DHCP Relay using the ip helper enable command. Use the global configuration command ip dhcp relay information option command to enable processing of DHCP circuit ID and remote agent ID options.
PAGE 904
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 904 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration Disabled is the default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Enable DHCP Relay using the ip helper enable command. Example The following example enables the circuit ID and remote agent ID options.
PAGE 905
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 905 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode User Guidelines Enable DHCP Relay using the ip helper enable command. The interface configuration always takes precedence over global configuration. However, if there is no interface configuration, then global configuration is followed. Example The following example enables the circuit ID and remote agent ID options on vlan 10.
PAGE 906
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 906 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM (port 53), isakmp (port 500), mobile-ip (port 434), nameserver (port 42), netbios-dgm (port 138), netbios-ns (port 137), ntp (port 123), pim-autorp (port 496), rip (port 520), tacacs (port 49), tftp (port 69), and time (port 37). Other ports must be specified by number. Default Configuration No helper addresses are configured. Command Mode Global Configuration mode.
PAGE 907
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 907 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip helper-address (interface configuration) Use the ip helper-address (interface configuration) command to configure the relay of certain UDP broadcast packets received on a specific interface. To delete a relay entry on an interface, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 908
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 908 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command can be invoked multiple times on routing interface, either to specify multiple server addresses for a given port number or to specify multiple port numbers handled by a specific server. The command no ip helper-address with no arguments clears all helper addresses on the interface. Example To relay DHCP packets received on vlan 5 to two DHCP servers, 192.168.10.1 and 192.168.20.
PAGE 909
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 909 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM and DNS packets received on vlan 5 to 192.168.40.2, relays SNMP traps (port 162) received on interface vlan 6 to 192.168.23.1, and drops DHCP packets received on vlan 6: console#config console(config)#ip helper-address 192.168.40.1 dhcp console(config)#interface vlan 5 console(config-if-vlan5)#ip helper-address 192.168.40.2 dhcp console(config-if-vlan5)#ip helper-address 192.168.40.
PAGE 910
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 910 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command can be used to temporarily disable IP helper without deleting all IP helper addresses. This command replaces the bootpdhcprelay enable command, but affects not only relay of DHCP packets, but also relay of any other protocols for which an IP helper address has been configured.
PAGE 911
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 911 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM UDP Port The relay configuration is applied to packets whose destination UDP port is this port. Entries whose UDP port is identified as “any” are applied to packets with the destination UDP ports listed in Table 47-1. Discard If “Yes”, packets arriving on the given interface with the given destination UDP port are discarded rather than relayed.
PAGE 912
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 912 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC and Privileged EXEC modes User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example defines the Boot/DHCP Relay information. console#show ip dhcp relay Maximum Hop Count.............................. 4 Minimum Wait Time(Seconds)..................... 0 Circuit Id Option Mode.......................
PAGE 913
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 913 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines Field Description DHCP client messages received The number of valid messages received from a DHCP client. The count is only incremented if IP helper is enabled globally, the ingress routing interface is up, and the packet passes a number of validity checks, such as having a TTL > 1 and having valid source and destination IP addresses.
PAGE 914
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 914 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Packets with expired TTL The number of packets received with TTL of 0 or 1 that might otherwise have been relayed. Packets that The number of packets ignored by the relay agent because they matched a discard match a discard relay entry. entry Example console#show ip helper statistics DHCP client messages received.................. 8 DHCP client messages relayed................... 2 DHCP server messages received..................
PAGE 915
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 915 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 48 IP Routing Commands The Routing Module provides the base Layer 3 support for Local Area Network (LAN) and Wide Area Network (WAN) environments. The PowerConnect switches allows the network operator to build a complete Layer 3+ configuration with advanced functionality. As the PowerConnect defaults to Layer 2 switching functionality, routing must be explicitly enabled on the PowerConnect to perform Layer 3 forwarding.
PAGE 916
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 916 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM The addition of a preference option has a side benefit. The preference option allows the operator to control the preference of individual static routes relative to routes learned from other sources (such as OSPF). When routes from different sources have the same preference, PowerConnect routing prefers a static route over a dynamic route.
PAGE 917
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 917 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM encapsulation Use the encapsulation command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the Link Layer encapsulation type for the packet. Routed frames are always ethernet-encapsulated when a frame is routed to a VLAN. Syntax encapsulation {ethernet | snap} • ethernet — Specifies Ethernet encapsulation. • snap — Specifies SNAP encapsulation. Default Configuration Ethernet encapsulation is the default configuration.
PAGE 918
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 918 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ip address ip-address {subnet-mask | prefix-length} [ secondary ] no ip address ip-address {subnet-mask | prefix-length} [ secondary ] • ip-address — IP address of the interface. • subnet-mask — Subnet mask of the interface • prefix-length — Length of the prefix. Must be preceded by a forward slash (/). (Range: 1-30 bits) • secondary — Indicates the IP address is a secondary address.
PAGE 919
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 919 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip mtu Use the ip mtu command in Interface Configuration mode to set the IP Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) on a routing interface. The IP MTU is the size of the largest IP packet that can be transmitted on the interface without fragmentation. Packets forwarded in hardware ignore the IP MTU. Packets forwarded in software are dropped if they exceed the IP MTU of the outgoing interface.
PAGE 920
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 920 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example defines 1480 as the MTU for VLAN 15. console(config)#interface vlan 15 console(config-if-vlan15)#ip mtu 1480 ip netdirbcast Use the ip netdirbcast command in Interface Configuration mode to enable the forwarding of network-directed broadcasts. When enabled, network directed broadcasts are forwarded. When disabled they are dropped. Use the no form of the command to disable the broadcasts.
PAGE 921
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 921 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip route Use the ip route command in Global Configuration mode to configure a static route. Use the no form of the command to delete the static route. The IP route command sets a value for the route preference. Among routes to the same destination, the route with the lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database.
PAGE 922
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 922 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example identifies the ip-address subnet-mask, next-hop-ip and a preference value of 200. console(config)#ip route 192.168.10.10 255.255.255.0 192.168.20.1 metric 200 ip route default Use the ip route default command in Global Configuration mode to configure the next hop address of the default route. Use the no form of the command to delete the default route.
PAGE 923
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 923 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Using this command, the administrator may manually configure a single, global default gateway. The switch installs a default route for a configured default gateway with a preference of 253, making it more preferred than the default gateways learned via DHCP, but less preferred than a static default route. The preference of these routes is not configurable.
PAGE 924
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 924 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Lower route distance values are preferred when determining the best route. Example The following example sets the default route metric to 80. console(config)#ip route distance 80 ip routing To globally enable IPv4 routing on the router, use the "ip routing" command in Global Configuration mode. To disable IPv4 routing globally, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 925
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 925 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM routing Use the routing command in Interface Configuration mode to enable IPv4 and IPv6 routing for an interface. View the current value for this function with the show ip brief command. The value is labeled Routing Mode in the output display. Use the no form of the command to disable routing for an interface. Syntax routing no routing Default Configuration Disabled is the default configuration.
PAGE 926
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 926 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays IP summary information. console#show ip brief Default Time to Live....................... 30 Routing Mode............................... Disabled IP Forwarding Mode......................... Enabled Maximum Next Hops..........................
PAGE 927
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 927 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes User Guidelines The Method field contains one of the following values. Field Description DHCP The address is leased from a DHCP server. Manual The address is manually configured. ds The following examples display all IP information and information specific to VLAN 2. console#show ip interface Default Gateway...........
PAGE 928
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 928 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM The Method field is also added to the long form. console#show ip interface vlan2 Routing Interface Status......... Up Primary IP Address.........192.168.75.1/255.255.255.0 Method........................... DHCP Routing Mode..................... Enable Administrative Mode.............. Enable Forward Net Directed Broadcasts.... Disable Proxy ARP.......................... Enable Local Proxy ARP.................... Disable Active State..
PAGE 929
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 929 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Burned In MAC Address............... 001E.C9AA.AD1C show ip protocols Use the show ip protocols command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode to display the parameters and current state of the active routing protocols. Syntax show ip protocols Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 930
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 930 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM -------- --------- ----------- ---------176.1.1.1 1 1 flowers 176.2.1.1 passive 2 Routing Information Sources: Gateway Last Update 176.1.1.2 0:00:17 Preference: 60 Routing Protocol is "ospf" Redistributing: OSPF, External direct, Static, RIP Interfaces: Interface Metric Key-chain -------- --------- ----------- ---------176.1.1.1 10 flowers 176.2.1.1 1 Routing Information Sources: Gateway State 176.1.1.
PAGE 931
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 931 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax Description Parameter Description ip-address Specifies the network for which the route is to be displayed and displays the best matching best-route for the address. mask Subnet mask of the IP address. prefix-length Length of prefix, in bits. Must be preceded with a forward slash (/). (Range: 0-32 bits.
PAGE 932
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 932 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default gateway is 10.1.20.1 S 0.0.0.0/0 [254/0] via 10.1.20.1 C 10.1.20.0/24 [0/1] directly connected, vlan2 C 20.1.20.0/24 [0/1] directly connected, vlan4 show ip route preferences Use the show ip route preferences command in Privileged EXEC mode displays detailed information about the route preferences. Route preferences are used in determining the best route.
PAGE 933
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 933 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Local.......................................... 0 Static......................................... 1 OSPF Intra..................................... 110 OSPF Inter..................................... 110 OSPF External.................................. 110 RIP............................................ 120 Configured Default Gateway..................... 253 DHCP Default Gateway...........................
PAGE 934
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 934 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays the IP route summary. console#show ip route summary Connected Routes............................... 0 Static Routes.................................. 0 RIP Routes..................................... 0 OSPF Routes.................................... 0 Intra Area Routes.............................. 0 Inter Area Routes.............................. 0 External Type-1 Routes.........................
PAGE 935
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 935 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays IP route preferences. console>show ip traffic IpInReceives................................... 24002 IpInHdrErrors.................................. 1 IpInAddrErrors................................. 925 IpForwDatagrams................................ 0 IpInUnknownProtos.............................. 0 IpInDiscards................................
PAGE 936
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 936 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IcmpInTimeExcds................................ 0 IcmpInParmProbs................................ 0 IcmpInSrcQuenchs............................... 0 IcmpInRedirects................................ 0 IcmpInEchos.................................... 3 IcmpInEchoReps................................. 0 IcmpInTimestamps............................... 0 IcmpInTimestampReps............................ 0 IcmpInAddrMasks........................
PAGE 937
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 937 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show ip vlan Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays VLAN routing information. console#show ip vlan MAC Address used by Routing VLANs: 00:00:00:01:00:02 VLAN ID IP Address Subnet Mask ------- --------------- --------------10 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 20 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.
PAGE 938
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 939
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 940
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 940 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(if-vlan-10)#ipv6 pim ipv6 pim sparse (Global config) Use the ipv6 pim sparse command to administratively configure PIM sparse mode for multicast routing. Use the no form of this command to disable PIM sparse mode. Syntax ipv6 pim sparse no ipv6 pim sparse Default Configuration IPv6 PIM is disabled by default.
PAGE 941
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 941 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration PIM is disabled by default. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Only one of sparse or dense mode can be configured on a router. Example console(config)#ipv6 pim dense ipv6 pim bsr-border Use the ipv6 pim bsr-border command to administratively disable bootstrap router (BSR) messages from being sent or received through an interface.
PAGE 942
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 942 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ipv6 pim bsr-candidate Use the ipv6 pim bsr-candidate command to configure the router to advertise itself as a bootstrap router (BSR). Use the no form of this command to return to the default configuration. Syntax ipv6 pim bsr-candidate vlan {vlan-id hash-mask-len bsr-priority } no ipv6 pim bsr-candidate vlan {vlan-id} Parameter Description Parameter Description vlan-id A valid VLAN identifier with multicast routing enabled.
PAGE 943
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 943 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ipv6 pim dr-priority Use the ipv6 pim dr-priority command to administratively configure the advertised designated router (DR) priority. Use the no form of this command to return the configuration to the default. Syntax ipv6 pim dr-priority priority no ipv6 pim dr-priority Parameter Description Parameter Description priority The administratively configured priority. Range: 0–2147483647.
PAGE 944
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 944 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no ipv6 pim hello-interval Parameter Description Parameter Description interval The number of seconds between successive hello transmissions. Range 0-18000. Default 30. Default Configuration The default hello interval is 30 seconds. Command Mode Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 945
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 945 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The join/prune interval defaults to 60 seconds. Command Mode Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode User Guidelines This command only has an effect if sparse mode is enabled. Example console(if-vlan-10)#ipv6 pim join-prune-interval 30 ipv6 pim register-rate-limit Use the ipv6 pim register-rate-limit command to set a limit on the maximum number of PIM register messages sent per second for each (S,G) entry.
PAGE 946
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 946 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config)#ipv6 pim register-rate-limit 10 ipv6 pim rp-address Use the ipv6 pim rp-address command to define the address of a PIM Rendezvous Point (RP) for a specific multicast group range. Use the no form of this command to remove a configured RP.
PAGE 947
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 947 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(config)#ipv6 pim rp-address 2001:db8:85a3:0:0:8a2e:370:7334 ffe8::0 /16 override ipv6 pim rp-candidate Use the ipv6 pim rp-candidate command to configure the router to advertise itself to the bootstrap router (BSR) as a PIM candidate Rendezvous Point (RP) for a specific multicast group range. Use the no form of this command to return to the default configuration.
PAGE 948
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 948 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ipv6 pim spt-threshold Use the ipv6 pim spt-threshold command to set the multicast traffic threshold rate for the last-hop router to switch to the shortest path on the router. Use the no form of this command to return the threshold to its default value (0).
PAGE 949
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 949 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ipv6 pim ssm { default | group-address group-mask} no ipv6 pim ssm { default | group-address group-mask} Parameter Description Parameter Description default Defines the SSM range access list to 232/8. group-address An IPv6 multicast group address. group-mask An IPv6 mask in /prefix form. Default Configuration There are no group addresses configured by default.
PAGE 950
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 950 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console#show ipv6 pimsm Admin Mode................................... Enabled Data Threshold Rate (Kbps)................... 1000 Register Threshold Rate (Kbps)...............
PAGE 951
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 951 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show ipv6 pimsm bsr Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Field descriptions are shown in the following table.
PAGE 952
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 952 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM If no configured/elected BSR’s exist on the router, the following message is displayed: No BSR’s exist/learned on this router. show ipv6 pim interface Use the show ipv6 pim interface command to display the PIM interface status parameters. If the interface number is not specified, this command displays the status parameters of all the PIM-enabled interfaces.
PAGE 953
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 954
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 954 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM None of the routing interfaces are enabled for PIM show ipv6 pim neighbor Use the show ipv6 pim neighbor command to display IPv6 PIM neighbors discovered by PIMv2 Hello messages. If the interface number is not specified, this command displays the neighbors discovered on all the PIM-enabled interfaces.
PAGE 955
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 956
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 956 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Field descriptions are shown in the following table.
PAGE 957
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 957 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description rp-address IP address of the RP Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Field descriptions are shown in the following table.
PAGE 958
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 958 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM RP Address 2001:0db8:0:abcd::1 Group Address ff1e:abcd:def1::0 Group Mask /24 Origin Static RP Address 2001:0db8:0:badc::1 Group Address ff1e:abcd:fed1::0 Group Mask /24 Origin Static If no RP Group mapping exist on the router, the following message is displayed: No RP-Group mappings exist on this router.
PAGE 959
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 959 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IPv6 Routing Commands 50 The IPv6 version of the routing table manager provides a repository for IPv6 routes learned by dynamic routing protocols or static configuration. RTO6 manages dynamic and static IPv6 routes, redistributes routes to registered protocols, supports ECMP routes, and supports multiple routes to the same destination, sorted by preference. IPv6 routing only operates over VLAN interfaces.
PAGE 960
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 961
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 961 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM clear ipv6 neighbors Use the clear ipv6 neighbors command in Privileged EXEC mode to clear all entries in the IPv6 neighbor table or an entry on a specific interface. Syntax clear ipv6 neighbors [vlan vlan-id ] • vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 962
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 962 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example clears IPv6 statistics for VLAN 11.
PAGE 963
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 963 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • prefix — Consists of the bits of the address to be configured. • prefix-length — Designates how many of the high-order contiguous bits of the address make up the prefix. • eui64 — The optional eui-64 field designates that IPv6 processing on the interfaces is enabled using an EUI-64 interface ID in the low order 64 bits of the address. If this option is used, the value of prefix_length must be 64 bits.
PAGE 964
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 964 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration Disabled is the default configuration. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example enables IPv6 routing, which has not been configured with an explicit IPv6 address.
PAGE 965
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 965 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration ipv6 host The ipv6 host command is used to define static host name-to- ipv6 address mapping in the host cache. Syntax ipv6 host name ipv6-address no ipv6 host name • name — Host name. • ipv6-address — IPv6 address of the host. Default Configuration No IPv6 hosts are defined. Command Mode Global Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 966
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 966 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no ipv6 mld last-member-query-count • last-member-query-count — Query count (Range: 1–20). Default Configuration The default last member query count is 2. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 967
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 967 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 mld last-member-queryinterval 5000 ipv6 mld-proxy Use the ipv6 mld-proxy command to enable MLD Proxy on the router. To enable MLD Proxy on the router, you must also enable multicast forwarding. Also, ensure that there are no other multicast routing protocols enabled on the router.
PAGE 968
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 968 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ipv6 mld-proxy reset-status Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode. Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 969
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 969 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines Example console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 mld-proxy unsolicitrprt-interval 10 ipv6 mld query-interval The ipv6 mld query-interval command sets the MLD router's query interval for the interface. The query-interval is the amount of time between the general queries sent when the router is querying on that interface.
PAGE 970
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 970 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ipv6 mld query-max-response-time The ipv6 mld query-max-response-time command sets MLD query maximum response time for the interface. This value is used in assigning the maximum response time in the query messages that are sent on that interface. Use the “no” form of this command to set the maximum query response time to the default.
PAGE 971
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 971 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no ipv6 mld router Default Configuration MLD is disabled by default. Command Mode Global Configuration mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 mld router ipv6 mtu Use the ipv6 mtu command in Interface Configuration mode to set the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size, in bytes, of IPv6 packets on an interface.
PAGE 972
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 972 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size, in bytes, of IPv6 packets.
PAGE 973
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 973 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets at 10 the number of duplicate address detection probes transmitted while doing neighbor discovery.
PAGE 974
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 974 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 nd managed-config-flag ipv6 nd ns-interval Use the ipv6 nd ns-interval command in Interface Configuration mode to set the interval between router advertisements for advertised neighbor solicitations. An advertised value of 0 means the interval is unspecified. Syntax ipv6 nd ns-interval milliseconds no ipv6 nd ns-interval • milliseconds — Interval duration.
PAGE 975
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 975 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ipv6 nd other-config-flag no ipv6 nd other-config-flag Default Configuration False is the default configuration. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 976
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 976 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description valid-lifetime Valid lifetime of the router in seconds. (Range: 0–4294967295 seconds.) infinite Indicates lifetime value is infinite. preferred-lifetime Preferred-lifetime of the router in seconds. (Range: 0–4294967295 seconds.) no-autoconfig Do not use Prefix for autoconfiguration. off-link Do not use Prefix for onlink determination.
PAGE 977
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 977 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config)#interface vlan 11 console(config-if-vlan11)#ipv6 nd prefix 2020:1::1/64 ipv6 nd ra-interval Use the ipv6 nd ra-interval command in Interface Configuration mode to set the transmission interval between router advertisements. Syntax ipv6 nd ra-interval maximum minimum no ipv6 nd ra-interval • maximum — The maximum interval duration (Range: 4–1800 seconds). • minimum — The minimum interval duration (Range: 3 – (0.
PAGE 978
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 978 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ipv6 nd ra-lifetime Use the ipv6 nd ra-lifetime command in Interface Configuration mode to set the value that is placed in the Router Lifetime field of the router advertisements sent from the interface. Syntax ipv6 nd ra-lifetime seconds no ipv6 nd ra-lifetime • seconds — Lifetime duration. The value must be zero, or it must be an integer between the value of the router advertisement transmission interval and 9000 seconds.
PAGE 979
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 979 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ipv6 nd reachable-time milliseconds no ipv6 nd reachable-time • milliseconds — Reachable-time duration. A value of zero means the time is unspecified by the router. (Range: 0-3600000 milliseconds) Default Configuration The default value for neighbor discovery reachable times is 0 milliseconds. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 980
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 980 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example suppresses router advertisement transmission. console(config)#interface vlan 15 console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 nd suppress-ra ipv6 route Use the ipv6 route command in Global Configuration mode to configure an IPv6 static route.
PAGE 981
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 981 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description prefix-length The length of the IPv6 prefix — a decimal value (usually 0-64) that shows how many of the high-order contiguous bits of the address comprise the prefix (the network portion of the address). A slash mark must separate the prefix from the prefixlength with no spaces on either side of the slash mark.
PAGE 982
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 982 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM the distance of existing static routes, even if they were assigned the original default distance. The new default distance is applied to static routes created after invoking the ipv6 route distance command. Syntax ipv6 route distance integer no ipv6 route distance integer • integer — Specifies the distance (preference) of an individual static route. (Range 1-255) Default Configuration Default value of integer is 1.
PAGE 983
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 983 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example globally enables Ipv6 unicast datagram forwarding. console(config)#ipv6 unicast-routing console(config)#no ipv6 unicast-routing ping ipv6 Use ping ipv6 command in Privileged EXEC mode to determine whether another computer is on the network.
PAGE 984
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 984 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example determines whether another computer is on the network at the IPv6 address specified. console#ping ipv6 2030:1::1/64 Send count=3, Receive count=0 from 2030:1::1/64 Average round trip time = 0.
PAGE 985
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 985 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example determines whether another computer is on the network at the IPv6 address specified. console(config)#ping ipv6 interface loopback 1 FE80::202:BCFF:FE00:3068/128 Send count=3, Receive count=0 from FE80::202:BCFF:FE00:3068/128 Average round trip time = 0.
PAGE 986
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 986 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays the IPv6 status of forwarding mode and IPv6 unicast routing mode. console#show ipv6 brief IPv6 Forwarding Mode........................ Enable IPv6 Unicast Routing Mode................... Disable IPv6 Hop Limit...............................1 show ipv6 interface Use the show ipv6 interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to show the usability status of IPv6 interfaces.
PAGE 987
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 987 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines The Method field contains one of the following values. Field Description Auto The IPv6 address is automatically generated using IPv6 auto address configuration (RFC 2462). Config The IPv6 address is manually configured. DHCP The IPv6 address is leased from a DHCP server.
PAGE 988
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 988 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM The following example displays the long form of the command, and indicates whether address autoconfiguration or DHCP client are enabled on the interface. When the interface acts as a host interface, the output also shows the default gateway on the interface, if one exists. console#show ipv6 interface vlan2 IPv6 is enabled IPv6 Prefix is ................................
PAGE 989
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 989 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show ipv6 interface management statistics Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console#show ipv6 interface management statistics DHCPv6 Client Statistics ------------------------DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets Received..........
PAGE 990
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 990 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM DHCPv6 Release Packets Transmitted............. 0 Total DHCPv6 Packets Transmitted............... 0 show ipv6 mld groups The show ipv6 mld groups command is used to display information about multicast groups that MLD reported. The information is displayed only when MLD is enabled on at least one interface. If MLD was not enabled on any interfaces, there is no group information to be displayed.
PAGE 991
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 991 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Expiry Time Time left in seconds before the entry is removed from the MLD membership table. If vlan vlan-id is not specified, the following fields are displayed for each multicast group and each interface: Field Description Group Address The address of the multicast group. Interface Interface through which the multicast group is reachable. Uptime Time elapsed in seconds since the multicast group has been known.
PAGE 992
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 992 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Interface..................................... vlan 6 Group Address................................ FF1E::5 Last Reporter................... FE80::200:FF:FE00:22 Up Time (hh:mm:ss).......................... 00:03:43 Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)......................... ----Filter Mode..........................................Include Version1 Host Timer............................ ----Group compat mode..............................
PAGE 993
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 993 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Group Address................................ FF1E::3 Interface..................................... vlan 6 Up Time (hh:mm:ss).......................... 00:04:23 Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)........................ ------ Group Address................................ FF1E::4 Interface..................................... vlan 6 Up Time (hh:mm:ss).......................... 00:04:23 Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)........................
PAGE 994
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 994 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM MLD Global Admin Mode This field displays the configured global administrative status of MLD. MLD Interface Admin Mode This field displays the configured interface administrative status of MLD. MLD Operational The operational status of MLD on the interface. Mode MLD Version This field indicates the version of MLD configured on the interface. Query Interval This field indicates the configured query interval for the interface.
PAGE 995
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 995 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Querier Expiry Time Time left in seconds before the Querier losses its title as querier. Wrong Version Queries Indicates the number of queries received whose MLD version does not match the MLD version of the interface. Number of Joins The number of times a group membership has been added on this interface. Number of Leaves The number of times a group membership has been removed on this interface.
PAGE 996
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 996 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show ipv6 mld-proxy Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. User Guidelines The command displays the following parameters only when you enable MLD Proxy: Field Description Interface Index The interface number of the MLD Proxy interface. Admin Mode Indicates whether MLD Proxy is enabled or disabled. This is a configured value.
PAGE 997
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 997 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Interface Index.............................. vlan 10 Admin Mode................................... Enabled Operational Mode............................. Enabled Version...................................... 3 Num of Multicast Groups...................... 0 Unsolicited Report Interval.............. 1 Querier IP Address on Proxy Interface..... fe80::1:2:5 Older Version 1 Querier Timeout.......... 00:00:00 Proxy Start Frequency..........
PAGE 998
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 998 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Last Reporter The IP address of the host that last sent a membership report for the current group on the network attached to the MLD-Proxy interface (upstream interface). Up Time (in secs) The time elapsed in seconds since last created. Member State Possible values are: • Idle_Member—The interface has responded to the latest group membership query for this group.
PAGE 999
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 999 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC User Guidelines The following parameters are displayed by this command: Field Description Interface The interface number of the MLD-Proxy. Group Address The IP address of the multicast group. Last Reporter The IP address of the host that last sent a membership report for the current group on the network attached to the MLD Proxy interface (upstream interface).
PAGE 1000
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1000 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Group Source List Expiry Time ------------------ --------------- 2001::1 00:02:40 2001::2 -------- FF1E::2 FE80::100:2.3 Group Source List 243 DELAY_MEMBER Include 1 Expiry Time ------------------ --------------- 3001::1 00:03:32 3002::2 00:03:32 FF1E::3 FE80::100:2.3 328 DELAY_MEMBER Exclude 0 FF1E::4 FE80::100:2.
PAGE 1001
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1001 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Interface The MLD Proxy interface. The column headings of the table associated with the interface are as follows: Parameter Description Ver The MLD version. Query Rcvd Number of MLD queries received. Report Rcvd Number of MLD reports received. Report Sent Number of MLD reports sent. Leaves Rcvd Number of MLD leaves received. Valid for version 2 only.
PAGE 1002
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1002 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines The following fields are displayed: Field Description Valid MLD Packets Received The number of valid MLD packets received by the router. Valid MLD Packets Sent The number of valid MLD packets sent by the router. Queries Received The number of valid MLD queries received by the router. Queries Sent The number of valid MLD queries sent by the router.
PAGE 1003
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1003 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Reports Sent................................... 0 Leaves Received................................ 0 Leaves Sent.................................... 0 show ipv6 neighbors Use the show ipv6 neighbors command in Privileged EXEC mode to display information about the IPv6 neighbors. Syntax show ipv6 neighbors Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1004
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1004 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ipv6 route Use the show ipv6 route command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode to display the IPv6 routing table. The output of the command also displays the IPv6 address of the default gateway and the default route associated with the gateway.
PAGE 1005
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1005 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays the IPv6 address of the default gateway and the default route associated with the gateway. console(config)#show ipv6 route IPv6 Routing Table - 0 entries Route Codes: C - connected, S - static O - OSPF Intra, OI - OSPF Inter, OE1 - OSPF Ext 1, OE2 - OSPF Ext 2 ON1 - OSPF NSSA Ext Type 1, ON2 - OSPF NSSA Ext Type 2 Default gateway is 10.1.20.1 S 0.0.0.0/0 [254/0] via 10.1.20.1 C 10.1.20.
PAGE 1006
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1006 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example shows the preference value associated with the type of route. console#show ipv6 route preferences Local.......................................... 0 Static......................................... 1 OSPF Intra-area routes......................... 110 OSPF Inter-area routes......................... 110 OSPF External routes...........................
PAGE 1007
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1007 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays a summary of the routing table. console#show ipv6 route summary IPv6 Routing Table Summary - 0 entries Connected Routes............................. 0 Static Routes................................ 0 OSPF Routes.................................. 0 Intra Area Routes............................ 0 Inter Area Routes............................ 0 External Type-1 Routes.......................
PAGE 1008
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1008 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Examples The following examples show traffic and statistics for IPv6 and ICMPv6, first for all interfaces and an individual VLAN. console> show ipv6 traffic IPv6 STATISTICS Total Datagrams Received........................................... 0 Received Datagrams Locally Delivered..........................................
PAGE 1009
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1009 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Datagrams Failed To Fragment....................... 0 Fragments Created.................................. 0 Multicast Datagrams Received....................... 0 Multicast Datagrams Transmitted.................... 0 console> show ipv6 traffic vlan 11 Interface ........................................ 11 IPv6 STATISTICS Total Datagrams Received........................... 0 Received Datagrams Locally Delivered...............
PAGE 1010
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1010 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Multicast Datagrams Received....................... 0 Multicast Datagrams Transmitted.................... 0 show ipv6 vlan Use the show ipv6 vlan command in Privileged EXEC mode to display IPv6 VLAN routing interface addresses. Syntax show ipv6 vlan Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1011
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1011 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax traceroute ipv6 {ip-address | hostname} [port] • ipv6-address — Destination IPv6 address. • hostname — Hostname to ping (contact). (Range: 1–158 characters). The command allows spaces in the host name when specified in double quotes. For example, console(config)#traceroute "host name" • port — UDP port used as the destination of packets sent as part of the traceroute.
PAGE 1012
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1013
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1013 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 51 Loopback Interface Commands PowerConnect provides for the creation, deletion, and management of loopback interfaces. They are dynamic interfaces that are created and deleted by user configuration. A loopback interface is always expected to be up. As such, it provides a means to configure a stable IP address on the device which may be referred to by other switches in the network.
PAGE 1014
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1014 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example enters the Interface Loopback 1 configuration mode. console(config)#interface loopback 1 console(config-if-loopback0)#ip address 192.168.22.1 255.255.255.255 console(config-if-loopback0)#exit console(config)#ex console#ping 192.168.22.1 Pinging 192.168.22.1 with 0 bytes of data: Reply From 192.168.22.1: icmp_seq = 0. time <10 msec. Reply From 192.168.
PAGE 1015
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1015 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Examples The following examples display information about configured loopback interfaces. console# show interfaces loopback Loopback Id Interface IP Address Received Packets Sent Packets ----------- --------- ---------- ---------------- ------------ 1 loopback 1 0.0.0.0 0 0 console# show interfaces loopback 1 Interface Link Status.
PAGE 1016
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1017
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1017 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Multicast Commands 52 The PowerConnect Multicast component is best suited for video and audio traffic requiring multicast packet control for optimal operation. The Multicast component includes support for IGMPv2, IGMPv3, PIM-DM, PIM-SM, and DVMRP. Communication from point to multipoint is called Multicasting.
PAGE 1018
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1018 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • Applications used for datacasting: Since multimedia transmission has become increasingly popular, multicast transmission use has increased. Multicast transmission may be used to efficiently accommodate this type of communication. For instance, the audio and video signals are captured, compressed and transmitted to a group of receiving stations.
PAGE 1019
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1019 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip mcast boundary Use the ip mcast boundary command in Interface Configuration mode to add an administrative scope multicast boundary specified by groupipaddr and mask for which this multicast administrative boundary is applicable. groupipaddr is a group IP address and mask is a group IP mask. Syntax ip mcast boundary groupipaddr mask no ip mcast boundary groupipaddr mask • groupipaddr — IP address of multicast group.
PAGE 1020
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1020 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ip mroute source-address mask rpf-address preference no ip mroute source-address mask • source-address — The IP address of the multicast data source. • mask — The IP subnet mask of the multicast data source. • rpf-address — The IP address of the next hop towards the source. • preference — The cost of the route (Range: 1 - 255). Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command.
PAGE 1021
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1021 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no ip multicast Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example enables IP multicast on the router.
PAGE 1022
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1022 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example applies a ttlvalue of 5 to the VLAN 15 routing interface. console(config)#interface vlan 15 console(config-if-vlan15)#ip multicast ttl-threshold 5 ip pim Use the ip pimdm command in Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode to administratively configure PIM mode for IP multicast routing on a VLAN interface.
PAGE 1023
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1023 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config)#interface vlan 10 console(if-vlan-10)#ip pim ip pim bsr-border The ip pim bsr-border command is used in Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode to administratively disable bootstrap router (BSR) messages on the interface. Use the no form of this command to return the configuration to the default. Syntax ip pim bsr-border no ip pim bsr-border Default Configuration BSR messages are enabled on the interface by default.
PAGE 1024
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1024 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ip pim bsr-candidate vlan {vlan-id hash-mask-length bsr-priority } no ip pim bsr-candidate vlan {vlan-id} Parameter Description Parameter Description vlan-id A valid VLAN identifier with multicast routing enabled. hash-mask-length Length of the BSR hash to be ANDed with the multicast bsr-priority The advertised priority of the BSR candidate. Range 0-255. Default 0. group address. (Range 0–32 bits). Default 0.
PAGE 1025
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1025 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no ip pim dense Default Configuration PIM is not enabled by default. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Only one of sparse or dense mode can be configured on a router. Example console(config)#ip pim dense ip pim dr-priority The ip pim dr-priority command in Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode to administratively configure the advertised designated router (DR) priority value.
PAGE 1026
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1026 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command only has an effect if sparse mode is enabled. Lower values are preferred. Example console(if-vlan10)#ip pim dr-priority 32768 ip pim hello-interval The ip pim hello-interval command in Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode to administratively configure the frequency of PIM Hello messages on the specified interface. Use the no form of this command to return the configuration to the default.
PAGE 1027
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1027 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip pim join-prune-interval The ip pim join-prune-interval command in Interface (VLAN) Configuration mode to administratively configure the frequency of join/prune messages on the specified interface. Use the no form of this command to return the configuration to the default. This command deprecates the ip pimsm message-interval and ip pimsm join-prune-interval commands.
PAGE 1028
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1028 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ip pim register-rate-limit 0-2000 no ip pim register-rate-limit Parameter Description Parameter Description register-rate-limit The PIM register message limit in kilobytes per second. Range 0-2000. Default Configuration The default threshold is 0. This indicates that the register limit is infinite. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1029
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1029 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description rp-address The valid IPv4 address for the rendezvous point. group-address A valid multicast group address to be sourced from the rendezvous point. group-mask A mask indicating the range of multicast groups sourced from the RP override A flag indicating that the static entry should override dynamically learned entries for the configured multicast group.
PAGE 1030
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1030 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description vlan-id A valid VLAN identifier with multicast routing enabled. group-address A valid multicast group address. group-mask A mask indicating the range of multicast groups for which the router should advertise itself as an RP-candidate. Default Configuration None - the router does not advertise itself as an RP candidate by default.
PAGE 1031
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1031 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Only one of sparse or dense mode can be configured on a router. Example console(config)#ip pim sparse ip pim ssm Use the ip pim ssm command in Global Configuration mode to administratively configure PIM source specific multicast range of addresses for IP multicast routing. Use the no form of this command to remove configured ranges of addresses from the router.
PAGE 1032
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1032 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config)#ip pim ssm 239.0.10.0 255.255.255.0 ip pim spt-threshold Use the ip pim spt-threshold command in Global Configuration mode to set the multicast traffic threshold rate for the last-hop router to switch to the shortest path on the router. Use the no form of this command to return the threshold to its default value (0).
PAGE 1033
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1033 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show bridge multicast address-table count Use the show bridge multicast address-table count command to view statistical information about the entries in the multicast address table. Syntax show bridge multicast address-table count Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1034
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1034 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Used The total number of addresses in the multicast address table. Static addresses The number of addresses in the multicast address table that are static IP addresses. Dynamic addresses The number of addresses in the multicast address table that were learned dynamically. Forbidden addresses The number of addresses in the multicast address table that are forbidden IP addresses.
PAGE 1035
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1035 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Table Max Size .......................... 256 Protocol................................. PIMDM Multicast Forwarding Cache Entry Count .. 0 show ip mcast boundary Use the show ip mcast boundary command in Privileged EXEC mode to display all the configured administrative scoped multicast boundaries. Syntax show ip mcast boundary {vlan vlan-id | all} • vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID.
PAGE 1036
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1036 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip multicast interface Use the show ip multicast interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the multicast information for the specified interface. Syntax show ip multicast interface [type number] Syntax Description Parameter Description type number Interface type and number for which to display IP multicast information.
PAGE 1037
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1037 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show ip mcast mroute {detail | summary} Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays a summary or all the details of the multicast table.
PAGE 1038
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1038 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the multicast configuration settings such as flags, timer settings, incoming and outgoing interfaces. console#show ip mcast mroute group 224.5.5.5 summary console#show ip mcast mroute group 224.5.5.
PAGE 1039
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1039 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays multicast configuration settings. console#show ip mcast mroute source 10.1.1.1 summary console#show ip mcast mroute source 10.1.1.1 224.5.5.
PAGE 1040
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1040 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM --------------- --------------- --------------- ---------1.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 2.2.2.2 23 show ip pim bsr-router The show ip pim bsr-router command displays information about a bootstrap router (BSR). This command deprecates the show ip pimsm componenttable and show ip pimsm bsr commands. Syntax show ip pim bsr-router Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command.
PAGE 1041
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1041 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM BSR Address............................. 192.168.10.1 BSR Priority............................ 0 BSR Hash Mask Length.................... 10 Next bootstrap message(hh:mm:ss)........ 00:00:11 Next Candidate RP advertisement(hh:mm:ss)00:00:02 If no configured/elected BSRs exist on the router, the following message is displayed. No BSR’s exist/learned on this router.
PAGE 1042
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1042 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode User EXEC and Privileged EXEC modes User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example (console) #show ip pim Interface VLAN0010 Mode Sparse Hello Interval (secs) 30 Join Prune Interval (secs) 60 DR Priority 1 BSR Border Disabled Neighbor Count1 Designated Router Interface 192.168.10.
PAGE 1043
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1043 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Designated Router 192.168.10.1 If none of the interfaces are enabled for PIM, the following message is displayed: None of the routing interfaces are enabled for PIM show ip pim neighbor Use the show ip pim neighbor command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC modes to display PIM neighbors discovered by PIMv2 Hello messages.
PAGE 1044
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1044 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example (console)#show ip pim neighbor vlan 10 Neighbor Addr Interface Up Time Expiry Time hh:mm:ss hh:mm:ss --------------- ---------- --------- ----------192.168.10.2 VLAN0010 00:02:55 00:01:15 (FASTPATH) #show ip pim neighbor Neighbor Addr Interface Uptime Expiry Time (HH:MM::SS) (HH:MM::SS) --------------- --------- ----------- ----------- 192.168.10.2 VLAN0001 00:02:55 00:01:15 192.168.20.
PAGE 1045
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1045 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines The following fields are displayed: Field Description RP Address Address of the RP Type Origin from where this group mapping was learned. Example console#show ip pimsm rp hash 224.1.2.0 RP Address 192.168.10.1 Type Static If no RP Group mapping exists on the router, the following message is displayed: No RP-Group mappings exist/learned on this router.ny interface.
PAGE 1046
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1046 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Field Descriptions Field Description RP Address Address of the RP Group Address Address of the multicast group. Group Mask Mask for the group address. Origin Origin from where this group mapping is learned. Example console#show ip pim rp mapping 192.168.0.1 RP Address192.168.10.1 Group Address224.1.2.
PAGE 1047
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1047 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Group Address229.2.0.0 Group Mask255.255.0.0 OriginStatic dsdIf no RP Group mapping exists on the router, the following message is displayed: No RP-Group mappings exist on this router.
PAGE 1048
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1049
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1050
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1050 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config)#ipv6 pimsm ipv6 pimsm (VLAN Interface config) Use the ipv6 pimsm command in VLAN Interface configuration mode to administratively enable PIM-SM multicast routing mode on a particular IPv6 router interface. Use the "no" form of this command to disable PIM SM on an interface.
PAGE 1051
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1051 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ipv6 pimsm bsr-border no ipv6 pimsm bsr-border Default Configuration BSR-border is disabled by default. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 pimsm bsr-border ipv6 pimsm bsr-candidate Use the ipv6 pimsm bsr-candidate command to configure the router to announce its candidacy as a bootstrap router (BSR).
PAGE 1052
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1052 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • priority —The priority of the candidate BSR. The BSR with the higher priority is preferred. If the priority values are the same, the router with the higher IP address is the BSR. (Range: 0–255). Default Configuration The router will not announce its candidacy by default. The default hash mask length is 126 bits. The default priority is 0.
PAGE 1053
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1053 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config-if-vlan3)#ipv6 pimsm dr-priority 10 ipv6 pimsm hello-interval Use the ipv6 pimsm hello-interval command to configure the PIM-SM Hello Interval for the specified interface. Use the "no" form of this command to set the hello interval to the default.
PAGE 1054
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1054 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ipv6 pimsm join-prune-interval interval no ipv6 pimsm join-prune-interval • interval— The join/prune interval (Range: 0–18000 seconds). Default Configuration The default join/prune interval is 60 seconds. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 1055
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1055 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config)#ipv6 pimsm register-threshold 250 ipv6 pimsm rp-address Use the ipv6 pimsm rp-address command to statically configure the RP address for one or more multicast groups. The optional keyword override indicates that if there is a conflict, the RP configured with this command prevails over the RP learned by BSR.
PAGE 1056
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1056 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ipv6 pimsm rp-candidate Use the ipv6 pimsm rp-candidate command to configure the router to advertise itself as a PIM candidate rendezvous point (RP) to the bootstrap router (BSR). Use the "no" form of this command to disable the router from advertising itself as a PIM candidate rendezvous point (RP) to the bootstrap router (BSR).
PAGE 1057
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1057 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ipv6 pimsm spt-threshold threshold no ipv6 pimsm spt-threshold • threshold —The threshold rate (Range: 0–2000 Kbps). Default Configuration The default threshold rate is 0. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 1058
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1058 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config)#ipv6 pimsm ssm ff1e::/64 show ipv6 pimsm Use the show ipv6 pimsm command to display global status of IPv6 PIMSM and its IPv6 routing interfaces. Syntax show ipv6 pimsm Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 1059
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1059 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Group Address/Prefix Length --------------------------------------- FF1E::/64 PIM-SM INTERFACE STATUS Interface Interface-Mode Operational-Status --------- -------------- ---------------- vlan 3 Enabled Operational vlan 6 Enabled Operational vlan 9 Enabled Operational show ipv6 pimsm bsr Use the show ipv6 pimsm bsr command to display the bootstrap router (BSR) information.
PAGE 1060
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1060 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM BSR Address.................................... 3001::1 BSR Priority................................... 23 BSR Hash Mask Length........................... 10 Next bootstrap message(hh:mm:ss)............... 00:00:11 Next Candidate RP advertisement(hh:mm:ss)...... 00:00:12 show ipv6 pimsm interface Use the show ipv6 pimsm interface command to display interface config parameters.
PAGE 1061
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1061 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IP Address..................................... FE80::2FF:EDFF:FED0:2/128 Hello Interval (secs).......................... 30 Join Prune Interval (secs)..................... 60 Neighbor Count ................................ 0 Designated Router.............................. FE80::2FF:EDFF:FED0:2 DR Priority.................................... 1 BSR Border.....................................
PAGE 1062
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1062 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Neighbor Address............................... FE80::200:FF:FE00:33 Up Time (hh:mm:ss)............................. 00:00:12 Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)......................... 00:01:34 DR Priority.................................... 0 show ipv6 pimsm rphash Use the show ipv6 pimsm rphash command to display which rendezvous point (RP) is being selected for a specified group.
PAGE 1063
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1063 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 3001::1 BSR show ipv6 pimsm rp mapping Use the show ipv6 pimsm rp mapping command to display all group-to-RP mappings of which the router is aware (either configured or learned from the bootstrap router (BSR). If no RP is specified, all active RPs are displayed Syntax show ipv6 pimsm rp mapping [ rp-address ] • rp-address — IP address of RP. Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command.
PAGE 1064
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1064 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM RP Address..................................... 3001::1 origin.........................................
PAGE 1065
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1065 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM OSPF Commands 54 OSPF is a link-state protocol. PowerConnect OSPF supports variable-length subnet masks. PowerConnect OSPF only operates over VLAN interfaces. OSPF operates within a hierarchy. The largest entity within the hierarchy is the autonomous system (AS), a collection of networks under a common administration sharing a common routing strategy. This is sometimes called a routing domain.
PAGE 1066
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1066 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Route Preferences Normally, OSPF select routes in the following order: • Local • Static • Intra-area • Inter-area • External • RIP PowerConnect OSPF allows the administrator to change the preference for selecting intra, inter, and external routes according to the following rules: a External route preferences apply to all ospf external routes like type1, type2, nssa-type1, nssa-type2 equally.
PAGE 1067
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1067 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • Learned Dynamically: Routing protocols can learn ECMP routes. For example, if OSPF is configured on both links connecting Router A to Router B with interface addresses 10.1.1.2 and 10.1.2.2 respectively, and Router B advertises its connection to 20.0.0.0/ 8, then Router A computes an OSPF route to 20.0.0.0/8 with next hops of 10.1.1.2 and 10.1.2.2.
PAGE 1068
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1068 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Graceful Restart The PowerConnect implementation of OSPFv2 supports graceful restart as specified in RFC 3623. Graceful restart works in concert with PowerConnect nonstop forwarding to enable the hardware to continue forwarding IPv4 packets using OSPFv2 routes while a backup unit takes over management unit responsibility.
PAGE 1069
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1070
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1070 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration 10 is the default configuration for integer. Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example identifies a stub area of 10 and default cost of 100.
PAGE 1071
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1071 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description metric-value Specifies the metric of the default route advertised to the NSSA. (Range: 1–16777214) metric-type-value The metric type can be one of the following : 1 A metric type of nssa-external 1 2 A metric type of nssa-external 2 (default) role The translator role where role is one of the following : • always - The router assumes the role of the translator when it becomes a border router.
PAGE 1072
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1072 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-router)#area 20 nssa default-infooriginate metric 250 metric-type 2 no-summary area nssa default-info-originate Use the area nssa default-info-originate command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to configure the metric value and type for the default route advertised into the NSSA. The metric type can be comparable (nssaexternal 1) or non-comparable (nssa-external 2).
PAGE 1073
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1073 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-router)#area 20 nssa default-infooriginate 250 non-comparable area nssa no-redistribute Use the area nssa no-redistribute command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to configure the NSSA Area Border router (ABR) so that learned external routes are not redistributed to the NSSA. Syntax area area-id nssa no-redistribute no area area-id nssa no-redistribute • area-id — Identifies the OSPF NSSA to configure.
PAGE 1074
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1074 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax area area-id nssa no-summary no area area-id nssa no-summary • area-id — Identifies the OSPF NSSA to configure. (Range: 0–4294967295) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures the NSSA so that summary LSAs are not advertised into the NSSA.
PAGE 1075
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1075 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The default role is candidate. Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures the translator role of the NSSA.
PAGE 1076
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1076 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures the translator stability interval of the area 20 NSSA. console(config-router)#area 20 nssa translator-stabintv 2000 area range (Router OSPF) Use the area range command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to configure a summary prefix for routes learned in a given area. There are two types of area ranges.
PAGE 1077
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1077 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description not-advertise Suppresses advertisement of the area range. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode. User Guidelines Use this command with Area Border Routers (ABRs). Example The following example defines an area range for the area 20. console(config-router)#area 20 range 192.168.6.0 255.255.255.
PAGE 1078
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1078 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Examples The following examples define area 3 for the stub and then removes the stub area. console(config-router)#area 3 stub console(config-router)#no area 3 stub area stub no-summary Use the area stub no-summary command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to prevent Summary LSAs from being advertised into the NSSA.
PAGE 1079
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1079 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example prevents the Summary LSA from being advertised into the area 3 NSSA. console(config-router)#area 3 stub no-summary area virtual-link Use the area virtual-link command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to create the OSPF virtual interface for the specified area-id and neighbor router. To remove the link, use the no form of the command.
PAGE 1080
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1080 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description hello-interval seconds Number of seconds to wait before sending hello packets to the OSPF virtual interface. (Range: 1–65535) dead-interval seconds Number of seconds to wait before the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface is assumed to be dead. (Range: 1–65535) retransmit-interval seconds The number of seconds to wait between retransmitting LSAs if no acknowledgement is received.
PAGE 1081
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1081 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode. User Guidelines Unauthenticated interfaces cannot be configured with an authentication key. Use the area virtual-link authentication command on page 1081 to enable configuration of an authentication key. Example The following example establishes a virtual link with a 40-second transmitdelay interval and default values for all other optional parameters: router ospf network 10.50.50.0 0.0.
PAGE 1082
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1082 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • neighbor-id — Identifies the Router identifier of the neighbor. • encrypt — Use MD5 Encryption for an OSPF Virtual Link. • key — Authentication key for the specified interface. (Range: 8 bytes or less if the authentication type is simple and 16 bytes or less if the type is encrypt.) • key-id — Authentication key identifier for the authentication type encrypt.
PAGE 1083
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1083 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax area area-id virtual-link neighbor-id dead-interval seconds no area area-id virtual-link neighbor-id dead-interval • area-id — Identifies the OSPF area to configure. (Range: IP address or decimal from 0–4294967295) • neighbor-id — Identifies the Router ID of the neighbor. • seconds — Number of seconds to wait before the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface is assumed to be dead.
PAGE 1084
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1084 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no area area-id virtual-link neighbor-id hello-interval • area-id — Identifies the OSPF area to configure. (Range: IP address or decimal from 0–4294967295) • neighbor-id — Identifies the Router ID of the neighbor. • seconds — Number of seconds to wait before sending hello packets to the OSPF virtual interface. (Range: 1–65535) Default Configuration 10 seconds is the default configuration.
PAGE 1085
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1085 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • neighbor-id — Identifies the Router ID of the neighbor. • seconds — The number of seconds to wait between retransmitting LSAs if no acknowledgement is received. (Range: 0–3600) Default Configuration The default configuration is 5 seconds. Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures a 500-second retransmit wait interval.
PAGE 1086
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1086 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration 1 second is the default configuration. Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures a 40-second transmit-delay interval. console(config-router)#area 10 virtual-link 192.168.2.2 transmit-delay 40 auto-cost By default, OSPF computes the link cost of each interface from the interface bandwidth.
PAGE 1087
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1087 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example The following example configures a reference bandwidth of 500 Mbps. console(config-router)#auto-cost reference-bandwidth 500 bandwidth By default, OSPF computes the link cost of an interface as the ratio of the reference bandwidth to the interface bandwidth. Reference bandwidth is specified with the auto-cost command.
PAGE 1088
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1088 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM capability opaque Use the capability opaque command to enable Opaque Capability on the router. Use the “no” form of this command to disable Opaque Capability. Syntax capability opaque no capability opaque Default Configuration Opaque Capability is enabled by default. Command Mode Router Configuration mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 1089
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1089 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • neighbor — Drop the adjacency with all OSPF neighbors. On each neighbor's interface, send a one-way hello. Adjacencies may then be reestablished. • interface vlan vlan-id — Drop adjacency with all neighbors on a specific interface. • neighbor-id — Drop adjacency with a specific router ID on a specific interface. Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode.
PAGE 1090
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1090 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax compatible rfc1583 no compatible rfc1583 Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Default Configuration Compatible with RFC 1583. Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode. User Guidelines If all OSPF routers in the routing domain are capable of operating according to RFC 2328, OSPF 1583 compatibility mode should be disabled. Example The following example enables 1583 compatibility.
PAGE 1091
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1091 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax Description Parameter Description always Always advertise default routes. metric-value The metric (or preference) value of the default route. (Range: 1–16777214) type-value 1 External type-1 route. 2 External type-2 route. Default Configuration The default metric is none and the default type is 2. Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1092
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1092 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • metric-value — The metric (or preference) value of the default route. (Range: 1–16777214) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets a value of 50 for the default metric.
PAGE 1093
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1093 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description inter-area dist2 Used to select the best path from one area to another area when there are two or more routes to the same destination from two different routing protocols (Range: 1–255). external dist3 Used to select the best path for routes from other routing domains, learned by redistribution when there are two or more routes to the same destination from two different routing protocols (Range: 1–255).
PAGE 1094
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1094 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax Description Parameter Description name The name used to identify an existing ACL. The range is 1–31 characters. rip Apply the specified access list when RIP is the source protocol. static Apply the specified access list when packets come through the static route. connected Apply the specified access list when packets come from a directly connected route. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1095
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1095 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no enable Default Configuration Enabled is the default configuration. Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example enables OSPF router mode. console(config-router)#enable exit-overflow-interval Use the exit-overflow-interval command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to configure the exit overflow interval for OSPF.
PAGE 1096
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1096 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets the exit overflow interval for OSPF at 10 seconds. console(config-router)#exit-overflow-interval 10 external-lsdb-limit Use the external-lsdb-limit command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to configure the external LSDB limit for OSPF. If the value is -1, then there is no limit.
PAGE 1097
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1097 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example configures the external LSDB limit for OSPF with the number of non-default AS-external-LSAs set at 20. console(config-router)#external-lsdb-limit 20 ip ospf area The ip ospf area command enables OSPFv2 and sets the area ID of an interface. This command supersedes the effects of network area command. It can also configure the advertisability of the secondary addresses on this interface into OSPFv2 domain.
PAGE 1098
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1098 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip ospf authentication Use the ip ospf authentication command in the Interface Configuration mode to set the OSPF Authentication Type and Key for the specified interface. Use the no form of the command to return the authentication type to the default value. Syntax ip ospf authentication {none | {simple key} | {encrypt key key-id}} no ip ospf authentication • encrypt — MD5 encrypted authentication key.
PAGE 1099
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1099 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip ospf cost Use the ip ospf cost command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the cost on an OSPF interface. Use the no form of the command to return the cost to the default value. Syntax ip ospf cost interface-cost no ip ospf cost • interface-cost — Specifies the cost (link-state metric) of the OSPF interface. (Range: 1–65535) Default Configuration 10 is the default link-state metric configuration.
PAGE 1100
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1100 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • seconds — Number of seconds that a router's Hello packets have not been seen before its neighbor routers declare that the router is down. (Range: 1–65535) Default Configuration 40 is the default number of seconds. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode User Guidelines The value for the length of time must be the same for all routers attached to a common network.
PAGE 1101
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1101 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode. User Guidelines The value for the length of time must be the same for all routers attached to a network. Example The following example sets the OSPF hello interval at 30 seconds. console(config-if-vlan15)#ip ospf hello-interval 30 ip ospf mtu-ignore Use the ip ospf mtu-ignore command in Interface Configuration mode to disable OSPF maximum transmission unit (MTU) mismatch detection.
PAGE 1102
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1102 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example disables OSPF MTU mismatch detection on VLAN interface 15. console(config-if-vlan15)#ip ospf mtu-ignore ip ospf network Use the ip ospf network command to configure OSPF to treat an interface as a point-to-point rather than broadcast interface. To return to the default value, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 1103
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1103 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM broadcast Set the OSPF network type to Broadcast point-to-point Set the OSPF network type to Point-to-Point ip ospf priority Use the ip ospf priority command in Interface Configuration mode to set the OSPF priority for the specified router interface. Use the no form of the command to return the priority to the default value.
PAGE 1104
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1104 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ip ospf retransmit-interval seconds no ip ospf retransmit-interval • seconds — Number of seconds between link-state advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to this router interface. This value is also used when retransmitting database description and link-state request packets. (Range: 0–3600 seconds) Default Configuration 5 is the default number of seconds. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode.
PAGE 1105
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1105 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • seconds — Sets the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over this interface. (Range: 1–3600 seconds) Default Configuration 1 is the default number of seconds. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets the OSPF Transit Delay for VLAN 15 at 20 seconds.
PAGE 1106
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1106 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines OSPF is only enabled on an interface if the primary IPv4 address on the interface matches a network area range. Any individual interface can only be attached to a single area. If an interface address matches multiple network area ranges, the interface is assigned to the area for the first matching range. If the ip ospf area command is given for an interface, it overrides any matching network area command.
PAGE 1107
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1107 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode. User Guidelines OSPF is only enabled on an interface if the primary IPv4 address on the interface matches a network area range. Any individual interface can only be attached to a single area. If an interface address matches multiple network area ranges, the interface is assigned to the area for the first matching range.
PAGE 1108
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1108 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration Graceful restart is disabled by default Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode User Guidelines Graceful restart works in concert with nonstop forwarding to enable the hardware to continue forwarding IPv4 packets using OSPFv2 routes while a backup unit takes over management unit responsibility.
PAGE 1109
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1109 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode User Guidelines The grace LSA announcing the graceful restart includes a restart reason. Reasons 1 (software restart) and 2 (software reload/upgrade) are considered planned restarts. Reasons 0 (unknown) and 3 (switch to redundant control processor) are considered unplanned restarts.
PAGE 1110
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1110 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM until the graceful restart completes. By exiting the graceful restart on a topology change, a router tries to eliminate the loops or black holes as quickly as possible by routing around the restarting router. A helpful neighbor considers a link down with the restarting router to be a topology change, regardless of the strict LSA checking configuration.
PAGE 1111
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1111 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM passive-interface default The passive-interface default command enables the global passive mode by default for all interfaces. It overrides any interface level passive mode. Use the “no” form of this command to disable the global passive mode by default for all interfaces. Any interface previously configured to be passive reverts to nonpassive mode.
PAGE 1112
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1112 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration Passive interface mode is disabled by default. Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config-router)#passive-interface vlan 1 redistribute Use the redistribute command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to configure OSPF protocol to allow redistribution of routes from the specified source protocol/routers.
PAGE 1113
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1113 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description metric-value Specifies the metric to use when redistributing the route. (Range: 0–16777214) type-value Type 1 external route. Type 2 external route. tag-value Value attached to each external route, which might be used to communicate information between ASBRs. (Range: 0–4294967295) subnets Specifies whether to redistribute the routes to subnets.
PAGE 1114
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1114 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example defines the router OSPF ID as 5.5.5.5. console(config)#router ospf console(config-router)#router-id 5.5.5.5 router ospf Use the router ospf command in Global Configuration mode to enter Router OSPF mode.
PAGE 1115
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1115 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example enters into router OSPF mode. console(config)#router ospf console(config-router)# show ip ospf Use the show ip ospf command to display information relevant to the OSPF router. This command has been modified to show additional fields. Syntax show ip ospf Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command.
PAGE 1116
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1116 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM RFC 1583 Compatibility This configuration option controls the preference rules used when choosing among multiple external LSAs advertising the same destination. When enabled, the preference rules remain those specified by RFC 1583. When disabled, the preference rules are those stated in Section 16.4.1 of RFC 2328. These rules prevent routing loops when external LSAs for the same destination have been originated from different areas.
PAGE 1117
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1117 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Number of Active Areas The number of OSPF areas to which the router is attached on interfaces that are up. ABR Status Shows whether the router is an OSPF Area Border Router. ASBR Status Indicates whether the router is an autonomous system border router. Router automatically becomes an ASBR when it is configured to redistribute routes learned from another protocol.
PAGE 1118
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1118 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM LSA High Water Mark The maximum number of LSAs that have been in the link state database since OSPF began operation. Retransmit List Entries The current number of entries on all neighbors’ retransmit lists. Maximum Number The maximum number of entries that can be on neighbors’ of Retransmit retransmit lists at any given time. This is the sum for all Entries neighbors.
PAGE 1119
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1119 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Distribute-List Shows the access list used to filter redistributed routes. Example The following example displays OSPF router information. console#show ip ospf Router ID................................ 1.1.1.1 OSPF Admin Mode.......................... Enable RFC 1583 Compatibility................... Enable External LSDB Limit...................... No Limit Exit Overflow Interval................... 0 Spf Delay Time..................
PAGE 1120
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1120 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ASBR Status.......................... Disable Stub Router.......................... FALSE External LSDB Overflow............... FALSE External LSA Count................... 0 External LSA Checksum................ 0 AS_OPAQUE LSA Count.................. 0 AS_OPAQUE LSA Checksum............... 0 New LSAs Originated.................. 25 LSAs Received........................ 7 LSA Count............................ 4 Maximum Number of LSAs.
PAGE 1121
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1121 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show ip ospf abr Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console#show ip ospf abr Type Router Id Cost Area ID Next Hop Next Hop Intf ----- --------- ----- --------------- --------- -------- INTRA 3.3.3.3 1 0.0.0.1 10.1.23.3 vlan11 INTRA 4.4.4.4 10 0.0.0.1 10.1.24.
PAGE 1122
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1122 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays OSPF router information. console#show ip ospf area 10 AreaID......................................... 0.0.0.10 External Routing............................... Import External LSAs Spf Runs....................................... 0 Area Border Router Count....................... 0 Area LSA Count...............
PAGE 1123
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1123 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Metric Type............................ NonComparable Translator Role................................ Candidate Translator Stability Interval.................. 2000 Translator State............................... Disabled show ip ospf asbr The show ip ospf asbr command displays the internal OSPF routing table entries to Autonomous System Boundary Routes (ASBR). This command takes no options.
PAGE 1124
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1124 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip ospf database Use the show ip ospf database command in Privileged EXEC mode to display information about the link state database when OSPF is enabled. If parameters are entered, the command displays the LSA headers. Use the optional parameters to specify the type of link state advertisements to display.
PAGE 1125
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1125 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays information about the link state database when OSPF is enabled. console#show ip ospf database Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.0) Link Id Adv Router Age Sequence Chksm Options Rtr Opt --------------- --------------- ----- -------- ------ ------- ----5.2.0.0 0.0.0.0 1360 80000006 3a1f ------ ----- 5.2.0.0 5.2.0.0 1360 80000009 a47e ------ ---E- 20.20.20.20 20.20.20.
PAGE 1126
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1126 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 5.2.0.0 0.0.0.0 1361 80000006 183a ------ Link Opaque States (Area 0.0.0.0) Link Id Adv Router Age Sequence Chksm Options Rtr Opt --------------- --------------- ----- -------- ------ ------- ----5.2.0.0 0.0.0.0 1361 80000005 ef59 ------ Area Opaque States (Area 0.0.0.0) Link Id Adv Router Age Sequence Chksm Options Rtr Opt --------------- --------------- ----- -------- ------ ------- ----5.2.0.0 0.0.0.
PAGE 1127
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1127 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip ospf database database-summary Use the show ip ospf database database-summary command to display the number of each type of LSA in the database for each area and for the router. The command also displays the total number of LSAs in the database. This command has been modified. Syntax show ip ospf database database-summary Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command.
PAGE 1128
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1128 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Total Shows Number of entries for all areas. Example The following example displays the number of each type of LSA in the database for each area and for the router. console#show ip ospf database database-summary OSPF Router with ID (5.5.5.5) Area 0.0.0.0 database summary Router......................................... 0 Network........................................ 0 Summary Net.................................... 0 Summary ASBR..
PAGE 1129
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1129 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Router database summary Router......................................... 0 Network........................................ 0 Summary Net.................................... 0 Summary ASBR................................... 0 Type-7 Ext..................................... 0 Opaque Link.................................... 0 Opaque Area.................................... 0 Type-5 Ext.....................................
PAGE 1130
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1130 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the information for the IFO object or virtual interface tables associated with VLAN 3. console#show ip ospf interface vlan 10 IP Address..................................... 1.1.1.1 Subnet Mask................................. 255.255.255.0 Secondary IP Address(es).......................
PAGE 1131
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1131 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip ospf interface brief Use the show ip ospf interface brief command in Privileged EXEC mode to display brief information for the IFO object or virtual interface tables. Syntax show ip ospf interface brief Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1132
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1132 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the ospf statistics for VLAN 15. console>show ip ospf interface stats vlan15 OSPF Area ID....................................... 0.0.0.0 Area Border Router Count.................................
PAGE 1133
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1133 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax Description Parameter Description interface-type Interface type – only supported type is vlan. interface-number A valid interface number. neighbor-id Valid IP address of the neighbor. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1134
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1134 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Restart Helper Status........................ Not helping Restart Helper Exit Reason................... Not attempted Field Description Field Description Interface The name of the interface on which the adjacency is formed. Neighbor IP Address The IPv4 address on the neighbor's interface used to form the adjacency. Interface Index The SNMP interface index. Area Id The OSPF area in which the adjacency is formed.
PAGE 1135
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1135 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Field Description Restart Helper Exit Reason One of the following values: • Restart Reason — When the router is in helpful neighbor mode, the output includes the restart reason the restarting router sent in its grace LSA. The Restart Reason is the value in the Graceful Restart Reason TLV in the grace LSA sent by the restarting router.
PAGE 1136
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1136 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show ip ospf range area-id • area-id — Identifies the OSPF area whose ranges are being displayed. (Range: IP address or decimal from 0–4294967295) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays information about the area ranges for the specified area-id.
PAGE 1137
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1137 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console>show ip ospf statistics Area 0.0.0.
PAGE 1138
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1138 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the OSPF stub table. console(config)#show ip ospf stub table AreaId TypeofService Metric Val Import SummaryLSA ------------- ------------- ---------- ----------------- 0.0.0.
PAGE 1139
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1139 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the OSPF Virtual Interface information for area 10 and its neighbor. console#show ip ospf virtual-link 10 192.168.2.2 Area ID........................................ 10 Neighbor Router ID............................. 192.168.2.2 Hello Interval................................. 10 Dead Interval.....
PAGE 1140
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1140 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the OSPF Virtual Interface information in the system.
PAGE 1141
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1141 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration The default value for delay-time is 5. The default value for hold-time is 10. Command Mode Router OSPF Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures the SPF delay and hold time.
PAGE 1142
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1143
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1144
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1144 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM area virtual-link ipv6 ospf network retransmit-interval show ipv6 ospf show ipv6 ospf virtuallink brief area default-cost (Router OSPFv3) Use the area default-cost command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode to configure the monetary default cost for the stub area. The operator must specify the area id and an integer value between 1-16777215. Use the no form of the command to return the cost to the default value.
PAGE 1145
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1145 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM area nssa (Router OSPFv3) Use the area nssa command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to configure the specified area ID to function as an NSSA. If the area has not been previously created, this command creates the area and then applies the NSSA distinction. If the area already exists, the NSSA distinction is added or modified. Use the no form of the command to remove the NSSA distinction from the area.
PAGE 1146
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1146 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration If no metric is defined, 10 is the default configuration. The default role is candidate. Command Mode Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures not-so-stubby-area 10 as an NSSA.
PAGE 1147
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1147 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • metric — Metric value for default route. (Range: 1-16777214) • comparable — Metric Type (nssa-external 1). • non-comparable — Metric Type (nssa-external 2). Default Configuration If no metric is defined, 10 is the default configuration. Command Mode Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1148
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1148 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures the area 1 NSSA ABR so that learned external routes will not be redistributed to the NSSA.
PAGE 1149
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1149 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example configures the area 1 NSSA so that summary LSAs are not advertised into the NSSA. console(config)#ipv6 router ospf console(config-rtr)#area 1 nssa no-summary area nssa translator-role Use the area nssa translator-role command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode to configure the translator role of the NSSA. Use the no form of the command to remove the configuration.
PAGE 1150
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1150 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-rtr)#area 1 nssa translator-role always area nssa translator-stab-intv Use the area nssa translator-stab-intv command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode to configure the translator stability interval of the NSSA. The stability interval is the period of time that an elected translator continues to perform its duties after it determines that its translator status has been deposed by another router.
PAGE 1151
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1151 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM area range (Router OSPFv3) Use the area range command in Router OSPF Configuration mode to configure a summary prefix for routes learned in a given area. If the area has not been previously created, this command creates the area and then applies the range parameters. There are two types of area ranges. An area range can be configured to summarize intra-area routes.
PAGE 1152
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1152 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines The LSDB type must be specified by either summarylink or nssaexternallink, and the advertising of the area range can be allowed or suppressed. Example The following example creates an area range for the area 1 NSSA.
PAGE 1153
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1153 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example creates a stub area for area 1. console(config)#ipv6 router ospf console(config-rtr)#area 1 stub area stub no-summary Use the area stub no-summary command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode disable the import of Summary LSAs for the stub area identified by area-id .
PAGE 1154
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1154 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example prevents Summary LSAs from being advertised into the area 1 NSSA. console(config)#ipv6 router ospf console(config-rtr)#area 1 stub no-summary area virtual-link Use the area virtual-link command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode to create the OSPF virtual interface for the specified area-id and neighbor router.
PAGE 1155
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1155 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration Parameter Default area-id No area ID is predefined. router-id No router ID is predefined. hello-interval seconds 10 seconds retransmit-interval seconds 5 seconds transmit-delay seconds 1 second dead-interval seconds 40 seconds Command Mode Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1156
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1156 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM area virtual-link dead-interval Use the area virtual-link dead-interval command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode to configure the dead interval for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by areaid and neighbor. Syntax area areaid virtual-link neighbor dead-interval seconds no area areaid virtual-link neighbor dead-interval • areaid — Valid OSPFv3 area identifier. • neighbor — Router ID of neighbor.
PAGE 1157
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1157 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax area areaid virtual-link neighbor hello-interval seconds no area areaid virtual-link neighbor hello-interval • areaid — Valid OSPFv3 area identifier. • neighbor — Router ID of neighbor. • seconds — Hello interval. (Range: 1-65535) Default Configuration 10 is the default value for seconds. Command Mode Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1158
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1158 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • neighbor — Router ID of neighbor. • seconds — Retransmit interval. (Range: 0-3600) Default Configuration 5 is the default value for seconds. Command Mode Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures the retransmit interval of 20 seconds for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by area 1 and its neighbor.
PAGE 1159
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1159 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration 1 is the default value for seconds. Command Mode Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures a 20-second transmit delay for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by area 1 and its neighbor.
PAGE 1160
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1160 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter type-value Description 1 External type-1 route. 2 External type-2 route. Default Configuration The default metric is none and the default type is 2. Command Mode Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example controls the advertisement of default routes by defining a metric value of 100 and metric type 2.
PAGE 1161
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1161 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets a default of 100 for the metric of distributed routes. console(config)#ipv6 router ospf console(config-rtr)#default-metric 100 distance ospf The distance ospf command sets the preference values of OSPF route types in the router.
PAGE 1162
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1162 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example The following example sets a route preference value of 100 for intra OSPF in the router. console(config)#ipv6 router ospf console(config-rtr)#distance ospf intra 100 enable Use the enable command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode to enable administrative mode of OSPF in the router (active).
PAGE 1163
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1163 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM exit-overflow-interval Use the exit-overflow-interval command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode to configure the exit overflow interval for OSPF. It describes the number of seconds after entering Overflow state that a router will wait before attempting to leave the Overflow State. This allows the router to originate non-default AS-external-LSAs again. When set to 0, the router will not leave Overflow State until restarted.
PAGE 1164
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1164 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM overflow state. The router never holds more than the external LSDB limit non-default AS-external- LSAs in it database. The external LSDB limit MUST be set identically in all routers attached to the OSPF backbone and/or any regular OSPF area. Syntax external-lsdb-limit limit no external-lsdb-limit • limit — External LSDB limit for OSPF (Range: -1-2147483647) Default Configuration -1 is the default value for limit.
PAGE 1165
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1165 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration Disabled is the default configuration. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example enables OSPF on VLAN 15.
PAGE 1166
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1166 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example defines the OSPF area to which VLAN 15 belongs. console(config)#interface vlan 15 console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 ospf area 100 ipv6 ospf cost Use the ipv6 ospf cost command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the cost on an OSPF interface. Use the no form of the command to return the cost to the default value.
PAGE 1167
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1167 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ipv6 ospf dead-interval Use the ipv6 ospf dead-interval command in Interface Configuration mode to set the OSPF dead interval for the specified interface. Syntax ipv6 ospf dead-interval seconds no ipv6 ospf dead-interval • seconds — A valid positive integer, which represents the length of time in seconds that a router's Hello packets have not been seen before its neighbor routers declare that the router is down.
PAGE 1168
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1168 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ipv6 ospf hello-interval seconds no ipv6 ospf hello-interval • seconds — A valid positive integer which represents the length of time of the OSPF hello interval. The value must be the same for all routers attached to a network. (Range: 1-65535 seconds) Default Configuration 10 seconds is the default value of seconds. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode.
PAGE 1169
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1169 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN, Tunnel, Loopback) mode. User Guidelines OSPF Database Description packets specify the size of the largest IP packet that can be sent without fragmentation on the interface. When a router receives a Database Description packet, it examines the MTU advertised by the neighbor.
PAGE 1170
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1170 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines Normally, the network type is determined from the physical IP network type. By default all Ethernet networks are OSPF-type broadcast. Similarly, tunnel interfaces default to point-to-point. When an Ethernet port is used as a single large bandwidth IP network between two routers, the network type can be point-to-point since there are only two routers.
PAGE 1171
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1171 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets the OSPF priority at 50 for VLAN 15. console(config)#interface vlan 15 console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 ospf priority 50 ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval Use the ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval command in Interface Configuration mode to set the OSPF retransmit interval for the specified interface.
PAGE 1172
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1172 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-if-vlan15)#ipv6 ospf retransmitinterval 100 ipv6 ospf transmit-delay Use the ipv6 ospf transmit-delay command in Interface Configuration mode to set the OSPF Transmit Delay for the specified interface. Syntax ipv6 ospf transmit-delay seconds no ipv6 ospf transmit-delay • seconds — OSPF transmit delay for the specified interface.
PAGE 1173
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1173 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ipv6 router ospf Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example Use the following command to enable OSPFv3. console(config)#ipv6 router ospf maximum-paths Use the maximum-paths command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode to set the number of paths that OSPF can report for a given destination.
PAGE 1174
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1174 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example sets the number of paths that OSPF can report for a destination to 1. console(config)#ipv6 router ospf console(config-rtr)#maximum-paths 1 nsf Use this command to enable OSPF graceful restart. Use the “no” form of this command to disable graceful restart.
PAGE 1175
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1175 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM everything that goes with that (i.e., flooding of LSAs, SPF runs). Helpful neighbors continue to forward packets through the restarting router. The restarting router relearns the network topology from its helpful neighbors. This implementation of graceful restart restarting router behavior is only useful with a router stack. Graceful restart does not work on a standalone, single-unit router.
PAGE 1176
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1176 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM nsf helper strict-lsa-checking Use the nsf-helper strict-lsa-checking command to require that an OSPF helpful neighbor exit helper mode whenever a topology change occurs. Use the “no” form of this command to allow OSPF to continue as a helpful neighbor in spite of topology changes.
PAGE 1177
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1177 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax nsf [ietf ] restart-interval seconds no nsf [ietf] restart-interval • ietf — This keyword is used to distinguish the IETF standard implementation of graceful restart from other implementations. Since the IETF implementation is the only one supported, this keyword is optional. • seconds — The number of seconds that the restarting router asks its neighbors to wait before exiting helper mode.
PAGE 1178
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1178 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration Passive interface mode is disabled by default. Command Mode Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config-router)#passive-interface vlan 1 passive-interface default The passive-interface default command enables the global passive mode by default for all interfaces. It overrides any interface level passive mode.
PAGE 1179
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1179 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM redistribute Use the redistribute command in Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode to configure the OSPFv3 protocol to allow redistribution of routes from the specified source protocol/routers. Syntax redistribute {static | connected} [metric metric] [metric-type {1 | 2}] [tag tag ] no redistribute {static | connected} [metric] [metric-type] [tag] • metric — Metric value used for default routes. (Range: 0-16777214) • tag — Tag.
PAGE 1180
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1180 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax router-id router-id • router-id — Router OSPF identifier. (Range: 0-4294967295) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Router OSPFv3 Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets a 4-digit dotted-decimal number identifying the Router OSPF ID as 2.3.4.5. console(config)#ipv6 router ospf console(config-rtr)#router-id 2.3.4.
PAGE 1181
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1181 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines Some of the information below displays only if you enable OSPF and configure certain features. The following fields may be displayed: Field Description Router ID A 32-bit integer in dotted decimal format identifying the router about which information is displayed. This is a configured value. OSPF Admin Mode Shows whether OSPF is administratively enabled or disabled.
PAGE 1182
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1182 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ABR Status Shows whether the router is an OSPF Area Border Router. ASBR Status Indicates whether the router is an autonomous system border router. Router automatically becomes an ASBR when it is configured to redistribute routes learned from another protocol.
PAGE 1183
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1183 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Maximum Number The maximum number of entries that can be on neighbors’ of Retransmit retransmit lists at any given time. This is the sum for all Entries neighbors. When OSPF receives an LSA and cannot allocate a new retransmit list entry, the router does not acknowledge the LSA, expecting the sender to retransmit.
PAGE 1184
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1184 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console#show ipv6 ospf Router ID...................................... 0.0.0.2 OSPF Admin Mode................................ Enable ASBR Mode...................................... Disable ABR Status..................................... Disable Exit Overflow Interval......................... 0 External LSA Count............................. 0 External LSA Checksum.......................... 0 New LSAs Originated.......................
PAGE 1185
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1185 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode User EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console#show ipv6 ospf abr Type Router Id ---- -------- Cost ---- Area ID Next Hop -------- Next Hop Intf ----------------------- ----- INTRA 3.3.3.3 10 0.0.0.1 FE80::211:88FF:FE2A:3CB3 vlan11 INTRA 4.4.4.4 10 0.0.0.
PAGE 1186
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1186 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays information about area 1. console#show ipv6 ospf area 1 AreaID........................................ 0.0.0.1 External Routing.............................. Import External LSAs Spf Runs...................................... 0 Area Border Router Count...................... 0 Area LSA Count................................ 0 Area LSA Checksum............................. 0 Stub Mode...............
PAGE 1187
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1187 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM INTRA 4.4.4.4 10 0.0.0.1 FE80::210:18FF:FE82:8E1 vlan12 show ipv6 ospf border-routers Use the show ipv6 ospf command to display internal OSPFv3 routes to reach Area Border Routers (ABR) and Autonomous System Boundary Routers (ASBR). This command takes no options. Syntax show ipv6 ospf border-routers Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode.
PAGE 1188
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1188 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • nssa-external — Displays NSSA external LSAs. • prefix — Displays intra-area Prefix LSA. • router — Displays router LSAs. • unknown — Displays unknown area, AS or link-scope LSAs. • link-state-id — Specifies a valid link state identifier (LSID). • adv-router — Shows the LSAs that are restricted by the advertising router. • router-id — Specifies a valid router identifier.
PAGE 1189
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1189 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Inter Network States (Area 0.0.0.0) Adv Router Link Id Age Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt -------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------1.1.1.1 1 323 80000001 3970 2.2.2.2 1 322 80000001 1B8A 1.1.1.1 2 293 80000001 3529 2.2.2.2 2 375 80000001 FC5E Link States (Area 0.0.0.0) Adv Router Link Id Age Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt -------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------1.
PAGE 1190
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1190 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Inter Network States (Area 0.0.0.1) Adv Router Link Id Age Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt -------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------1.1.1.1 16 4 80000001 CA7C 2.2.2.2 18 3 80000001 B28D Link States (Area 0.0.0.1) Adv Router Link Id Age Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt -------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------1.1.1.1 634 441 80000003 B877 V6E--R- 2.2.2.
PAGE 1191
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1191 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the number of each type of LSA in the database and the total number of LSAs in the database. console#show ipv6 ospf database database-summary OSPF Router with ID (0.0.0.2) Router database summary Router......................................... 0 Network........................................
PAGE 1192
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1192 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show ipv6 ospf interface [interface-type interface-number] Syntax Description Parameter Description interface-type The interface type, VLAN, tunnel or loopback interface-number The valid interface number, a valid VLAN ID, tunnel identifier (Range: 0–7) or loopback identifier (Range: 0–7). Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1193
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1193 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Iftransit Delay Interval....................... 1 Authentication Type............................ None Metric Cost.................................... 10 (computed) OSPF Mtu-ignore................................ Disable OSPF cannot be initialized on this interface.
PAGE 1194
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1194 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ipv6 ospf interface stats Use the show ipv6 ospf interface stats command in User EXEC mode to display the statistics for a specific interface. The command only displays information if OSPF is enabled. Syntax show ipv6 ospf interface stats vlan vlan-id • vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1195
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1195 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM LSAs Received.................................. 660 Originate New LSAs............................. 853 Sent Packets................................... 1013 Received Packets............................... 893 Discards....................................... 48 Bad Version.................................... 0 Virtual Link Not Found......................... 9 Area Mismatch..................................
PAGE 1196
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1196 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays ospf interface vlan information. console#show ipv6 ospf interface vlan 10 IPv6 Address............................. FE80::2FC:E3FF:FE90:44 ifIndex.................................. 634 OSPF Admin Mode.......................... Enable OSPF Area ID............................. 0.0.0.1 Router Priority..........
PAGE 1197
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1197 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ipv6 ospf neighbor Use the show ipv6 ospf neighbor command in Privileged EXEC mode to display information about OSPF neighbors. If a neighbor IP address is not specified, the output displays summary information in a table. If an interface or tunnel is specified, only the information for that interface or tunnel displays. The information below only displays if OSPF is enabled and the interface has a neighbor.
PAGE 1198
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1198 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ID --------- -------- ---- ----------- Time ------------- ---- console#show ipv6 ospf neighbor interface tunnel 1 IP Address..................................... Err ifIndex........................................ 619 OSPF Admin Mode................................ Enable OSPF Area ID................................... 0.0.0.0 Router Priority................................ 1 Retransmit Interval............................
PAGE 1199
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1199 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays information about the area ranges for area 1.
PAGE 1200
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1200 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ------------ ------------0.0.0.10 ---------- Normal ----------------- 1 Enable show ipv6 ospf virtual-links Use the show ipv6 ospf virtual-links command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the OSPF Virtual Interface information for a specific area and neighbor or for all areas in the system.
PAGE 1201
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1201 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Metric......................................... 10 Neighbor State................................. Full show ipv6 ospf virtual-link brief Use the show ipv6 ospf virtual-link brief command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the OSPFV3 Virtual Interface information for all areas in the system. Syntax show ipv6 ospf virtual-link brief Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode.
PAGE 1202
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1203
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1203 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Router Discovery Protocol Commands 56 Routers can be configured to periodically send router discovery messages to announce their presence to locally attached hosts. The router discovery message advertises one or more IP addresses on the router that hosts can use as their default gateway.
PAGE 1204
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1204 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax Description Parameter Description multicast Configure the address that the interface uses to send the router discovery advertisements to be 224.0.0.1, the all-hosts IP multicast address. Use the no form of the command to use 255.255.255.255, the limited broadcast address. holdtime seconds Integer value in seconds of the the holdtime field of the router advertisement sent from this interface.
PAGE 1205
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1205 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example enables router discovery on the selected interface. console(config)#interface vlan 15 console(config-if-vlan15)#ip irdp ip irdp address Use the ip irdp address command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the address that the interface uses to send the router discovery advertisements.
PAGE 1206
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1206 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example sets the limited broadcast address as the IP address for router discovery advertisements. console(config)#interface vlan 15 console(config-if-vlan15)#ip irdp address 255.255.255.255 ip irdp holdtime Use the ip irdp holdtime command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the value, in seconds, of the holdtime field of the router advertisement sent from this interface.
PAGE 1207
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1207 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config)#interface vlan 15 console(config-if-vlan15)#ip irdp holdtime 2000 ip irdp maxadvertinterval Use the ip irdp maxadvertinterval command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the maximum time, in seconds, allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface. Use the no form of the command to set the time to the default value.
PAGE 1208
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1208 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example sets maximum advertisement interval at 600 seconds for VLAN 15. console(config)#interface vlan 15 console(config-if-vlan15)#ip irdp maxadvertinterval 600 ip irdp minadvertinterval Use the ip irdp minadvertinterval command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the minimum time, in seconds, allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface.
PAGE 1209
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1209 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-if-vlan15)#ip irdp minadvertinterval 100 ip irdp multicast To send router advertisements as IP multicast packets, use the ip irdp multicast command in Interface Configuration mode. To send router advertisements to the limited broadcast address (255.255.255.255), use the no form of this command.
PAGE 1210
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1210 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip irdp preference Use the ip irdp preference command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the preference of the address as a default router address relative to other router addresses on the same subnet. Use the no form of the command to set the preference to the default value.
PAGE 1211
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1211 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example shows router discovery information for VLAN 15.
PAGE 1212
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1213
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1213 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Routing Information Protocol Commands 57 The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) has been a long-standing protocol used by routers for exchanging route information. RIP is a distance vector protocol whereby each route is characterized by the number of gateways, or hops, a packet must traverse to reach its intended destination. Categorized as an interior gateway protocol, RIP operates within the scope of an autonomous system.
PAGE 1214
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1214 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no auto-summary Default Configuration Disabled is the default configuration. Command Mode Router RIP Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console(config-router)#auto-summary default-information originate Use the default-information originate command in Router RIP Configuration mode to control the advertisement of default routes.
PAGE 1215
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1215 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM default-metric Use the default-metric command in Router RIP Configuration mode to set a default for the metric of distributed routes. Use the no form of the command to return the metric to the default value. Syntax default-metric number-value no default-metric • number-value — Metric for the distributed routes. (Range: 1-15) Default Configuration Default metric is not configured by default.
PAGE 1216
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1216 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • integer — RIP route preference. (Range: 1-255) Default Configuration 15 is the default configuration. Command Mode Router RIP Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets the route preference value of RIP in the router at 100.
PAGE 1217
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1217 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Router RIP Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example elects access list ACL40 to filter routes received from the source protocol.
PAGE 1218
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1218 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(config-router)#enable hostroutesaccept Use the hostroutesaccept command in Router RIP Configuration mode to enable the RIP hostroutesaccept mode. Use the no form of the command to disable the RIP hostroutesaccept mode. Syntax hostroutesaccept no hostroutesaccept Default Configuration Enabled is the default configuration. Command Mode Router RIP Configuration mode.
PAGE 1219
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1219 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration Disabled is the default configuration. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console(config-if-vlan2)#ip rip console(config-if-vlan2)#no ip rip ip rip authentication Use the ip rip authentication command in Interface Configuration Mode to set the RIP Version 2 Authentication Type and Key for the specified VLAN.
PAGE 1220
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1220 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets the RIP Version 2 Authentication Type and Key for VLAN 11.
PAGE 1221
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1221 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example allows no RIP control packets to be received by VLAN 11. console(config-if-vlan11)#ip rip receive version none ip rip send version Use the ip rip sent version command in Interface Configuration mode to configure the interface to allow RIP control packets of the specified version to be sent.
PAGE 1222
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1222 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example allows no RIP control packets to be sent by VLAN 11. console(config-if-vlan11)#ip rip send version none redistribute The redistribute command configures RIP protocol to redistribute routes from the specified source protocol/routers. If the source protocol is OSPF, there are five possible match options.
PAGE 1223
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1223 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Router RIP Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console(config-router)#redistribute ospf metric 10 match nssa-external 1 console(config-router)#redistribute connected metric 1 router rip Use the router rip command in Global Configuration mode to enter Router RIP mode. Syntax router rip Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1224
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1224 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip rip Use the show ip rip command in Privileged EXEC mode to display information relevant to the RIP router. Syntax show ip rip Default Configuration The command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays information relevant to the RIP router. console#show ip rip RIP Admin Mode.................................
PAGE 1225
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1225 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Metric......................................... 10 Match Value.................................... 'nssa-external 1' Distribute List................................ Not configured show ip rip interface Use the show ip rip interface command in Privileged EXEC mode to display information related to a particular RIP interface. Syntax show ip rip interface vlan vlan-id • vlan-id — Valid VLAN ID.
PAGE 1226
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1226 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Authentication Key............................. "pass123" Authentication Key ID.......................... 35 Bad Packets Received........................... ----Bad Routes Received............................ ----Updates Sent................................... ----- show ip rip interface brief Use the show ip rip interface brief command in Privileged EXEC mode to display general information for each RIP interface.
PAGE 1227
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1227 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM split-horizon Use the split-horizon command in Router RIP Configuration mode to set the RIP split horizon mode. Use the no form of the command to return the mode to the default value. Syntax split-horizon {none | simple | poison} no split-horizon • none — RIP does not use split horizon to avoid routing loops. • simple — RIP uses split horizon to avoid routing loops.
PAGE 1228
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1229
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1229 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Tunnel Interface Commands 58 PowerConnect provides for the creation, deletion, and management of tunnel interfaces. They are dynamic interfaces that are created and deleted by user configuration. Tunnel interfaces are used for the following purposes. • IPv4 tunnels • IPv6 tunnels Each router interface (port or VLAN interface) may have associated tunnel interfaces. Each interface can have multiple tunnel interfaces.
PAGE 1230
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1230 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM interface tunnel Use the interface tunnel command in Global Configuration mode to enter the interface configuration mode for a tunnel. Syntax interface tunnel tunnel-id no interface tunnel tunnel-id • tunnel-id — Tunnel identifier. (Range: 0–7) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1231
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1231 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Examples The following examples show the parameters related to an individual tunnel and to all tunnel interfaces. console#show interfaces tunnel 1 Interface Link Status.......................... down MTU size.......................................
PAGE 1232
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1232 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration (Tunnel) mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example specifies the destination transport address of tunnel 1. console(config)#interface tunnel 1 console(config-if-tunnel1)#tunnel destination 10.1.1.1 tunnel mode ipv6ip Use the tunnel mode ipv6ip command in Interface Configuration mode to specify the mode of the tunnel.
PAGE 1233
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1233 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config)#interface tunnel 1 console(config-if-tunnel1)#tunnel mode ipv6ip console(config-if-tunnel1)#tunnel mode ipv6ip 6to4 tunnel source Use the tunnel source command in Interface Configuration mode to specify the source transport address of the tunnel, either explicitly or by reference to an interface.
PAGE 1234
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1235
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1235 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 59 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands An end station running IP needs to know the address of its first hop router. While some network administrators choose to install dynamic router discovery protocols such as DHCP, others prefer to statically allocate router addresses. If the router identified by such a statically allocated address goes down, the end station loses connectivity.
PAGE 1236
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1236 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM RFC defines a new configuration option that allows the router to accept any packet sent to a VRRP address, regardless of whether the VRRP Master is the address owner. The Pingable VRRP Interface feature, when enabled, allows the VRRP master to respond to both fragmented and unfragmented ICMP echo requests packets destined to a VRRP address (or addresses). A virtual router in backup state discards these.
PAGE 1237
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1237 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Interface Tracking For interface tracking, VRRP is a routing event client. When a routing interface goes up or down (or routing is disabled globally, implying all routing interfaces are down), VRRP checks if the interface is tracked. If so, it adjusts the priority. Interface tracking is useful for tracking interfaces that are not configured for VRRP. Only IP interfaces are tracked.
PAGE 1238
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1238 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands ip vrrp Use the ip vrrp command in Global Configuration mode to enable the administrative mode of VRRP for the router. Use the no form of the command to disable the administrative mode of VRRP for the router. Syntax ip vrrp no ip vrrp Default Configuration VRRP is disabled by default. Command Mode Global Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1239
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1239 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • vrid — Virtual router identification. (Range: 1-255) Default Configuration The default configuration is disabled. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. vrrp authentication Use the vrrp authentication command in Interface Configuration mode to set the authentication details value for the virtual router configured on a specified interface.
PAGE 1240
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1240 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets the authorization details value for VRRP router group 5 on VLAN 15.
PAGE 1241
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1241 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines Descriptions containing spaces must be wrapped with quotes. Example The following example creates virtual router group 5 on VLAN 15 and configures its description.
PAGE 1242
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1242 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode. User Guidelines The virtual router IP addresses must be on the local subnet configured on the VLAN. To configure vrrp, perform the following steps: 1 Enable ip routing in global configuration mode. 2 Enable ip vrrp globally. 3 Set an IP address on the desired interface where VRRP is to be configured. 4 Configure the VRRP group ID on the selected interface.
PAGE 1243
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1243 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax vrrp vr-id mode no vrrp vr-id mode • vr-id — The virtual router identifier. (Range: 1-255) Default Configuration Disabled is the default configuration. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example enables the virtual router for VLAN 15.
PAGE 1244
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1244 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description seconds The number of seconds the VRRP router will wait before issuing an advertisement claiming master ownership. Default Configuration Enabled is the default configuration. Delay defaults to 0 seconds. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode. User Guidelines As per the VRRP RFC, when preemption is enabled, the backup router discards the advertisements until the masterdowntimer starts.
PAGE 1245
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1245 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • level — Priority value for the interface. (Range: 1-254) Default Configuration Priority has a default value of 100. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets the priority value for the virtual router 5 on VLAN 15.
PAGE 1246
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1246 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets the frequency at which the VLAN 15 virtual router 5 sends a virtual router advertisement.
PAGE 1247
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1247 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following configures VLAN 15 virtual router to learn the advertisement interval used by the master virtual router. console(config-if-vlan15)#vrrp 5 timers learn vrrp track interface Use the vrrp track interface command in Interface Configuration mode to alter the priority of the VRRP router based on the availability of its interfaces. It is useful for tracking interfaces that are not configured for VRRP.
PAGE 1248
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1248 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax Description Parameter Description group The virtual router identifier. (Range: 1-255) vlan vlan-id Valid VLAN ID. Priority decrement value for the tracked interface. (Range: 1- priority 254) Default Configuration No interfaces are tracked. The default decrement priority is 10. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1249
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1249 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Use the no form of this command to remove the route from the tracked list or to restore the priority decrement to its default. When removing a tracked IP route from the tracked list, priority should be incremented by the decrement value if the route is not reachable.
PAGE 1250
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1250 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show vrrp Use the show vrrp command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode to display the global VRRP configuration and status as well as the brief or detailed status of one or all VRRP groups. Syntax show vrrp [brief | group] Syntax Description Parameter Description group The virtual router group identifier. Range 1-255. brief Provide a summary view of the VRRP group information.
PAGE 1251
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1251 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Vlan 7 – Group 1 Primary IP Address............................. 192.168.5.55 VMAC Address................................... 0000.5E00.0101 Authentication Type............................ None Priority....................................... 60 Configured Priority............................ 100 Advertisement Interval (secs).................. 10 Accept Mode.................................... Enable Pre-empt Mode......................
PAGE 1252
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1252 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Track Route Reachable ......................... False Track Route DecrementPriority ................. 20 Vlan 7 – Group 2 Primary IP Address............................. 192.168.5.65 VMAC Address................................... 0000.5E00.0202 Authentication Type............................ None Priority....................................... 60 Configured Priority............................ 100 Advertisement Interval (secs).....
PAGE 1253
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1253 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Track Route (pfx/len) ......................... 10.10.10.0/24 Track Route Reachable ......................... False Track Route DecrementPriority ................. 20 console#show vrrp brief Interface Grp Prio IP Address Mode State --------- --- ---- -------------- ------ ------------ V1 1 2 60 0.0.0.0 Disable Initialize V1 2 5 70 192.168.5.
PAGE 1254
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1254 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays all configuration information about the VLAN 15 virtual router. console#show vrrp interface vlan 7 Vlan 7 – Group 1 Primary IP Address........................... 192.168.5.55 VMAC Address................................ 0000.5E00.0101 Authentication Type............................ None Priority..
PAGE 1255
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1255 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM vlan2 5 192.168.5.55 Enable Initialize The following example displays all statistical information about the VLAN 15 virtual router. console#show vrrp interface vlan 15 stats Vlan 15 – Group 5 UpTime........................... 0 days 0 hrs 0 mins 0 secs Protocol....................................... IP State Transitioned to Master................... 0 Advertisement Received.........................
PAGE 1256
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1256 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays all configuration information about the virtual router on the selected interface. console#show vrrp interface brief Interface VRID IP Address Mode --------- ---- -------------- ------ State ------------ vlan1 2 0.0.0.0 Disable Initialize vlan2 5 192.168.5.
PAGE 1257
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1257 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays all statistical information about the VLAN 15 virtual router. console#show vrrp interface stats vlan 15 5 UpTime..................... 0 days 0 hrs 0 mins 0 secs Protocol....................................... IP State Transitioned to Master................... 0 Advertisement Received......................... 0 Advertisement Interval Errors.................. 0 Authentication Failure...............
PAGE 1258
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1258 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no vrrp vrid accept-mode • vrid — Virtual router identification. (Range: 1-255) Default Configuration The default configuration is disabled. Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. show ip vrrp interface Use the show ip vrrp interface command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode to display the configured value for Accept Mode.
PAGE 1259
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1259 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays all configuration information about the VLAN 15 virtual router. console#show ip vrrp interface vlan2 1 Primary IP Address........................... 10.10.10.1 VMAC Address............................. 00:00:5E:00:01:01 Authentication Type............................ None Priority....................................... 100 Configured Priority.
PAGE 1260
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1261
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1262
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1263
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1261 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Auto-Install Commands 61 Auto-Install provides automatic update of the image and configuration of PowerConnect devices on boot up from a TFTP server as controlled by received DHCP options. It plays a critical role in the PowerConnect offering of touchless or low-touch provisioning, in which configuration and imaging of a device is greatly simplified.
PAGE 1264
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1262 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 4 Support for the Auto-Install process from a TFTP server operationally enabling the DHCP client on designated management interfaces during the Auto-Install process. The end user configuration remains unchanged. Management interfaces include the service port or routing interfaces in a saved config.
PAGE 1265
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1263 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Config User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. boot auto-copy-sw allow-downgrade Use the boot auto-copy-sw allow-downgrade command in Privileged EXEC mode to enable downgrading the firmware version on the stack member if the firmware version on the manager is older than the firmware version on the member. Use the no form of the command to disable downgrading the image.
PAGE 1266
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1264 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM boot host autoreboot Use the boot host autoreboot command in Global Configuration mode to enable rebooting the device (no administrative intervention) when the autoimage is successfully downloaded. Use the no form of this command to disable rebooting the device (no administrative intervention) when the autoimage is successfully downloaded.
PAGE 1267
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1265 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM boot host autosave Use the boot host autosave command in Global Configuration mode to enable automatically saving the downloaded configuration on the switch. Use the no form of this command to disable automatically saving the downloaded configuration on the switch. Syntax boot host autosave no boot host autosave Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description.
PAGE 1268
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1266 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Install process is triggered. Use the no form of this command to disable AutoInstall on the next reboot if the reboot occurs with a saved startup configuration. If you give this command while the Auto-Install process is running, the Auto-Install process terminates. The Auto-Install process has an internal timer that retries failed installations for ten minutes.
PAGE 1269
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1267 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax boot host retrycount count no boot host retrycount • count —The number of attempts to download a configuration (Range: 1–6). Default Configuration The default number of configuration download attempts is three.
PAGE 1270
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1268 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines The show switch command also displays the switch firmware synchronization status.
PAGE 1271
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1269 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1272
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1273
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1271 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Captive Portal Commands 62 The Captive Portal feature is a software implementation that blocks both wired and wireless clients from accessing the network until user verification has been established. Verification can be configured to allow access for both guest and authenticated users. Authenticated users must be validated against a database of authorized Captive Portal users before access is granted.
PAGE 1274
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1275
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1273 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Captive Portal Global Commands authentication timeout Use the authentication timeout command to configure the authentication timeout. If the user does not enter valid credentials within this time limit, the authentication page needs to be served again in order for the client to gain access to the network. Use the “no” form of this command to reset the authentication timeout to the default.
PAGE 1276
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1274 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax captive-portal Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config)#captive-portal console(config-CP)# enable Use the enable command to globally enable captive portal. Use the “no” form of this command to globally disable captive portal.
PAGE 1277
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1275 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(config-CP)#enable http port Use the http port command to configure an additional HTTP port for captive portal to monitor. Use the “no” form of this command to remove the additional HTTP port from monitoring. Syntax http port port-num no http port • port-num —The port number to monitor (Range: 1–65535). Default Configuration Captive portal only monitors port 80 by default.
PAGE 1278
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1276 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no https port • port-num —The port number to monitor (Range: 1–65535). Default Configuration Captive portal only monitors port 443 by default. Command Mode Captive Portal Configuration mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 1279
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1277 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console#show captive-portal Administrative Mode....................... Disabled Operational Status........................ Disabled Disable Reason................ Administrator Disabled Captive Portal IP Address................. 1.2.3.4 show captive-portal status Use the show captive-portal status command to report the status of all captive portal instances in the system.
PAGE 1280
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1278 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Configured Captive Portals..................... 1 Active Captive Portals......................... 0 Local Supported Users.......................... 128 Configured Local Users......................... 3 System Supported Users......................... 1024 Authenticated Users............................ 0 Captive Portal Configuration Commands The commands in this section are related to captive portal configurations.
PAGE 1281
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1279 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM configuration Use the configuration command to enter the captive portal instance mode. The captive portal configuration identified by CP ID 1 is the default CP configuration. The system supports a total of ten CP configurations. Use the “no” form of this command to delete a configuration. The default configuration (1) cannot be deleted. Syntax configuration cp-id no configuration cp-id • cp-id —Captive Portal ID (Range: 1–10).
PAGE 1282
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1280 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration Configurations are enabled by default Command Mode Captive Portal Instance mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config-CP 2)#no enable group Use the group command to configure the group number for a captive portal configuration.
PAGE 1283
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1281 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(config-CP 2)#group 2 interface Use the interface command to associate an interface with a captive portal configuration. Use the “no” form of this command to remove an association. Syntax interface interface no interface interface interface —An interface or range of interfaces. Default Configuration No interfaces are associated with a configuration by default. Command Mode Captive Portal Instance Config mode.
PAGE 1284
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1282 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • web-id — The locale number (Range: Only locale 1 is supported) Default Configuration Locale 1 is configured by default. Command Mode Captive Portal Instance mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. name (Captive Portal) Use the name command to configure the name for a captive portal configuration. Use the “no” form of this command to remove a configuration name.
PAGE 1285
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1283 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM protocol Use the protocol command to configure the protocol mode for a captive portal configuration. Syntax protocol { http | https } Default Configuration The default protocols mode is https. Command Mode Captive Portal Instance mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 1286
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1284 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config-CP 2)#redirect redirect-url Use the redirect-url command to configure the redirect URL for a captive portal configuration. Syntax redirect-url url • url —The URL for redirection (Range: 1–512 characters). Default Configuration There is no redirect URL configured by default. Command Mode Captive Portal Instance mode.
PAGE 1287
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1285 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no session-timeout • timeout —Session timeout. 0 indicates timeout not enforced (Range: 0–86400 seconds). Default Configuration There is no session timeout by default. Command Mode Captive Portal Instance mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 1288
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1286 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config-CP 2)#verification local Captive Portal Client Connection Commands captive-portal client deauthenticate Use the captive-portal client deauthenticate command to deauthenticate a specific captive portal client. Syntax captive-portal client deauthenticate macaddr • macaddr — Client MAC address.
PAGE 1289
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1287 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show captive-portal client [ macaddr ] status • macaddr — Client MAC address. Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 1290
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1288 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show captive-portal configuration [ cp-id ] client status cp-id —Captive Portal ID. • Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 1291
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1289 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show captive-portal interface {gigabitethernet unit/slot/port | tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port} client status Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 1292
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1290 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Captive Portal Interface Commands show captive-portal interface configuration status Use the show captive-portal interface configuration status command to display the interface to configuration assignments for all captive portal configurations or for a specific configuration. Syntax show captive-portal interface configuration [ cp-id ] status • cp-id —Captive Portal ID.
PAGE 1293
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1291 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Captive Portal Local User Commands clear captive-portal users Use the clear captive-portal users command to delete all captive portal user entries. Syntax clear captive-portal users Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 1294
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1292 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Captive Portal Configuration mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config-CP)#no user 1 show captive-portal user Use the show captive-portal user command to display all configured users or a specific user in the captive portal local user database. Syntax show captive-portal user [ user-id ] • user-id — User ID (Range: 1–128).
PAGE 1295
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1293 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 1 user123 14400 1 Default 2 user234 0 1 Default 2 group2 console#show captive-portal user 1 User ID........................................ 1 User Name...................................... user123 Password Configured............................ Yes Session Timeout................................
PAGE 1296
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1294 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config-CP)#user 1 group 3 user-logout Use the user-logout command in Captive Portal Instance mode to enable captive portal users to log out of the portal (versus having the session time out). Use the no form of the command to return the user logout configuration to the default.
PAGE 1297
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1295 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-CP 1)#user-logout console(config-CP 1)#no user-logout user name Use the user name command to modify the user name for a local captive portal user. Syntax user user-id name name • user-id — User ID (Range: 1–128). • name — user name (Range: 1–32 characters). Default Configuration There is no name for a user by default. Command Mode Captive Portal Configuration mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines.
PAGE 1298
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1296 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • enc-password —User password in encrypted form. Default Configuration There are no users configured by default. Command Mode Captive Portal Configuration mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 1299
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1297 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config-CP)#user 1 session-timeout 86400 console(config-CP)#no user 1 session-timeout Captive Portal Status Commands show captive-portal configuration Use the show captive-portal configuration command to display the operational status of each captive portal configuration. Syntax show captive-portal configuration cp-id cp-id —Captive Portal ID.
PAGE 1300
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1298 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Configured Locales........................ 1 Authenticated Users....................... 0 show captive-portal configuration interface Use the show captive-portal configuration interface command to display information about all interfaces assigned to a captive portal configuration or about a specific interface assigned to a captive portal configuration.
PAGE 1301
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1299 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console#show captive-portal configuration 1 interface 1/0/1 CP ID..................................... 1 CP Name................................... cp1 Interface................................. 1/0/1 Interface Description..................... Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 1 Gigab... Operational Status........................ Disabled Disable Reason............................ Interface Not Attached Block Status..............................
PAGE 1302
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1300 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show captive-portal configuration status Use the show captive-portal configuration status command to display information about all configured captive portal configurations or about a specific captive portal configuration. Syntax show captive-portal configuration [ cp-id ] status • cp-id —Captive Portal ID. Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode.
PAGE 1303
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1301 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Group Name..................................... group123 Redirect URL Mode.............................. Enabled Redirect URL................................... www.cnn.com Session Timeout (seconds)...................... 86400 Captive Portal User Group Commands user group Use the user group command to create a user group. Use the “no” form of this command to delete a user group. The default user group (1) cannot be deleted.
PAGE 1304
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1302 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM user group moveusers Use the user group moveusers command to move a group's users to a different group. Syntax user group group-id moveusers new-group-id • group-id — Group ID (Range: 1–10). • new-group-id —Group ID (Range: 1–10). Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command. Command Mode Captive Portal Configuration mode User Guidelines The new group-id must already exist.
PAGE 1305
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1303 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Captive Portal Configuration mode. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command.
PAGE 1306
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1307
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1305 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM CLI Macro Commands 63 CLI Macros provides a convenient way to save and distribute common configurations. A CLI macro is a set of the CLI commands having a unique name. When a CLI macro is applied, the CLI commands contained within the macro are executed and added to the Running Configuration File. When the macro is applied to an interface, the existing configuration is not lost; the new commands are added configuration.
PAGE 1308
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1306 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • profile-wireless, the interface configuration, used when connecting the switch and a wireless access point. Commands in this Chapter This chapter explains the following commands: macro name macro apply macro global apply macro trace macro global trace macro description macro global description show parser macro macro name Use the macro name command in Global Configuration mode to create a user-defined macro.
PAGE 1309
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1307 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Macro Default Definition default global :profile-global default interface :profile-desktop default interface :profile-phone default interface :profile-switch default interface :profile-router default interface :profile-wireless Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Macros consist of text commands with one command per line.
PAGE 1310
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1308 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description macro-name The name of the macro. parameter The name of the parameter recognized by the macro. The parameter must begin with a dollar sign ($). value The string to be substituted within the macro for the specified parameter name. Default Configuration No parameters are substituted unless supplied on the command line.
PAGE 1311
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1309 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description value The string to be substituted within the macro for the specified parameter name. Default Configuration No parameters are substituted unless supplied on the command line. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The line number of the first error encountered is printed. The script is aborted after the first error. Commands applied are additive in nature.
PAGE 1312
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1310 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command is intended to give the administrator an easy way to remember which macros have been applied globally. All text up to the new line is included in the description. The line is appended to the global description. macro apply Use the macro apply command in Interface Configuration mode to apply a macro.
PAGE 1313
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1311 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM macro trace Use the macro trace command in Interface Configuration mode to apply and trace a macro. The command will display each line of the macro as it is executed and list any errors encountered. Syntax macro trace macro-name [parameter value] [parameter value][parameter value] no macro name name Parameter Description Parameter Description macro-name The name of the macro.
PAGE 1314
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1312 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM macro description Use the macro description command in Interface Configuration mode to append a line to the macro description. Use the no form of the command to clear the description. Syntax macro description line Parameter Description Parameter Description line The macro description. All text up to the new line is included in the description. Default Configuration There is no description by default.
PAGE 1315
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1313 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description brief Shows the list of defined macros and their type. description Shows the macro descriptions. name Shows an individual macro, including its contents. macro The name of the macro to display. interface-id The interface for which to show the macro description. Default Configuration No parameters are substituted unless supplied on the command line.
PAGE 1316
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1317
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1315 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 64 Clock Commands Real-time Clock The PowerConnect supports a real-time clock that maintains the system time across reboots. The system time is used to timestamp messages in the logging subsystem as well as for the application of time based ACLs. The administrator has the ability to configure and view the current time, time zone, and summer time settings. The earliest date that can be configured is Jan 1, 2010.
PAGE 1318
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1316 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM the link-local scoped IANA multicast address ff02::101 (reserved for SNTP) for server packets.The client logic to handle packet contents doesn’t change with support for IPv6 networks.
PAGE 1319
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1317 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays the current SNTP configuration of the device. console#show sntp configuration Polling interval: 64 seconds MD5 Authentication keys: Authentication is not required for synchronization. Trusted keys: No trusted keys. Unicast clients: Disable Unicast servers: Server Key Polling Priority --------- ----------- ----------- ---------- 10.27.128.
PAGE 1320
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1318 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Examples console#show sntp server Server Host Address: 2001::01 Server Type: IPv6 Server Stratum: 2 Server Reference Id: 158.108.96.
PAGE 1321
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1319 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Last Update Status: Success Total Unicast Requests: 955 Failed Unicast Requests: 1 --More-- or (q)uit Host Address: 3.north-america.pool.ntp.
PAGE 1322
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1320 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Examples The following example shows the status of the SNTP. console#show sntp status Client Mode: Unicast Last Update Time: MAR 30 21:21:20 2009 Unicast servers: Server Status Last response --------- ----------- -------------------------- 192.168.0.
PAGE 1323
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1321 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example, after defining the authentication key for SNTP, grants authentication. console(config)# sntp authentication-key 8 md5 ClkKey console(config)# sntp trusted-key 8 console(config)# sntp authenticate sntp authentication-key Use the sntp authentication-key command in Global Configuration mode to define an authentication key for Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP).
PAGE 1324
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1322 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config)# sntp authenticate sntp broadcast client enable Use the sntp broadcast client enable command in Global Configuration mode to enable a Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Broadcast client. To disable an SNTP Broadcast client, use the no form of this command. Syntax sntp broadcast client enable no sntp broadcast client enable Default Configuration The SNTP Broadcast client is disabled.
PAGE 1325
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1323 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • seconds — Polling interval. (Range: 64-1024 seconds, in powers of 2) Default Configuration The polling interval is 64 seconds. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines If a user enters a value which is not an exact power of two, the nearest powerof-two value is applied. Example The following example sets the polling time for the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) client to 1024 seconds.
PAGE 1326
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1324 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures the device to accept Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) traffic from the server at IP address 192.1.1.1. console(config)# sntp server 192.1.1.
PAGE 1327
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1325 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command is relevant for both received Unicast and Broadcast. Example The following defines SNTP trusted-key.
PAGE 1328
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1326 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM clock timezone hours-offset Use the clock timezone [ hours-offset ] [minutes minutes-offset] [zone acronym] command to set the offset to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If the optional parameters are not specified, they will be read as either '0' or '\0, as appropriate. Syntax clock timezone hours-offset [minutes minutes-offset] [zone acronym] • hours-offset — Hours difference from UTC.
PAGE 1329
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1327 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration User Guidelines This command has no specific user guidelines. Example console(config)#no clock timezone clock summer-time recurring Use the clock summer-time recurring {usa | eu | {week day month hh:mm week day month hh:mm}} [offset offset] [zone acronym] command to set the summertime offset to UTC recursively every year.
PAGE 1330
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1328 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration User Guidelines No specific guidelines Examples console(config)# clock summer-time recurring 1 sun jan 00:10 2 mon mar 10:00 offset 1 zone ABC clock summer-time date Use the clock summer-time date {date | month} {month | date} year hh:mm {date | month} {month | date} year hh:mm [offset offset] [zone acronym] command to set the summertime offset to UTC.
PAGE 1331
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1329 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration User Guidelines No specific guidelines Examples console(config)# clock summer-time date 1 Apr 2007 02:00 28 Oct 2007 offset 90 zone EST or console(config)# clock summer-time date Apr 1 2007 02:00 Oct 28 2007 offset 90 zone EST no clock summer-time Use the no clock summer-time command to reset the summertime configuration.
PAGE 1332
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1330 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show clock Use the show clock command in Privileged EXEC or User EXEC mode to display the time and date from the system clock. Use the show clock detail command to show the time zone and summertime configuration. Syntax Description show clock [detail] Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1333
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1331 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Acronym is PDT Recurring every year. Begins at first Sunday of April at 2:00. Ends at last Sunday of October at 2:00. Offset is 60 minutes.
PAGE 1334
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1335
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1333 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Line Configuration Scripting Commands 65 The Configuration Scripting feature allows the user to generate textformatted files representing the current system configuration. These configuration script files can be uploaded to a computer and edited, then downloaded to the system and applied to the system.
PAGE 1336
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1334 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example applies the config.scr script to the switch. console#script apply config.scr script delete Use the script delete command in Privileged EXEC mode to delete a specified script.
PAGE 1337
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1335 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console#script delete all script list Use the script list command in Privileged EXEC mode to list all scripts present on the switch as well as the remaining available space. Syntax script list Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays all scripts present on the switch.
PAGE 1338
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1336 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • scriptname — Name of the script file to be displayed. (Range: 1-31 characters) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the contents of the script file config.scr. console#script show config.scr interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 ip address 176.242.100.100 255.255.255.
PAGE 1339
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1337 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example validates the contents of the script file config.scr. console#script validate config.
PAGE 1340
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1341
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1339 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Configuration and Image File Commands 66 File System Commands CLI commands allow the user to show the contents of the current directory in the flash file system (dir command). These files may also be deleted from the flash using the delete command or renamed with the rename command. Also, the syntax of the copy command has been changed slightly to add additional flash targets and sources for the above commands.
PAGE 1342
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1340 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM delete backup-config show running-config delete backup-image show startup-config delete startup-config dir write erase boot system Use the boot system command in Privileged EXEC mode to specify the system image that the device loads at startup. Syntax boot system [unit-id][image1 | image2] • image1 | image2 — Image file.
PAGE 1343
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1341 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example loads system image image1 for the next device startup. console# boot system image1 clear config Use the clear config command in Privileged EXEC mode to restore the switch to the default configuration. Syntax clear config Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1344
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1342 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description source-url The location URL or or reserved keyword of the source file being copied. (Range: 1-160 characters.) List of valid source parameters for uploading from the switch: backup-config Uploads Backup Config file. image Uploads code file by xmodem or tftp. operational-log Uploads Operational Log file. running-config Copies system config file.
PAGE 1345
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1343 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description destinationurl The URL or reserved keyword of the destination file. (Range: 1-160 characters. List of valid destination parameters for downloading to the switch: backup-config Downloads config file using xmodem, sftp, or tftp. image Downloads code file by xmodem, ftp, sftp, or tftp. script Downloads configuration script by xmodem, sftp, or tftp. startup-config Downloads config file using xmodem or tftp.
PAGE 1346
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1344 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM The following table lists and describes reserved keywords. Reserved Keyword Description running-config Represents the current running configuration file. startup-config Represents the startup configuration file. startup-log Represents the startup syslog file. This can only be the source of a copy operation. operational-log Represents the operational syslog file. This can only be the source of a copy operation.
PAGE 1347
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1345 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines When copying files from the switch, match a source parameter with a destination URL. When copying to the switch, match a source URL to a destination parameter. FTP is only supported for image download to the switch. URLs may not exceed 160 characters in length, including filename, file path, hostname, ip address, user, and reserved keywords.
PAGE 1348
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1346 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM TFTP code transfer starting 9392640 bytes transferred... File contents are valid. File transfer operation completed successfully. console#show bootvar Image Descriptions image1 : default image image2 : Images currently available on Flash -----------------------------------------------------------------unit image1 image2 current-active next-active ------------------------------------------------------------------ 1 M.9.
PAGE 1349
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1347 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Management access will be blocked for the duration of the transfer Are you sure you want to start? (y/n) y File transfer operation completed successfully. Validating and updating the users to the IAS users database. Updated IAS users database successfully. Example – USB copy operations console#copy usb://start-config startup-config console#copy operational-log usb://olog.txt console#copy usb://backup-config.
PAGE 1350
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1348 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console#delete file1.scr Delete file1.scr (Y/N)?y delete backup-config Use the delete backup-config command in Privileged EXEC mode to delete the backup-config file. Syntax delete backup-config Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example deletes the backup-config file.
PAGE 1351
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1349 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines NOTE: The active image cannote be deleted. Example The following example deletes test file in Flash memory. console#delete backup-image Delete: image2 (y/n)? delete startup-config Use the delete startup-config command in Privileged EXEC mode to delete the startup-config file.
PAGE 1352
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1350 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console# delete startup-config Delete startup-config (y/n)? dir Use the dir command to print the contents of the flash file system. Syntax dir Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console#dir 0 drwx 2048 Jan 13 2031 17:19:54 . 0 drwx 2048 Jan 10 2031 15:58:10 ..
PAGE 1353
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1351 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM erase Use the erase command to erase the startup configuration, the backup configuration, or the backup image. Syntax erase {startup-config | backup-image | backup-config} Syntax Description Parameter Description startup-config Erases the contents of the startup configuration file. backup-image Erase the backup image. backup-config Erases the backup configuration.
PAGE 1354
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1352 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration No description is attached to the file. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines The description accepts any printable characters except a double quote or question mark. Enclose the string in double quotes to include spaces within the name. The surrounding quotes are not used as part of the description.
PAGE 1355
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1353 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console#rename file1.scr file2.scr show backup-config Use the show backup-config command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the contents of the backup configuration file. Syntax show backup-config Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1356
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1354 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM exit interface gigabitethernet 1/0/2 ip address 176.243.100.100 255.255.255.0 duplex full speed 1000 exit show bootvar Use the show bootvar command in User EXEC mode to display the active system image file that the device loads at startup. Syntax show bootvar [unit ] • unit —Unit number. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1357
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1355 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Images currently available on Flash -----------------------------------------------------------------unit image1 image2 current-active next-active -----------------------------------------------------------------1 0.31.0.0 0.31.0.0 image2 image2 show running-config Use the show running-config command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the contents of the currently running configuration file, including banner configuration.
PAGE 1358
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1356 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console# show running-config ... line ssh no exec-banner exit line telnet no login-banner exit banner exec "===exec=====" banner login "===login=====" banner motd "===motd=====" exit show startup-config Use the show startup-config command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the startup configuration file contents.
PAGE 1359
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1357 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the contents of the startup-config file. console#show startup-config 1 : !Current Configuration: 2 : !System Description "PowerConnect M8024, 1.0.0.0, VxWorks6.5" 3 : !System Software Version 1.0.0.
PAGE 1360
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1361
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1359 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines If unit is not specified, all units are updated. Example The following example updates the bootcode on unit 2. console#update bootcode 2 write Use the write command to copy the running configuration image to the startup configuration. Syntax write Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1362
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1363
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1364
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1365
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1361 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Denial of Service Commands 67 The following list shows the DoS attack detection PowerConnect supports. Some platforms do not support detection for all of the DoS attack types in the list. • SIP=DIP: – • First Fragment: – • • – TCP Flag SYN set and Source Port < 1024 or TCP Control Flags = 0 and – TCP Sequence Number = 0 or TCP Flags FIN, URG, and PSH set and – TCP Sequence Number = 0 or TCP Flags SYN and FIN set.
PAGE 1366
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1362 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • – TCP Flag SYN set and Source Port < 1024 or TCP Control Flags = 0 and – TCP Sequence Number = 0 or TCP Flags FIN, URG, and PSH set and – TCP Sequence Number = 0 or TCP Flags SYN and FIN set. TCP Offset: – • TCP SYN: – • TCP Flags FIN and URG and PSH set and TCP Sequence Number = 0. ICMP V6: – • TCP Flags SYN and FIN set. TCP FIN & URG & PSH: – • TCP Flag SYN set.
PAGE 1367
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1363 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM dos-control firstfrag Use the dos-control firstfrag command in Global Configuration mode to enable Minimum TCP Header Size Denial of Service protection. If the mode is enabled, Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack. If packets ingress having a TCP Header Size smaller than the configured value, the packets are dropped. Syntax dos-control firstfrag [size] no dos-control firstfrag • size —TCP header size.
PAGE 1368
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1364 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax dos-control icmp [size ] no dos-control icmp • size — Maximum ICMP packet size. (Range: 0-16376). If size is unspecified, the value is 512. Default Configuration Denial of Service is disabled. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example activates the Maximum ICMP Packet Denial of Service protection with a maximum packet size of 1023.
PAGE 1369
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1365 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example activates L4 Port Denial of Service protection. console(config)#dos-control l4port dos-control sipdip Use the dos-control sipdip command in Global Configuration mode to enable Source IP Address = Destination IP Address (SIP=DIP) Denial of Service protection.
PAGE 1370
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1366 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM dos-control tcpflag Use the dos-control tcpflag command in Global Configuration mode to enable TCP Flag Denial of Service protections. If the mode is enabled, Denial of Service prevention is active for this type of attack.
PAGE 1371
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1367 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no dos-control tcpfrag Default Configuration Denial of Service is disabled. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example activates TCP Fragment Denial of Service protection. console(config)#dos-control tcpfrag ip icmp echo-reply Use the ip icmp echo-reply command to enable or disable the generation of ICMP Echo Reply messages.
PAGE 1372
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1368 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(config)#ip icmp echo-reply ip icmp error-interval Use the ip icmp error-interval command to limit the rate at which IPv4 ICMP error messages are sent. The rate limit is configured as a token bucket with two configurable parameters: Burst-size and burst-interval. To disable ICMP rate limiting, set burst-interval to zero. Use the no form of this command to return burst-interval and burst-size to their default values.
PAGE 1373
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1369 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip unreachables Use the ip unreachables command to enable the generation of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages. Use the no form of this command to prevent the generation of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages. Syntax ip unreachables no ip unreachables Default Configuration ICMP Destination Unreachable messages are enabled.
PAGE 1374
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1370 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration (VLAN) mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config-if-vlan10)#ip redirects ipv6 icmp error-interval Use the icmp error-interval command to limit the rate at which ICMP error messages are sent. The rate limit is configured as a token bucket with two configurable parameters: Burst-size and burst interval.
PAGE 1375
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1371 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console(config)#ipv6 icmp error-interval 2000 20 ipv6 unreachables Use the ipv6 unreachables command to enable the generation of ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable messages. Use the no form of this command to prevent the generation of ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable messages.
PAGE 1376
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1372 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays Denial of Service configuration information. console#show dos-control SIPDIP Mode...............................Disable First Fragment Mode.......................Disable Min TCP Hdr Size..........................20 TCP Fragment Mode...........
PAGE 1377
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1373 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 68 Line Commands This chapter explains the following commands: exec-timeout line history show line history size speed Authentication commands related to line configuration mode are in AAA Commands. exec-timeout Use the exec-timeout command in Line Configuration mode to set the interval that the system waits for user input before timeout. To restore the default setting, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 1378
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1374 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example configures the interval that the system waits until user input is detected to 20 minutes. console(config)#line console console(config-line)#exec-timeout 20 history Use the history command in Line Configuration mode to enable the command history function. To disable the command history function, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 1379
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1375 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax history size number-of-commands no history size Parameter Description Parameter Description number-ofcommands Specifies the number of commands the system may record in its command history buffer. (Range: 0-216) Default Configuration The default command history buffer size is 10. Command Mode Line Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1380
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1376 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Examples The following example enters Line Configuration mode to configure Telnet. console(config)#line telnet console(config-line)# show line Use the show line command in User EXEC mode to display line parameters.
PAGE 1381
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1377 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays the line configuration. console>show line Console configuration: Interactive timeout: Disabled History: 10 Baudrate: 9600 Databits: 8 Parity: none Stopbits: 1 Telnet configuration: Interactive timeout: 10 minutes 10 seconds History: 10 SSH configuration: Interactive timeout: 10 minutes 10 seconds History: 10 speed Use the speed command in Line Configuration mode to set the line baud rate.
PAGE 1382
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1378 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Line Interface (console) mode User Guidelines This configuration applies only to the current session. Example The following example configures the console baud rate to 9600.
PAGE 1383
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1379 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Management ACL Commands 69 In order to ensure the security of the switch management features, the administrator may elect to configure a management access control list. The Management Access Control and Administration List (ACAL) component is used to ensure that only known and trusted devices are allowed to remotely manage the switch via TCP/IP.
PAGE 1384
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1380 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM deny (management) Use the deny command in Management Access-List Configuration mode to set conditions for the management access list.
PAGE 1385
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1381 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines Rules with gigabitethernet, tengigabitethernet, vlan, and port-channel parameters are valid only if an IP address is defined on the appropriate interface. Ensure that each rule has a unique priority. Example The following example shows how all ports are denied in the access-list called mlist.
PAGE 1386
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1382 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example configures an access-list called mlist as the management access-list. console(config)# management access-class mlist management access-list Use the management access-list command in Global Configuration mode to define an access list for management, and enter the access-list for configuration.
PAGE 1387
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1383 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Management access list names can consist of any printable character, including blanks. Enclose the name in quotes to embed blanks in the name. Examples The following example shows how to configure two management interfaces, gigabit Ethernet 1/0/1 and gigabit Ethernet 2/0/9.
PAGE 1388
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1384 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • gigabitethernet unit/slot/port — A valid 1-gigabit Ethernet-routed port number. • vlan vlan-id — A valid VLAN number. • port-channel port-channel-number — A valid port channel number. • tengigabitethernet unit/slot/port — A valid 10-gigabit Ethernet-routed port number. • ip-address — Source IP address. • mask mask — Specifies the network mask of the source IP address.
PAGE 1389
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1385 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config)# management access-class mlist The following example shows how to configure all the interfaces to be management interfaces except for two interfaces, gigabit Ethernet 1/0/1 and 2/0/9.
PAGE 1390
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1386 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show management access-list Use the show management access-list command in Privileged EXEC mode to display management access-lists. Syntax show management access-list [name] • name — A valid access list name. (Range: 1–32 characters) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1391
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1387 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 70 Mode Commands This chapter explains the following commands: configure terminal do configure terminal Use the configure terminal command to get to the configure line. This command is equivalent to the configure command. Syntax configure terminal Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1392
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1388 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM modes other than Global Configuration mode, the do command will not appear in the list of commands shown in the help, nor will prompting be available. Syntax do line • line — Command to be executed. It should be an unambiguous command from the Privileged EXEC mode. Commands such as configure, devshell, and hidden commands are forbidden. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1393
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1389 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 71 Password Management Commands The Password Management component supports the features below. Passwords are masked when entered by the user and in the running config. Configurable Minimum Password Length The administrator has the option of requiring user passwords to be a minimum length. The administrator can choose to have the switch enforce a minimum length between 8 and 64 characters.
PAGE 1394
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1390 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM The administrator can access the serial port even if he/she is locked out and reset the password or clear the config to regain control of the switch. This ensures that if a hacker tries to log in as admin and causes the account to be locked out, then the administrator with physical access to the switch can still log in and reactivate the admin account.
PAGE 1395
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1391 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Password Strength Definition: The feature ensures that any password configured on the switch for local administration purpose is a Strong password and it must conform to each of the following characteristics: • Minimum number of uppercase letters. • Minimum number of lowercase letters. • Minimum number of numeric characters.
PAGE 1396
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1392 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM passwords strength-check passwords strength exclude-keyword passwords strength minimum uppercase- enable password encrypted letters passwords strength minimum lowercaseletters show passwords configuration passwords strength minimum numericcharacters show passwords result NOTE: To change a password, use the passwords command, which is described in AAA Commands.
PAGE 1397
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1393 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example sets the password age limit to 100 days. console(config)#passwords aging 100 passwords history As administrator, use the passwords history command in Global Configuration mode to set the number of previous passwords that are stored for each user account. When a local user changes his or her password, the user is not able to reuse any password stored in password history.
PAGE 1398
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1394 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM passwords lock-out Use the passwords lock-out command in Global Configuration mode to strengthen the security of the switch by locking user accounts that have failed login due to wrong passwords. When a lockout count is configured, a user who is logging in must enter the correct password within that count. Otherwise that user is locked out from further switch access.
PAGE 1399
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1395 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM passwords min-length Use the passwords min-length command in Global Configuration mode to enforce a minimum length password length for local users. The value also applies to the enable password. The valid range is 8–64. The default is 8. Use the no version of this command to set the minimum password length to 8.
PAGE 1400
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1396 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM no passwords strength-check Parameter Description This command does not require parameter descriptions. Default Behavior The password strength feature is disabled by default.
PAGE 1401
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1397 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description This command does not require parameter descriptions. Default Behavior The default value is 1. Command Mode Global Configuration User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console(config)#passwords strength minimum uppercaseletters 6 passwords strength minimum lowercase-letters Use this command to enforce a minimum number of lowercase letters that a password must contain.
PAGE 1402
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1398 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console(config)#passwords strength minimum lowercaseletters 6 passwords strength minimum numericcharacters Use this command to enforce a minimum number of numeric numbers that a password should contain. The valid range is 0–16. The default is 1. A minimum of 0 means no restriction on that set of characters.
PAGE 1403
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1399 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(config)#passwords strength minimum numeric–characters 6 passwords strength minimum special-characters Use this command to enforce a minimum number of special characters that a password may contain. The valid range is 0–16. The default is 1. A setting of 0 means no restriction. Special characters are one of the following characters (`! $ % ^ & * ( ) _ - + = { [ } ] : ; @ ' ~ # | \ < , > .
PAGE 1404
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1400 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM passwords strength max-limit consecutivecharacters Use this command to enforce a maximum number of consecutive characters that a password can contain. If a user enters a password that has more consecutive characters than the configured limit, the system rejects the password. The valid range of consecutive characters is 0–15. The default is 0. A maximum of 0 means there is no restriction on consecutive characters.
PAGE 1405
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1401 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM passwords strength max-limit repeatedcharacters Use this command to enforce a maximum repeated characters that a password should contain. If password has repetition of characters more than the configured max-limit, it fails to configure. The valid range is 0-15. The default is 0. A maximum of 0 means again disabling the restriction. Use the no form of this command to reset the maximum repeated characters to the default value.
PAGE 1406
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1402 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM performed, i.e. for special characters, uppercase characters, lower-case characters, etc. Use the no form of this command to reset the minimum character-classes to the default value. Syntax passwords strength minimum character-classes 0-4 no passwords strength minimum character–classes Parameter Description This command does not require parameter descriptions. Default Behavior The default value is 1.
PAGE 1407
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1403 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description This command does not require parameter descriptions. Default Behavior This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1408
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1404 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. show passwords configuration Use the show passwords configuration command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the configured password management settings. Syntax show passwords configuration Parameter Description The following fields are displayed by this command. Parameter Description Minimum Password Length Minimum number of characters required when changing passwords.
PAGE 1409
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1405 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Maximum Password Repeated Characters Maximum number of repetition of characters that the password should contain when configuring passwords. Minimum Password Character Classes Minimum number of character classes (uppercase, lowercase, numeric and special) required when configuring passwords.
PAGE 1410
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1406 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Minimum Password Numeric Characters............ 3 Minimum Password Special Characters............ 3 Maximum Password Consecutive Characters........ 3 Maximum Password Repeated Characters........... 3 Minimum Password Character Classes............. 4 Password Exclude Keywords......................
PAGE 1411
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1407 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Reason for failure: Could not set user password! Password should contain at least 4 uppercase letters.
PAGE 1412
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1413
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1409 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM PHY Diagnostics Commands 72 This chapter explains the following commands: show copper-ports tdr test copper-port tdr show fiber-ports optical-transceiver show copper-ports tdr Use the show copper-ports tdr command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the stored information regarding cable lengths. Syntax show copper-ports tdr [interface] • interface — A valid Ethernet port. The full syntax is unit / port.
PAGE 1414
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1410 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays the last TDR tests on all ports.
PAGE 1415
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1411 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Examples The following examples display the optical transceiver diagnostics.
PAGE 1416
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1412 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM NOTE: The maximum distance VCT can function is 120 meters. Examples The following example results in a report on the cable attached to port 1/0/3. console#test copper-port tdr 1/0/3 Cable is open at 64 meters The following example results in a failure to report on the cable attached to port 2/0/3.
PAGE 1417
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1413 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 73 RMON Commands The PowerConnect SNMP component includes an RMON (remote monitoring) agent. RMON is a base technology used by network management applications to manage a network. Troubleshooting and network planning can be accomplished through the network management applications. The network monitor monitors traffic on a network and records selected portions of the network traffic and statistics.
PAGE 1418
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1414 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax rmon alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold value [event-number] falling-threshold value [event-number] [owner string] [startup direction] no rmon alarm number Syntax Description Parameter Description number The alarm index. (Range: 1–65535) variable A fully qualified SNMP object identifier that resolves to a particular instance of a MIB object.
PAGE 1419
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1415 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description startup direction The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid. If the first sample (after this entry becomes valid) is greater than or equal to the rising-threshold, and direction is equal to rising or rising-falling, then a single rising alarm is generated.
PAGE 1420
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1416 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM rmon collection history Use the rmon collection history command in Interface Configuration mode to enable a Remote Monitoring (RMON) MIB history statistics group on an interface. To remove a specified RMON history statistics group, use the no form of this command. Also see the show rmon collection history command.
PAGE 1421
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1417 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config)#interface gigabitethernet 1/0/8 console(config-if-1/0/8)#rmon collection history 1 interval 2400 rmon event Use the rmon event command in Global Configuration mode to configure an event. To remove an event, use the no form of this command. See also the show rmon events command.
PAGE 1422
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1418 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example configures an event with the trap index of 10. console(config)#rmon event 10 log show rmon alarm Use the show rmon alarm command in User EXEC mode to display alarm configuration. Also see the rmon alarm command. Syntax show rmon alarm number • number — Alarm index. (Range: 1–65535) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1423
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1419 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Interval: 30 Sample Type: delta Startup Alarm: rising Rising Threshold: 8700000 Falling Threshold: 78 Rising Event: 1 Falling Event: 1 Owner: CLI The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display: Field Description Alarm Alarm index. OID Monitored variable OID. Last Sample Value The statistic value during the last sampling period.
PAGE 1424
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1420 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Field Description Rising Threshold A sampled statistic threshold. When the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval is less than this threshold, a single event is generated. Falling Threshold A sampled statistic threshold.
PAGE 1425
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1421 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ----- ---------------------- ------- 1 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1 CLI 2 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1 Manager 3 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.9 CLI The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display: Field Description Index An index that uniquely identifies the entry. OID Monitored variable OID. Owner The entity that configured this entry.
PAGE 1426
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1422 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console> show rmon collection history Index ner Interface Interval Requested Granted Samples Samples Ow --------------------------------------------------------1 LI 1/0/1 30 50 50 C 2 anager 1/0/1 1800 50 50 M The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display: Field Description Index An index that uniquely identifies the entry. Interface The sampled Ethernet interface.
PAGE 1427
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1423 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the RMON event table.
PAGE 1428
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1424 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show rmon history index [throughput | errors | other] [period seconds] • index — The requested set of samples. (Range: 1–65535) • throughput — Displays throughput counters. • errors — Displays error counters. • other — Displays drop and collision counters. • period seconds — Specifies the requested period time to display. (Range: 0–2147483647) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1429
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1430
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1426 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Field Description Time Date and Time the entry is recorded. Octets The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Packets The number of packets (including bad packets) received during this sampling interval. Broadcast The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to the Broadcast address.
PAGE 1431
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1427 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Field Description Jabbers The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
PAGE 1432
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1433
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1429 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics for port 1/0/1.
PAGE 1434
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1430 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Field Description Octets The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Packets The total number of packets (including bad packets, Broadcast packets, and Multicast packets) received. Broadcast The total number of good packets received and directed to the Broadcast address. This does not include Multicast packets.
PAGE 1435
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1431 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Field Description 65 to 127 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that are between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). 128 to 255 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that are between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
PAGE 1436
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1437
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1433 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM SDM Templates Commands 74 On PowerConnect devices, the total available H/W route entries are divided statically (at compile-time) among IPV4 and IPv6 routes. If a switch is deployed in network environments where no IPv6 routes are needed, then H/W resources allocated for IPv6 routes are unused.
PAGE 1438
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1434 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 This keyword filters subsequent template choices to those that support both IPv4 and IPv6. There is only one such template. It is selected using the keyword default. ipv4-routing This keyword filters subsequent template choices to those that support IPv4 and not IPv6.
PAGE 1439
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1435 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Message Type Message Description Error Completion Message None show sdm prefer Use the show sdm prefer command in Privileged EXEC mode to view the currently active SDM template and its scaling parameters, or to view the scaling parameters for an inactive template.
PAGE 1440
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1436 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description IPv4 Multicast Routes The maximum number of IPv4 multicast forwarding table entries. IPv6 Multicast Routes The maximum number of IPv6 multicast forwarding table entries. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1441
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1437 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console# show sdm prefer The current template is the Dual IPv4 and IPv6 template. ARP Entries..................................6144 IPv4 Unicast Routes..........................8160 IPv6 NDP Entries.............................2560 IPv6 Unicast Routes..........................4096 ECMP Next Hops...............................4 IPv4 Multicast Routes........................1536 IPv6 Multicast Routes........................
PAGE 1442
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1438 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ARP Entries..................................6144 IPv4 Unicast Routes..........................8160 IPv6 NDP Entries.............................2560 IPv6 Unicast Routes..........................4096 ECMP Next Hops...............................4 IPv4 Multicast Routes........................1536 IPv6 Multicast Routes........................512 On the next reload, the template will be the IPv4routing Default template.
PAGE 1443
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1439 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 75 Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands Debug commands cause the output of the enabled trace to display on a serial port or telnet console. Note that the output resulting from enabling a debug trace always displays on the serial port. The output resulting from enabling a debug trace displays on all login sessions for which any debug trace has been enabled.
PAGE 1444
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1440 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM debug console debug ip pimsm debug lacp debug vrrp debug dot1x debug ip vrrp debug mldsnooping show debugging debug igmpsnooping debug ipv6 dhcp debug ospf debug ip acl debug ipv6 mcache debug ospfv3 debug ip dvmrp debug ipv6 mld debug ping NOTE: Debug commands are not persistent across resets. debug arp Use the debug arp command to enable tracing of ARP packets.
PAGE 1445
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1441 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM debug auto-voip Use the debug auto-voip command to enable Auto VOIP debug messages. Use the optional parameters to trace H323, SCCP, or SIP packets respectively. Use the “no” form of this command to disable Auto VOIP debug messages. Syntax debug auto-voip [ H323 | SCCP | SIP ] no debug auto-voip [ H323 | SCCP | SIP ] Default Configuration Auto VOIP tracing is disabled by default. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode.
PAGE 1446
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1442 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no usage guidelines for this command. Example console#debug clear debug console Use the debug console to enable the display of “debug” trace output on the login session in which it is executed. Debug console display must be enabled in order to view any trace output. The output of debug trace commands appears on all login sessions for which debug console has been enabled.
PAGE 1447
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1443 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax debug dot1x packet [ receive | transmit ] no debug dot1x packet [ receive | transmit ] Default Configuration Display of dot1x traces is disabled by default. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines There are no usage guidelines for this command. Example console#debug dot1x packet debug igmpsnooping Use the debug igmpsnooping to enable tracing of IGMP Snooping packets transmitted and/or received by the switch.
PAGE 1448
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1444 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines There are no usage guidelines for this command. Example console#debug igmpsnooping packet debug ip acl Use the debug ip acl command to enable debug of IP Protocol packets matching the ACL criteria. Use the “no” form of this command to disable IP ACL debugging. Syntax debug ip acl acl no debug ip acl acl • acl — The number of the IP ACL to debug.
PAGE 1449
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1445 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM information such as source address, destination address, control packet type, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or transmitted is displayed on the console. Syntax debug ip dvmrp packet [ receive | transmit ] no debug ip dvmrp packet [ receive | transmit ] Default Configuration Display of DVMRP traces is disabled by default. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode.
PAGE 1450
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1446 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration Display of IGMP traces is disabled by default. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines There are no usage guidelines for this command. Example console#debug ip igmp packet debug ip mcache Use the debug ip mcache command for tracing MDATA packet reception and transmission. The receive option traces only received data packets and the transmit option traces only transmitted data packets.
PAGE 1451
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1447 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console#debug ip mcache packet debug ip pimdm Use the debug ip pimdm command to trace PIMDM packet reception and transmission. The receive option traces only received PIMDM packets and the transmit option traces only transmitted PIMDM packets. When neither keyword is used in the command, then all PIMDM packet traces are dumped.
PAGE 1452
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1448 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Vital information such as source address, destination address, control packet type, packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or transmitted is displayed on the console. Use the “no” form of this command to disable PIMSM tracing. Syntax debug ip pimsm packet [ receive | transmit ] no debug ip pimsm packet [ receive | transmit ] Default Configuration Display of PIMSM traces is disabled by default.
PAGE 1453
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1449 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console#debug ip vrrp debug ipv6 dhcp Use the debug ipv6 dhcp command in Privileged EXEC mode to display debug information about DHCPv6 client activities and to trace DHCPv6 packets to and from the local DHCPv6 client. To disable debugging, use the no form of the command.
PAGE 1454
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1450 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM debug ipv6 mcache Use the debug ipv6 mcache command to trace MDATAv6 packet reception and transmission. The receive option traces only received data packets and the transmit option traces only transmitted data packets. When neither keyword is used in the command, then all data packet traces are dumped.
PAGE 1455
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1451 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM packet length, and the interface on which the packet is received or transmitted is displayed on the console. Use the “no” form of this command to disable MLD tracing. Syntax debug ipv6 mld packet [ receive | transmit ] no debug ipv6 mld packet [ receive | transmit ] Default Configuration Display of MLD traces is disabled by default. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. User Guidelines There are no usage guidelines for this command.
PAGE 1456
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1452 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration Display of PIMDMv6 traces is disabled by default. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. Usage Guidelines There are no usage guidelines for this command. Example console#debug ipv6 pimdm packet debug ipv6 pimsm Use the debug ipv6 pimsm command to trace PIMSMv6 packet reception and transmission. The receive option traces only received PIMSMv6 packets and the transmit option traces only transmitted PIMSMv6 packets.
PAGE 1457
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1453 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console#debug ipv6 pimsm packet debug isdp Use the debug isdp command to trace ISDP packet reception and transmission. The receive option traces only received ISDP packets and the transmit option traces only transmitted ISDP packets. When neither keyword is used in the command, then all ISDP packet traces are dumped.
PAGE 1458
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1454 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax debug lacp packet no debug lacp packet Default Configuration Display of LACP traces is disabled by default. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. Usage Guidelines There are no usage guidelines for this command. Example console#debug lacp packet debug mldsnooping Use the debug mldsnooping command to trace MLD snooping packet reception and transmission.
PAGE 1459
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1455 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. Usage Guidelines There are no usage guidelines for this command. Example console#debug mldsnooping debug ospf Use the debug ospf command to enable tracing of OSPF packets received and transmitted by the switch. Use the “no” form of this command to disable tracing of OSPF packets. Syntax debug ospf packet no debug ospf packet Default Configuration Display of OSPF traces is disabled by default.
PAGE 1460
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1456 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM debug ospfv3 Use the debug ospfv3 command to enable tracing of OSPFv3 packets received and transmitted by the switch. Use the “no” form of this command to disable tracing of OSPFv3 packets. Syntax debug ospfv3 packet no debug ospfv3 packet Default Configuration Display of OSPFv3 traces is disabled by default. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. Usage Guidelines There are no usage guidelines for this command.
PAGE 1461
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1457 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. Usage Guidelines There are no usage guidelines for this command. Example The following example displays. console#debug ping packet debug rip Use the debug rip command to enable tracing of RIP requests and responses. Use the “no” form of this command to disable tracing of RIP requests and responses.
PAGE 1462
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1458 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM debug sflow Use the debug sflow command to enable sFlow debug packet trace. Use the “no” form of this command to disable sFlow packet tracing. Syntax debug sflow packet no debug sflow packet Default Configuration Display of sFlow traces is disabled by default. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. Usage Guidelines There are no usage guidelines for this command.
PAGE 1463
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1459 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration Display of spanning tree BPDU traces is disabled by default. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. Usage Guidelines There are no usage guidelines for this command. Example console#debug spanning-tree bpdu debug vrrp Use the debug vrrp command in Privileged EXEC mode to enable VRRP debug protocol messages. Use the no form of this command to disable VRRP debug protocol messages.
PAGE 1464
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1460 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show debugging no show debugging Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. Usage Guidelines Enabled packet tracing configurations are displayed. Example console #debug arp Arp packet tracing enabled. console #show debugging Arp packet tracing enabled.
PAGE 1465
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1461 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 76 Sflow Commands sFlow is the standard for monitoring high-speed switched and routed networks. sFlow technology is built into network equipment and gives complete visibility into network activity, enabling effective management and control of network resources. The sFlow monitoring system consists of an sFlow Agent (embedded in a switch or router or in a stand-alone probe) and a central sFlow Collector.
PAGE 1466
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1462 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax sflow rcvr_index destination { ip-address [ port ] | maxdatagram size | owner "owner_string" timeout rcvr_timeout} no sflow rcvr_index destination [ip-address | maxdatagram | owner ] • rcvr_index — The index of this sFlow Receiver (Range: 1–8). • ip-address — The sFlow receiver IP address. If set to 0.0.0.0, no sFlow datagrams will be sent. • size —The maximum number of data bytes that can be sent in a single sample datagram.
PAGE 1467
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1463 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode. User Guidelines An sflow destination entry must have an owner name defined in order for polling or sampling to be configured. The last set of command parameters are optional in the no form of the command. Example console(config)#sflow 1 destination owner 1 timeout 2000 console(config)#sflow 1 destination maxdatagram 500 console(config)#sflow 1 destination 30.30.30.
PAGE 1468
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1464 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration There are no pollers configured by default. The default poll interval is 0. Command Mode Global Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console(config)#sflow 1 polling gigabitethernet 1/0/1-10 200 sflow polling (Interface Mode) Use the sflow polling command in Interface Mode to enable a new sflow poller instance for this data source if rcvr_idx is valid.
PAGE 1469
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1465 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console(config-if-1/0/2)#sflow 1 polling 6055 sflow sampling Use the sflow sampling command to enable a new sflow sampler instance for this data source if rcvr_idx is valid. Use the “no” form of this command to reset sampler parameters to the default.
PAGE 1470
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1466 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode. User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console(config)#sflow 1 sampling gigabitethernet 1/0/2 1500 50 sflow sampling (Interface Mode) Use the sflow sampling command in Interface Mode to enable a new sflow sampler instance for this data source if rcvr_idx is valid. Use the "no" form of this command to reset sampler parameters to the default.
PAGE 1471
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1467 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Interface Configuration (Ethernet) mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console(config-if-1/0/15)#sflow 1 sampler 1500 50 show sflow agent Use the show sflow agent command to display the sflow agent information. Syntax show sflow agent Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode.
PAGE 1472
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1468 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console#show sflow agent sFlow Version.......................... 1.3;Dell Corp.;10.23.18.28 IP Address............................. 0.0.0.0 show sflow destination Use the show sflow destination command to display all the configuration information related to the sFlow receivers. Syntax show sflow rcvr-index destination • rcvr index — The index of the sFlow Receiver to display (Range: 1–8).
PAGE 1473
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1469 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Receiver Owner Index Time out Max Datagram Port String IP Address Size -------- -------- ---------- ------------ ----- -------------------------2 0 1400 6343 0.0.0.0 show sflow polling Use the show sflow polling command to display the sFlow polling instances created on the switch.
PAGE 1474
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1470 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Poller Receiver Poller Data Source Index Interval ----------- ------- ------- 1/0/1 1 0 show sflow sampling Use the show sflow sampling command to display the sFlow sampling instances created on the switch. Syntax show sflow rcvr-index sampling [{gigabitethernet | tengigabitethernet} interface-list] • rcvr-index — The sFlow Receiver associated with the poller (Range: 1–8).
PAGE 1475
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1476
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1477
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1473 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 77 SNMP Commands The SNMP component provides a machine-to-machine interface for the PowerConnect product family. This includes the ability to configure the network device, view settings and statistics, and upload or download code or configuration images.
PAGE 1478
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1474 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show snmp Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the SNMP communications status. Console # show snmp Community-String Community-Access View name IP address ---------------- ---------------- ---------- ---------- public private private All 172.16.1.1 172.17.1.
PAGE 1479
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1475 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 192.122.173.42 192.122.173.42 Trap Inform public public 2 2 162 filt1 15 3 162 filt2 15 3 Version 3 notifications Target Address Type Username -------------- ----- -------192.122.173.
PAGE 1480
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1476 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show snmp filters Use the show snmp filters command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the configuration of filters. Syntax show snmp filters filtername • filtername — Specifies the name of the filter. (Range: 1-30) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1481
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1477 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM user-filter1 1.3.6.1.2.1.1 Included user-filter1 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.7 Excluded show snmp group Use the show snmp group command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the configuration of groups. Syntax show snmp group [groupname] • groupname — Specifies the name of the group. (Range: 1-30) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1482
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1478 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM managers-group V3 NoAuth-priv Default managers-group V3 NoAuth-priv Default Default "" "" "" console# show snmp groups user-group Name Security Model Level Views Read Write Notify ----------------- ---------user-group V3 -----Auth-Priv -------- -------- -Default "" "" The following table contains field descriptions.
PAGE 1483
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1479 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show snmp user [username] • username — Specifies the name of the user. (Range: 1-30) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines The user name accepts any printable characters except a double quote or question mark. Enclose the string in double quotes to include spaces within the name. The surrounding quotes are not used as part of the name.
PAGE 1484
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1480 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show snmp views Use the show snmp views command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the configuration of views. Syntax show snmp views [viewname] • viewname — Specifies the name of the view. (Range: 1-30) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1485
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1481 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show trapflags Use the show trapflags command in Privileged EXEC mode to display SNMP traps globally or to display specific SNMP traps.
PAGE 1486
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1482 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Power Over Ethernet ............... Enable MAC Locking ....................... Enable DVMRP Traps........................ Disable OSPFv2 Traps....................... Disable PIM Traps.......................... Disable OSPFv3 Traps....................... Disable CP Traps........................... Disable console#show trapflags ospf OSPF Traps: errors: all..............................Disabled authentication failure...........
PAGE 1487
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1483 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM rtb: rtb-entryinfo...............Disabled state-change: all..............................Disabled if state change..................Enabled neighbor state change............Enabled virtif state change..............Disabled virtneighbor state change........Disabled snmp-server community Use the snmp-server community command in Global Configuration mode to set up the community access string to permit access to the SNMP protocol.
PAGE 1488
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1484 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration No community is defined. Default to read–only access if not specified. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines You can not specify viewname for su, which has an access to the whole MIB. You can use the view name to restrict the access rights of a community string. When it is specified: • An internal security name is generated.
PAGE 1489
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1485 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM snmp-server community-group Use the snmp-server community-group command in Global Configuration mode to map the internal security name for SNMP v1 and SNMP v2 security models to the group name. To remove the specified community string, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 1490
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1486 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM snmp-server contact Use the snmp-server contact command in Global Configuration mode to set up a system contact (sysContact) string. To remove the system contact information, use the no form of the command. Syntax snmp-server contact text no snmp-server contact • text — Character string, 0 to 160 characters, describing the system contact information. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1491
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1492
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1488 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description pim Enable pim traps (pim-sm and pim-dm). poe Enable poe traps. snmp authentication Enable snmp authentication traps. spanning-tree Enable traps on topology changes. stack Enable stack firmware synchronization traps. vrrp Enable vrrp traps. Default Configuration SNMP authentication, link, multiple-user, spanning-tree, dot1q, mac lock violation, and ACL traps are enabled by default.
PAGE 1493
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1489 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM multiple-users multiple logins Enable/Disable sending traps when active. ospf Enable/Disable OSPF Traps. ospfv3 Enable/Disable OSPF Traps. pim pim spanning-tree Tree traps. Enable/Disable sending Spanning snmp-server engineID local Use the snmpserver engineID local command in Global Configuration mode to specify the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) engine ID on the local device.
PAGE 1494
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1490 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines If you want to use SNMPv3, you need to specify an engine ID for the device. You can specify your own ID or use a default string that is generated using the MAC address of the device. If the SNMPv3 engine ID is deleted, or the configuration file is erased, then SNMPv3 cannot be used.
PAGE 1495
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1491 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • filter-name — Specifies the label for the filter record that is being updated or created. The name is used to reference the record. (Range: 1-30 characters.) • oid-tree — Specifies the object identifier of the ASN.1 subtree to be included or excluded from the view. To identify the subtree, specify a text string consisting of numbers, such as 1.3.6.2.4, or a word, such as system.
PAGE 1496
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1492 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config)# snmp-server filter user-filter ifEntry.*.1 included snmp-server group Use the snmp-server group command in Global Configuration mode to configure a new Simple Management Protocol (SNMP) group or a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP views. To remove a specified SNMP group, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 1497
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1493 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • writeview — A string that is the name of the view that enables the user to enter data and configure the contents of the agent. If unspecified, nothing is defined for the write view. (Range: 1-30 characters.) Default Configuration No group entry exists. There will be some default groups for Read/Write/Super users. These groups cannot be deleted or modified by the user. This command is used only to configure the user-defined groups.
PAGE 1498
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1494 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description host-addr Specifies the IP address of the host (targeted recipient) or the name of the host. (Range:1-158 characters) community-string Specifies a password-like community string sent with the notification operation. (Range: 1-20 characters) traps Indicates that SNMP traps are sent to this host. version 1 Indicates that SNMPv1 traps will be used.
PAGE 1499
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1495 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines If a DNS host name is entered instead of an IP address, the switch attempts to resolve the host name immediately using DNS. Use the ip domain-lookup command on page 466 and the ip name-server command on page 469 to enable resolution of DNS host names. Example The following example enables SNMP traps for host 192.16.12.143. console(config)# snmp-server host 192.16.12.
PAGE 1500
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1496 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config)# snmp-server location New_York snmp-server user Use the snmp-server user command in Global Configuration mode to configure a new SNMP Version 3 user. To delete a user, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 1501
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1497 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • priv-des-key — The CBC-DES Symmetric Encryption privacy level. The user should enter a pregenerated MD5 or SHA key depending on the authentication level selected. • des-key — The pregenerated DES encryption key. Length is determined by authentication method selected —32 hex characters if MD5 Authentication is selected, 48 hex characters if SHA Authentication is selected. Default Configuration No user entry exists.
PAGE 1502
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1498 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • view-name — Specifies the label for the view record that is being created or updated. The name is used to reference the record. (Range: 1-30 characters.) • oid-tree — Specifies the object identifier of the ASN.1 subtree to be included or excluded from the view. To identify the subtree, specify a text string consisting of numbers, such as 1.3.6.2.4, or a word, such as system.
PAGE 1503
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1499 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config)# snmp-server view user-view ifEntry.*.1 included console(config)#snmp-server view "A beautiful view!" 1.1.2.1 included snmp-server v3-host Use the snmp-server v3-host command in Global Configuration mode to specify the recipient of Simple Network Management Protocol Version 3 (SNMPv3) notifications. To remove the specified host, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 1504
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1500 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • port — UDP port of the host to use. The default is 162. (Range: 1-65535.) • filtername — A string that is the name of the filter that define the filter for this host. If unspecified, does not filter anything. (Range: 1-30 characters.) Default Configuration Default configuration is 3 retries and 15 seconds timeout.
PAGE 1505
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1501 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 78 SSH Commands Management access to the switch is supported via telnet, SSH, or the serial console. The PowerConnect supports secure shell (SSH) and secure sockets layer (SSL) to help ensure the security of network transactions. Keys and certificates can be generated externally (that is, offline) and downloaded to the target or generated directly by the PowerConnect.
PAGE 1506
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1502 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines DSA keys are generated in pairs: one public DSA key and one private DSA key. If your switch already has DSA keys when you issue this command, you are warned and prompted to replace the existing keys. The keys are not saved in the switch configuration; they are saved in the file system and the private key is never displayed to the user.
PAGE 1507
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1503 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM the switch configuration; they are saved in the file system and the private key is never displayed to the user. RSA keys, along with other switch credentials, are distributed to all units in a stack on a configuration save. Example The following example generates RSA key pairs.
PAGE 1508
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1509
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1505 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip ssh pubkey-auth Use the ip ssh pubkey-auth command in Global Configuration mode to enable public key authentication for incoming SSH sessions. To disable this function, use the no form of this command. Syntax ip ssh pubkey-auth no ip ssh pubkey-auth Default Configuration The function is disabled. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines AAA authentication is independent from this configuration.
PAGE 1510
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1506 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command is enabled by default. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines To generate SSH server keys, use the commands crypto key generate rsa, and crypto key generate dsa. Example The following example enables the switch to be configured using SSH. console(config)#ip ssh server key-string Use the key-string SSH Public Key Configuration mode to specify an SSH public key manually.
PAGE 1511
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1507 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines Use the key-string row command to specify which SSH public key you will configure interactively next. To complete the interactive command, you must enter key-string row with no characters. Examples The following example shows how to enter a public key string for a user called "bob.
PAGE 1512
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1508 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-pubkey-key)#key-string row C1yc2 show crypto key mypubkey Use the show crypto key mypubkey command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the SSH public keys of the switch. Syntax show crypto key mypubkey [rsa | dsa] • rsa — RSA key. • dsa — DSA key. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1513
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1514
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1510 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays all SSH public keys stored on the switch. console#show crypto key pubkey-chain ssh Username Fingerprint ---------- ------------------------------------------------- bob 9A:CC:01:C5:78:39:27:86:79:CC:23:C5:98:59:F1:86 john 98:F7:6E:28:F2:79:87:C8:18:F8:88:CC:F8:89:87:C8 The following example displays the SSH public called "dana.
PAGE 1515
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1511 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the SSH server configuration. console#show ip ssh SSH server enabled. Port: 22 RSA key was generated. DSA key was generated. SSH Public Key Authentication is enabled. Active incoming sessions: IP Address Idle Time SessionTime ------------- -------------------- User Name -------------- -------------- 10.240.1.
PAGE 1516
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1512 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example enables a SSH public key to be manually configured for the SSH public key chain called "bob.
PAGE 1517
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1513 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 79 Syslog Commands The PowerConnect supports a centralized logging subsystem with support for local in memory logs, crash dump logs, and forwarding messages to syslog servers. All switch components use the logging subsystem.
PAGE 1518
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1514 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM <190> JAN 10 18:59:17 10.27.21.22-2 CLI_WEB[209809328]: cmd_logger_api.c(260) 369 %% [CLI:----:EIA-232] Access level of user admin has been set to 15 If enabled, the CLI command logger subsystem begins to log commands immediately after the user is authenticated. After authentication, the CLI generates an explicit message and invokes the command logger. The format of the message at login is: <189> JAN 10 18:58:56 10.27.21.
PAGE 1519
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1515 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM logging console clear logging Use the clear logging command in Privileged EXEC mode to clear messages from the internal logging buffer. Syntax clear logging Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example clears messages from the internal syslog message logging buffer.
PAGE 1520
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1516 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example shows the clear logging file command and confirmation response. console#clear logging file Clear logging file [y/n] description Use the description command in Logging mode to describe the syslog server. Syntax description description • description — Sets the description of the syslog server. (Range: 1-64 characters.
PAGE 1521
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1517 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM level Use the level command in Logging mode to specify the severity level of syslog messages. To reset to the default value, use the no form of the command. Syntax level level no level Parameter Description Parameter Description level The severity level for syslog messages. (Range: emergency, alert, critical, error, warning, notice, info, debug) Default Configuration The default value for level is info.
PAGE 1522
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1518 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax logging cli-command no logging cli-command Default Configuration Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration User Guidelines See the CLI commands by using the show logging command. Example console(config)#logging cli-command console(config)#do show logging Logging is enabled Console Logging: level warnings. Console Messages: 384 Dropped. Buffer Logging: level informational.
PAGE 1523
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1519 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM <190> JAN 10 18:59:17 10.27.21.22-2 CLI_WEB[209809328]: cmd_logger_api.c(260) 369 %% [CLI:----:EIA-232] Access level of user admin has been set to 15 <189> JAN 10 18:59:19 10.27.21.22-2 CMDLOGGER[209809328]: cmd_logger_api.c(83) 370 %% CLI:EIA-232:----:exit <189> JAN 10 18:59:22 10.27.21.22-2 CMDLOGGER[209809328]: cmd_logger_api.c(83) 371 %% CLI:EIA-232:----:telnet 10.27.21.22 <189> JAN 10 18:59:27 10.27.21.
PAGE 1524
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1520 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Up to eight syslog servers can be used. The Dell PowerConnect always uses the local7(23) facility in the syslog message. Syslog messages will not exceed 96 bytes in length. Syslog messages use the following format: <130> JAN 01 00:00:06 0.0.0.0-1 UNKN[0x800023]: bootos.
PAGE 1525
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1521 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Component Name Component name for the logging component. Components must use the new APIs in order to enable identification of the logging component. Component UNKN is substituted for components that do not use the new logging APIs. Thread ID The thread ID of the logging component. File Name The name of the file containing the invoking macro. Line Number The line number which contains the invoking macro.
PAGE 1526
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1522 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM logging buffered Use the logging buffered command in Global Configuration mode to limit syslog messages displayed from an internal buffer based on severity. To cancel the buffer use, use the no form of this command. Syntax logging buffered [severity–level] no logging buffered Parameter Description Parameter Description severity–level (Optional) The number or name of the desired severity level.
PAGE 1527
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1523 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example limits syslog messages displayed from an internal buffer based on the severity level "error." console(config)#logging buffered error logging console Use the logging console command in Global Configuration mode to limit messages logged to the console based on severity. To disable logging to the console terminal, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 1528
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1524 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example limits messages logged to the console based on severity level "alert". console(config)#logging console alert logging file Use the logging file command in Global Configuration mode to limit syslog messages sent to the logging file based on severity. To cancel the buffer, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 1529
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1525 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example limits syslog messages sent to the logging file based on the severity level "warning." console(config)#logging file warning logging on Use the logging on command in Global Configuration mode to control error messages logging.
PAGE 1530
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1526 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM commands. However, if the logging on command is disabled, no messages are sent to these destinations. In this case, only the console will continue to receive logging messages. Example The following example shows how logging is enabled. console(config)#logging on logging snmp Use the logging snmp command in Global Configuration mode to enable SNMP Set command logging. To disable, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 1531
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1527 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax logging web-session no logging web-session Default Configuration Disabled. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines To see web session logs use the show logging command. Example console(config)#logging web-session <133> MAR 24 07:46:07 10.131.7.165-2 UNKN[83102768]: cmd_logger_api.c(140) 764 %% WEB:10.131.7.67:<>:EwaSessionLookup : session[0] created <133> MAR 24 07:46:07 10.131.7.
PAGE 1532
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1528 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description port The port number for syslog messages. (Range: 1-65535) Default Configuration The default port number is 514. Command Mode Logging mode User Guidelines After entering the view corresponding to a specific syslog server, the command can be executed to set the port number for the server. Example The following example sets the syslog message port to 300.
PAGE 1533
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1529 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays the state of logging and the syslog messages stored in the internal buffer. console#show logging Logging is enabled. Console Logging: level warnings. Console Messages: 1778 Dropped. Buffer Logging: level informational. Buffer Messages: 983 Logged, File Logging: level notActive. File Messages: 1783 Dropped.
PAGE 1534
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1530 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays the state of logging and syslog messages sorted in the logging file. console#show logging file Persistent Logging : enabled Persistent Log Count : 1 <186> JAN 01 00:00:05 0.0.0.0-1 UNKN[268434928]: bootos.
PAGE 1535
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1531 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays the syslog server settings. console#show syslog-servers IP address Port Severity Facility Description --------------------------------------------------------192.180.2.275 14 Info local7 7 192.180.2.
PAGE 1536
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1537
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1538
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1534 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM asset-tag Use the asset-tag command in Global Configuration mode to specify the switch asset tag. To remove the existing asset tag, use the no form of the command. Syntax asset-tag [unit] tag no asset-tag [unit] • unit — Switch number. (Range: 1–12) • tag — The switch asset tag. Default Configuration No asset tag is defined by default.
PAGE 1539
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1535 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax banner exec MESSAGE no banner exec • MESSAGE — Quoted text Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration User Guidelines The exec message may consist of multiple lines. Enter a quote to complete the message and return to configuration mode. Up to 2000 characters may be entered into a banner.
PAGE 1540
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1536 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration User Guidelines The login banner can consist of multiple lines. Enter a quote to end the banner text and return to the configuration prompt. Up to 2000 characters may be entered into a banner. Each line entered will consume an extra two characters to account for the carriage return and line feed.
PAGE 1541
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1537 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(config)# banner motd “IMPORTANT: There is a power shutdown at 23:00hrs today, duration 1 hr 30 minutes.” When the MOTD banner is executed, the following displays: IMPORTANT: There is a power shutdown at 23:00hrs today, duration 1 hr 30 minutes. banner motd acknowledge The banner displayed on the console must be acknowledged if banner motd acknowledge is executed. Enter "y" or "n" to continue to the login prompt.
PAGE 1542
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1538 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM When the MOTD banner is executed, the following displays: IMPORTANT: There is a power shutdown at 23:00hrs today, duration 1 hr 30 minutes. Press ‘y’ to continue If ‘y’ is entered, the following displays: console > If ‘n’ is entered, the session will get disconnected, unless it is a serial connection. clear checkpoint statistics Use the clear checkpoint statistics command to clear the statistics for the checkpointing process.
PAGE 1543
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1539 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM cut-through mode Use the cut-through mode command to enable the cut-through mode on the switch. The mode takes effect on all ports on next reload of the switch. To disable the cut-through mode on the switch, use the no form of this command. Syntax cut-through mode no cut-through mode Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Global Configuration User Guidelines No specific guidelines.
PAGE 1544
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1540 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Line Configuration User Guidelines The exec banner can consist of multiple lines. Enter a quote to complete the message and return to configuration mode. Example console(config-telnet)# no exec-banner hostname Use the hostname command in Global Configuration mode to specify or modify the switch host name.
PAGE 1545
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1541 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines The hostname may include any printable characters except a double quote or question mark. Enclose the string in double quotes to include spaces within the name. The surrounding quotes are not used as part of the name. The CLI does not filter illegal characters and may truncate entries at the first illegal character or reject the entry entirely. Example The following example specifies the switch host name.
PAGE 1546
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1542 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(config-stack)#initiate failover ? Press enter to execute the command. console(config-stack)#initiate failover Management unit will be reloaded. Are you sure you want to failover to the backup unit? (y/n) y ip address Use the ip address command to set a static OOB port IP address. Syntax ip address addr mask gw • addr — IP address to be set for the OOB port. (Range: Valid IP address) • mask — Subnet mask.
PAGE 1547
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1543 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip address none Use the ip address none command to disable DHCP/BOOTP on the OOB port. Syntax ip address none Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Interface Configuration (out-of-band) User Guidelines No specific guidelines.
PAGE 1548
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1544 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines No specific guidelines. Example console(config)#interface out-of-band console(config-if)#ip address dhcp login-banner Use the login-banner command to enable login banner on the console, telnet or SSH connection. To disable, use the no form of the command. Syntax login-banner no login-banner • MESSAGE — Quoted text Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1549
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1545 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM NOTE: The "no" form of the command may not be used if the member is present in the stack. Syntax member unit switchindex no member unit • unit — The switch identifier of the switch to be added or removed from the stack. (Range: 1–12) • switchindex — The index into the database of the supported switch types, indicating the type of the switch being preconfigured.
PAGE 1550
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1546 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax motd-banner no motd-banner • MESSAGE — Quoted text Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Line Configuration User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console(config-telnet)# motd-banner movemanagement Use the movemanagement command in Stack Global Configuration mode to move the Management Switch functionality from one switch to another.
PAGE 1551
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1547 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines Upon execution, the entire stack, including all interfaces in the stack, are unconfigured and reconfigured with the configuration on the new Management Switch. NOTE: The switch always starts up from the startup-config and not the runningconfig. To start up from the running-config, use the initiate failover command.
PAGE 1552
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1548 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines Nonstop forwarding allows the forwarding plane of stack units to continue to forward packets while the control and management planes restart as a result of a power failure, hardware failure, or software fault on the stack management unit. Example console(config)#nsf ping Use the ping command in User EXEC mode to check the accessibility of the desired node on the network.
PAGE 1553
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1549 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Examples The following example displays a ping to IP address 10.27.65.60 console#ping 10.27.65.60 Pinging 10.27.65.60 with 0 bytes of data: Reply From 10.27.65.60: icmp_seq = 0. time <10 msec. Reply From 10.27.65.60: icmp_seq = 1. time <10 msec. Reply From 10.27.65.60: icmp_seq = 2. time <10 msec. Reply From 10.27.65.60: icmp_seq = 3. time <10 msec.
PAGE 1554
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1550 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ----10.1.1.1 PING Statistics---4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip (ms) min/avg/max = 7/8/11 reload Use the reload command in Privileged EXEC mode to reload stack members. Syntax reload [stack–member–number] Parameter Description Parameter Description stack–member–number The stack member to be reloaded. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1555
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1551 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Reloading management switch 1. set description Use the set description command in Stack Global Configuration mode to associate a text description with a switch in the stack. Syntax set description unit description • unit — The switch identifier. (Range: 1–12) • description — The text description. (Range: 1–80 alphanumeric characters) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1556
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1552 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM supported cardtype) indicating the type of card being preconfigured in the specified slot. The card index is a 32-bit integer. If a card is currently present in the slot that is unconfigured, the configured information will be deleted and the slot will be reconfigured with default information for the card.
PAGE 1557
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1553 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines The card index (CID) can be obtained by executing the show supported cardtype command in User EXEC mode. show banner Use the show banner command to display banner information. Syntax show banner Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example console#show banner Banner:Exec Line Console.....................
PAGE 1558
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1554 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Line SSH.......................... Enable Line Telnet....................... Disable ===login===== Banner:MOTD Line Console...................... Enable Line SSH.......................... Enable Line Telnet....................... Enable ===motd===== show boot-version Use the show boot-version command to display the boot image version details. The details available to the user include the build date and time.
PAGE 1559
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1555 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 1 Thu Aug 30 12:01:04 2007 show checkpoint statistics Use the show checkpoint statistics command to display the statistics for the checkpointing process. Syntax show checkpoint statistics Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines When nonstop forwarding is enabled on a stack, the stack's management unit checkpoints operational data to the backup unit.
PAGE 1560
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1556 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show cut-through mode Use the show cut-through mode command to show the cut-through mode on the switch. Syntax show cut-through mode Command Mode Privileged EXEC Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. User Guidelines No specific guidelines.
PAGE 1561
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1557 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC User Guidelines This command is only applicable to 10G non-stacking interfaces. Example console#show interfaces advanced firmware Te3/2/1 Transceiver firmware part number........... BCM54680E Transceiver firmware revision...............
PAGE 1562
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1558 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM IP Address............................ 10.240.4.115 Subnet Mask........................... 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway....................... 10.240.4.1 IPv6 Prefix is ....................... FE80::20A:1EFF:FE11:1100/64 ServPort Configured Protocol Current...None Burned In MAC Address..................0006.2932.814C show memory cpu Use the show memory cpu command to check the total and available RAM space on the switch.
PAGE 1563
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1559 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show nsfUse the show nsf command to show the status of non-stop forwarding. Syntax show nsf Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example console#show nsf Administrative Status.......................... Enable Operational Status............................. Enable Last Startup Reason........................
PAGE 1564
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1560 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 2 Yes 3 Yes show power-usage-history Use the show power-usage-history command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the history of unit power consumption for the unit specified in the command and total stack power consumption. Historical samples are not saved across switch reboots/reloads.
PAGE 1565
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1561 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Sample No. Time Since Power Power The Sample Consumption Consumption Was Recorded On This Unit ------ -------------------- Per Stack (mWatts) (mWatts) ----------- ----------- 3 0d:00:00:13 56172 56172 2 0d:00:00:43 56172 56172 1 0d:00:01:12 54360 54360 show process cpu Use the show process cpu command to check the CPU utilization for each process currently running on the switch.
PAGE 1566
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1562 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ------ ---------free 64022608 alloc 151568112 CPU Utilization: PID Name 5 Sec 1 Min 5 Min --------------------------------------------------------328bb20 tTffsPTask 0.00% 0.00% 0.02% 3291820 tNetTask 0.00% 0.00% 0.01% 3295410 tXbdService 0.00% 0.00% 0.03% 347dcd0 ipnetd 0.00% 0.00% 0.01% 348a440 osapiTimer 1.20% 1.43% 1.21% 358ee70 bcmL2X.0 0.40% 0.30% 0.12% 359d2e0 bcmCNTR.0 0.80% 0.42% 0.
PAGE 1567
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1563 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM 6e23370 radius_task 0.00% 0.00% 0.01% 6e2c870 radius_rx_task 0.00% 0.06% 0.03% 7bc9030 spmTask 0.00% 0.09% 0.01% 7c58730 ipMapForwardingTask 0.00% 0.06% 0.03% 7f6eee0 tRtrDiscProcessingTask 0.00% 0.00% 0.01% b1516d0 dnsRxTask 0.00% 0.00% 0.01% b194d60 tCptvPrtl 0.00% 0.06% 0.03% b585770 isdpTask 0.00% 0.00% 0.02% bda6210 RMONTask 0.00% 0.11% 0.11% bdb24b0 boxs Req 0.00% 0.13% 0.
PAGE 1568
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1564 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays a list of open telnet sessions to remote hosts. console#show sessions Connection Host Address ---------- ------------ 1 Remote switch 172.16.1.1 23 2 172.16.1.2 172.16.1.2 23 ----------- Port ------ The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display.
PAGE 1569
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1565 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Admin State The slot administrative mode is enabled or disabled. Power State The slot power mode is enabled or disabled. Configured Card Model Identifier The model identifier of the card preconfigured in the slot. Model identifier is a 32-character field used to identify a card. Pluggable Cards are pluggable or non-pluggable in the slot.
PAGE 1570
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1566 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays sample output of the show slot command.
PAGE 1571
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1567 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Card Type The 32-bit numeric card type for the supported card. Model Identifier The model identifier for the supported card type. Card Description The description for the supported card type. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC User Guidelines The CID information is used when pre-configuring cards using the slot command.
PAGE 1572
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1568 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines The switch SID is used when pre-configuring switches in a stack using the member command in config-stack mode. Example The following example displays the information for supported switch types. console>show supported switchtype SID Switch Model ID Mgmt Code Pref Type ---------------------------------------------------------1 PCM8024 0x100b000 The following table describes the fields in the example.
PAGE 1573
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1569 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Expected Code Type................ 0x100b000 Supported Cards: Slot....................... 0 Card Index (CID)........... 3 Model Identifier............ PCM8024 console# The following table describes the fields in the example. Field Description Switch Type This field displays the 32-bit numeric switch type for the supported switch. Model Identifier This field displays the model identifier for the supported switch type.
PAGE 1574
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1570 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM The show switch command may show an SDM Mismatch value in the Switch Status field. This value indicates that the unit joined the stack, but is running a different SDM template than the management unit. This status should be temporary; the stack unit should automatically reload using the template running on the stack manager. Use the show supported switchtype command to display switch SIDs.
PAGE 1575
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1571 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Examples Example – Stack Status for the Switch The following example displays stack status information for the switch. console>show switch 1 Switch............................ 1 Management Status................. Management Switch Admin Management Preference....... 4 Switch Type....................... 0x73950001 Preconfigured Model Identifier....
PAGE 1576
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1572 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Unit Description Management Status This field indicates whether the switch is the Management Switch, a stack member, or the status is unassigned. Admin Management Preference This field indicates the administrative management preference value assigned to the switch. This preference value indicates how likely the switch is to be chosen as the Management Switch. Switch Type This field displays the 32-bit numeric switch type.
PAGE 1577
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1573 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console>show switch Switch Management Status Preconfig Model ID Plugged-in Switch Code Model ID Status Version ------------------------------------------------------------1 Mgmt Switch PCM8024 PCM8024 1.0.0.0 Different fields in the display are explained as follows: Unit Description Switch This field displays the unit identifier assigned to the switch.
PAGE 1578
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1574 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description NSF Administrative Status Whether nonstop forwarding is Enabled administratively enabled or disabled Disabled Enabled NSF Operational Status Indicates whether NSF is enabled on the stack. Enabled Disabled None Last Startup Reason The type of activation that caused the software to start the last time. There are four options. “Power-On” means that the switch rebooted.
PAGE 1579
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1575 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Range Status Whether the running configuration Current or Stale on the backup unit includes all changes made on the management unit. Time Since Last Copy When the running configuration was last copied from the management unit to the backup unit. Time Stamp Time Until Next Copy The number of seconds until the running configuration will be copied to the backup unit.
PAGE 1580
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1576 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Time Until Next Copy........................ 28 seconds Unit NSF Support ---- ----------- 1 Yes 2 Yes 3 Yes Per Unit Status Parameters are explained as follows: Parameter Description Range Default NSF Support Whether a unit supports NSF Yes or No — Example – Switch Firmware Stack Status The following example displays the Switch Firmware stack status information for the switch.
PAGE 1581
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1577 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Switch Status..................... OK Switch Description................ PowerConnect 7048 Expected Code Type................ 0x100b000 Detected Code Version............. 5.31.1.46 Detected Code in Flash............ 5.31.1.46 CPLD Version...................... 5 SFS Last Attempt Status........... None Serial Number..................... none Up Time...........................
PAGE 1582
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1578 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays system information. console#show system System Description: Dell Ethernet Switch System Up Time: 0 days, 22h:27m:32s System Contact: System Name: System Location: Burned In MAC Address: 0006.2932.8120 System Object ID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10895.
PAGE 1583
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1579 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console# show system id Use the show system id command in User EXEC mode to display the system identity information. Syntax show system id [unit] • unit — The unit number. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines The tag information is on a switch by switch basis. Example The following example displays the system service tag information.
PAGE 1584
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1580 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show system power Use the show system power command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode to display information about the system level power consumption. Syntax show system power Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1585
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1581 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show system temperature Use the show system temperature command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode to display information about the system temperature and fan status. Syntax show system temperature Parameter Description This command does not require a parameter description. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1586
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1582 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM (Celsius) ---- ----------- ----------- ------ 1 MAC 33 Good 1 PHY 24 Good Fans: Unit Description Status ---- ----------- ------ 1 Fan 1 OK 1 Fan 2 OK 1 Fan 3 OK show tech-support Use the show tech-support command to display system and configuration information for use in debugging or contacting technical support.
PAGE 1587
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1583 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show tech-support Parameter Ranges Not applicable Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode. Usage Guidelines Not applicable Default Value Not applicable Example console#show tech-support ***************** Show Version ****************** Switch: 2 System Description............................. PowerConnect 6248P, 1.23.0.33 VxWorks 6.5 Machine Type................................... PowerConnect 6248P Machine Model.............
PAGE 1588
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1584 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Software Version............................... 1.23.0.33 Operating System............................... VxWorks 6.5 Network Processing Device...................... BCM56314_A0 Additional Packages............................ QOS Multicast Stacking Routing ***************** Show SysInfo ****************** System Location................................ System Contact................................. System Object ID.................
PAGE 1589
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1585 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show users [ long ] Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays a list of active users and the information about them. console#show users Username Protocol Location -------- -------- ------------ Bob Serial John SSH 172.16.0.1 Robert HTTP 172.16.0.
PAGE 1590
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1586 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays a system version (this version number is only for demonstration purposes).
PAGE 1591
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1587 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example sets the mode to Stack Global Config. console(config)#stack console(config-stack)# stack-port NOTE: All of the stack-port commands in Stack Configuration mode are not supported by the PCM8024 and PCM8024-k switches.
PAGE 1592
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1588 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM NOTE: The show switch stack-port command in Stack Configuration mode is not supported by the PCM8024 and PCM8024-k switches.Use the show switch command to display information regarding the switches in a stack. Example console(config-stack)#stack-port tengigabitethernet 1/0/3 stack console(config-stack)# standby Use the standby command to configure the standby in the stack.
PAGE 1593
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1589 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM switch renumber Use the switch renumber command in Global Configuration mode to change the identifier for a switch in the stack. Upon execution, the switch is configured with the configuration information for the new switch, if any is available. The old switch configuration information is retained; however, the old switch will be operationally unplugged.
PAGE 1594
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1590 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description ip-address Valid IP address of the destination host. hostname Hostname of the destination host. (Range: 1–158 characters). The command allows spaces in the host name when specified in double quotes. For example, console(config)#snmp-server host "host name" port A decimal TCP port number, or one of the keywords from the port table in the usage guidelines (see Port Table below).
PAGE 1595
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1596
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1592 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example Following is an example of using the telnet command to connect to 176.213.10.50. console#telnet 176.213.10.50 Esc U sends telnet EL traceroute Use the traceroute command in Privileged EXEC mode to discover the IP routes that packets actually take when traveling to their destinations.
PAGE 1597
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1593 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • maxTtl — The largest TTL value that can be used (Range:1–255). • maxFail — Terminate the traceroute after failing to receive a response for this number of consecutive probes (Range: 0–255). • interval — The timeout period. If a response is not received within this period of time, then traceroute considers that probe a failure (printing *) and sends the next probe.
PAGE 1598
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1594 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Tracing route over a maximum of 20 hops 1 192.168.21.1 30 ms 10 ms 10 ms 2 * * * 3 * * * 4 * * * 5 * * * The following example uses the iterative process to obtain command parameters, and displays the routes that packets actually take when traveling to their destination. console#traceroute traceroute# Enter the ip-address | hostname : 192.168.77.
PAGE 1599
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1595 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Telnet Server Commands 81 The Telnet protocol (outlined in RFC 854) allows users (clients) to connect to multiuser computers (servers) on the network. Telnet is often employed when a user communicates with a remote login service. Telnet is the terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP suite. Telnet uses TCP as the transport protocol to initiate a connection between server and client.
PAGE 1600
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1596 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Ranges Not applicable Command Mode Global Configuration Usage Guidelines No specific guidelines. Default Value This feature is enabled by default. Example console#configure console(config)#ip telnet server disable console(config)# no ip telnet server disable ip telnet port The ip telnet port command is used to configure the Telnet service port number on the switch.
PAGE 1601
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1597 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example console(config)#ip telnet port 45 console(config)#no ip telnet port show ip telnet The show ip telnet command displays the status of the Telnet server and the Telnet service port number. Syntax show ip telnet Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Example (console)#show ip telnet Telnet Server is Enabled.
PAGE 1602
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1603
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1599 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Terminal Length Commands 82 This chapter provides information about terminal length commands. terminal length Use the terminal length command to set the terminal length. Use the no form of the command to reset the terminal length to the default. Syntax terminal length value no terminal length • value — The length in number of lines. Range: 0–512 Default Configuration This default value is 24.
PAGE 1604
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1605
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1601 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Time Ranges Commands 83 Time ranges are used with time-based ACLs to restrict their application due to specific time slots. This chapter explains the following commands: time-range periodic absolute show time-range time-range Use the time-range command in Global Configuration mode to create a time range identified by name, consisting of one absolute time entry and/or one or more periodic time entries.
PAGE 1606
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1602 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode Global Configuration User Guidelines The CLI mode changes to Time-Range Configuration mode when you successfully execute this command. Example console(config)#time-range timeRange_1 absolute Use the absolute command in Time Range Configuration mode to add an absolute time entry to a time range. Use the no form of this command to delete the absolute time entry in the time range.
PAGE 1607
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1603 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Time Range Configuration User Guidelines Only one absolute time entry is allowed per time-range. The time parameter is referenced to the currently configured time zone. Example console#time-range timeRange_1 console(Config-time-range)#absolute end 12:00 16 Dec 2010 periodic Use the periodic command to add a periodic time entry to a time range.
PAGE 1608
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1604 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Parameter Description Parameter Description days-of-the-week The first occurrence of this argument is the starting day or days from which the configuration that referenced the time range starts going into effect. The second occurrence is the ending day or days from which the configuration that referenced the time range is no longer in effect. If the end days-of-the-week are the same as the start, they can be omitted.
PAGE 1609
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1605 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM When both periodic and absolute time entries are specified within a time range, the periodic time entries limit the time range to only those times specified within the periodic time range and bounded by the absolute time range. In this case, the absolute time entry specifies the absolute start and end dates/times and the periodic entries specify the start/stop times within the limits of the absolute time entry dates and times.
PAGE 1610
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1606 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax show time-range [name] Parameter Description Parameter Description Number of Time Ranges Number of time ranges configured in the system. Time Range Name Name of the time range. Time Range Status Status of the time range(active/inactive). Absolute start Start time and day for absolute time entry. Absolute end End time and day for absolute time entry. Periodic Entries Number of periodic entries in a time-range.
PAGE 1611
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1607 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Absolute End Time.............................. 12:00 16 Dec 2010 Periodic Entries: 4 Entry Number: 2 Periodic Start Time............................ MON 00:00 Periodic End Time.............................. TUE 12:30 Entry Number: 3 Periodic Start Time............................ TUE 13:00 Periodic End Time.............................. WED 12:00 Entry Number: 4 Periodic Start Time............................
PAGE 1612
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1613
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1609 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Interface Commands 84 This chapter explains the following commands: enable mode simple end mode-change confirm exit quit enable Use the enable command in User EXEC mode to enter the Privileged EXEC mode. Syntax enable Default Configuration The default privilege level is 15.
PAGE 1614
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1610 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM end Use the end command to get the CLI user control back to the privileged execution mode or user execution mode. Syntax end Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode All command modes User Guidelines No specific guidelines.
PAGE 1615
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1611 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Command Mode All command modes. In User EXEC mode, this command behaves identically with the quit command. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example The following example changes the configuration mode from Interface Configuration mode to User EXEC mode to the login prompt.
PAGE 1616
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1612 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines The selected mode is valid if mode-change confirm is executed within 60 seconds. The selected mode is applied as operational mode on resetting the configuration to factory defaults. Example console(config)#mode simple Warning: Confirm mode selection within 60 seconds using “mode-change confirm” command. mode-change confirm Use the mode-change confirm command to confirm the mode selection.
PAGE 1617
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1613 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax quit Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC command mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command. Example The following example closes an active terminal session.
PAGE 1618
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1619
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1615 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Web Server Commands 85 If enabled, the PowerConnect is manageable via industry standard web browsers. User privilege levels are the same as for the CLI. Over 95% of the management functions are available via the web interface, including configuration and firmware upgrades. Web Sessions The HTTP protocol does not provide support for persistent connections.
PAGE 1620
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1621
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1617 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Crypto Certification mode User Guidelines This command mode is entered using the crypto certificate request or crypto certificate generate command. Example The following example displays how to specify the name of "router.gm.com." console(config-crypto-cert)#common-name router.gm.
PAGE 1622
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1618 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example displays how to specify the country as "us." console(config-crypto-cert)#country us crypto certificate generate Use the crypto certificate generate command in Global Configuration mode to generate a self-signed HTTPS certificate. Syntax crypto certificate number generate • number — Specifies the certificate number. (Range: 1–2) • generate — Regenerates the SSL RSA key.
PAGE 1623
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1619 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM console(config-crypto-cert)#email no-reply@dell.com console(config-crypto-cert)#location Round Rock console(config)#crypto certificate 1 generate console(config-crypto-cert)#organization-unit "PowerConnect Networking" console(config-crypto-cert)#organization-name "Dell, Inc.
PAGE 1624
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1620 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM The imported certificate must be based on a certificate request created by the crypto certificate request Privileged EXEC command. If the public key found in the certificate does not match the switch's SSL RSA key, the command fails.
PAGE 1625
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1621 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Finger print: DC789788 DC88A988 127897BC BB789788 crypto certificate request Use the crypto certificate request command in Privileged EXEC mode to generate and display a certificate request for HTTPS. This command takes you to Crypto Certificate Request mode. Syntax crypto certificate number request • number — Specifies the certificate number. (Range: 1–2) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1626
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1622 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM duration Use the duration command in Crypto Certificate Generation mode to specify the duration. Syntax duration days • days — Specifies the number of days a certification would be valid. If left unspecified, the parameter defaults to 365 days. (Range: 30–3650 days) Default Configuration This command defaults to 365 days.
PAGE 1627
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1623 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM • port-number — Port number for use by the HTTP server. (Range: 1–65535) Default Configuration This default port number is 80. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. However, specifying 0 as the port number effectively disables HTTP access to the switch. Example The following example shows how the http port number is configured to 100.
PAGE 1628
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1624 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example enables the switch to be configured from a browser. console(config)#ip http server ip http secure-certificate Use the ip http secure-certificate command in Global Configuration mode to configure the active certificate for HTTPS. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.
PAGE 1629
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1625 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip http secure-port Use the ip http secure-port command in Global Configuration mode to configure a TCP port for use by a secure web browser to configure the switch. To use the default port, use the no form of this command. Syntax ip http secure-port port-number no ip http secure-port Parameter Description Parameter Description port-number Port number for use by the secure HTTP server.
PAGE 1630
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1626 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Syntax ip http secure-server no ip http secure-server Default Configuration The default for the switch is disabled. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines You must import a certificate using the crypto certificate import command, followed by the crypto certificate generate command. Example The following example enables the switch to be configured from a browser.
PAGE 1631
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1627 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM User Guidelines This command mode is entered using the crypto certificate request command. Example The following example displays how to specify that you want to regenerate the SSL RSA key 1024 byes in length. console(config-crypto-cert)#key-generate 1024 location Use the location command in Crypto Certificate Generation or Crypto Certificate Request mode to specify the location or city name.
PAGE 1632
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1628 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM organization-unit Use the organization-unit command in Crypto Certificate Generation or Crypto Certificate Request mode to specify the organization unit. Syntax organization-unit organization-unit • organization-unit — Specifies the organization-unit or department name. (Range: 1–64 characters) Default Configuration This command has no default configuration.
PAGE 1633
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1629 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode Example The following example displays the SSL certificate of a sample switch.
PAGE 1634
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1630 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip http server status Use the show ip http server command in User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode to display the HTTP server status information. Syntax show ip http server status Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords. Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines.
PAGE 1635
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1631 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Default Configuration This command has no default configuration. Command Mode User EXEC, Privileged EXEC modes User Guidelines This command has no user guidelines. Example The following example displays an HTTPS server configuration with DH Key exchange enabled. console#show ip https HTTPS server enabled. Port: 443 DH Key exchange enabled. Certificate 1 is active Issued by: www.verisign.
PAGE 1636
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1632 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM DH Key exchange disabled, parameters are being generated. Certificate 1 is active Issued by: www.verisign.com Valid from: 8/9/2003 to 8/9/2004 Subject: CN= router.gm.com, 0= General Motors, C= US Finger print: DC789788 DC88A988 127897BC BB789788 Certificate 2 is inactive Issued by: self-signed Valid from: 8/9/2003 to 8/9/2004 Subject: CN= router.gm.
PAGE 1637
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1633 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Example The following example shows how to specify the state of "texas.
PAGE 1638
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1639
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1635 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Appendix A: List of Commands {deny | permit} (IPv6 ACL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 802.1x Advanced Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 802.1x Advanced Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791 802.1x Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763 802.1x Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1640
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1636 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM area nssa no-redistribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073 area nssa no-redistribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147 area nssa no-summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073 area nssa no-summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148 area nssa translator-role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1641
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1637 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM arp timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805 arp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 asset-tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1534 assign-queue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 authentication timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1642
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1638 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Captive Portal User Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301 captive-portal client deauthenticate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286 captive-portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273 CDP Interoperability Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 channel-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 Class of Service (CoS) .
PAGE 1643
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1639 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM clear isdp counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 clear isdp table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 clear lldp remote-data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 clear lldp statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 clear logging email statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1644
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1640 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM cos-queue random-detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 cos-queue strict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617 crypto certificate generate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1618 crypto certificate import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1645
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1641 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM debug isdp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453 debug lacp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453 debug mldsnooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454 debug ospf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455 debug ospfv3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1646
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1642 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM dhcp l2relay trust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 dhcp l2relay vlan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 DHCP Layer 2 Relay Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 DHCP Management Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 DHCP Server and Relay Agent Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 DHCP Snooping Commands . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1647
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1643 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM dot1x reauthentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773 dot1x system-auth-control monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773 dot1x timeout guest-vlan-period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774 dot1x timeout quiet-period. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775 dot1x timeout re-authperiod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1648
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1644 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Ethernet CFM Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 ethernet cfm domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 ethernet cfm mep active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 ethernet cfm mep archive-hold-time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 ethernet cfm mep enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1649
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1645 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM history size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374 history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374 host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 hostname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540 hostroutesaccept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1650
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1646 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip address-conflict-detect run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP Addressing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ip arp inspection filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ip arp inspection limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ip arp inspection trust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1651
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1647 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 ip http authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 ip http port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622 ip http secure-certificate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624 ip http secure-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1652
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1648 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip igmp version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881 ip igmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875 ip igmp-proxy reset-status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890 ip igmp-proxy unsolicited-report-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891 ip igmp-proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1653
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1649 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip pim dr-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025 ip pim hello-interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 ip pim join-prune-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027 ip pim register-rate-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027 ip pim rp-address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1654
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1650 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ip vrrp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238 IPv6 Access List Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 ipv6 access-list rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 ipv6 access-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 ipv6 address dhcp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1655
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1651 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ipv6 mld snooping querier query-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 ipv6 mld snooping querier timer expiry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 ipv6 mld snooping querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ipv6 mld-proxy reset-status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967 ipv6 mld-proxy unsolicit-rprt-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968 ipv6 mld-proxy. . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1656
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1652 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM ipv6 pim join-prune-interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944 ipv6 pim register-rate-limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945 ipv6 pim rp-address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946 ipv6 pim rp-candidate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947 ipv6 pim sparse (Global config) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1657
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1653 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM isdp enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 isdp holdtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 isdp timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1658
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1654 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM lldp transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 lldp transmit-mgmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 lldp transmit-tlv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 Local 802.1X Authentication Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763 locale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1659
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1655 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM mac address-table multicast forward-all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 mac address-table multicast forward-unregistered . . . . . . . . 266 mac address-table multicast static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 mac address-table static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 MAC Authentication Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764 MAC-Based VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1660
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1656 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM match source-address mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 match srcip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 match srcip6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 match srcl4port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 match vlan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1661
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1657 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM name (VLAN Configuration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 netbios-name-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828 netbios-node-type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829 network area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1662
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1658 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM password (Mail Server Configuration Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 password (User EXEC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Password Aging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389 Password History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389 Password Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389 Password Strength . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1663
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1659 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Port Aggregator Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 Port Channel Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 Port Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 Port Monitor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 port security max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1664
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1660 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Real-time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315 redirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283 redirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 redirect-url . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284 redistribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1665
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1661 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 service dhcp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836 service dhcpv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850 service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Serviceability Tracing Packet Commands . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1666
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1662 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show captive-portal configuration status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300 show captive-portal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297 show captive-portal interface client status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288 show captive-portal interface configuration status . . . . . . . . 1290 show captive-portal status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277 show captive-portal user . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1667
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1663 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show dvlan-tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728 show ethernet cfm domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 show ethernet cfm errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 show ethernet cfm maintenance-points local . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 show ethernet cfm maintenance-points remote . . . . . . . . . . . 420 show ethernet cfm statistics . . . . .
PAGE 1668
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1664 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip dhcp pool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 show ip dhcp relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911 show ip dhcp server statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840 show ip dhcp snooping binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 show ip dhcp snooping database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1669
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1665 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip interface out-of-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557 show ip interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926 show ip irdp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210 show ip mcast boundary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035 show ip mcast mroute group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1670
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1666 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ip rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224 show ip route preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932 show ip route summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933 show ip route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930 show ip source binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1671
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1667 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show ipv6 ospf abr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184 show ipv6 ospf area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185 show ipv6 ospf asbr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186 show ipv6 ospf border-routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187 show ipv6 ospf database database-summary . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190 show ipv6 ospf database .
PAGE 1672
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1668 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show iscsi sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 show iscsi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 show isdp entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 show isdp interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 show isdp neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1673
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1669 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show mvr interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 show mvr members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 show mvr traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 show mvr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 show parser macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1674
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1670 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show snmp filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476 show snmp group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477 show snmp user. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1478 show snmp views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1480 show snmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1675
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1671 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM show vlan association mac. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736 show vlan association subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737 show vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735 show voice vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760 show vrrp interface brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1676
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1672 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Spanning Tree Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 spanning-tree auto-portfast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 spanning-tree bpdu flooding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 spanning-tree bpdu-protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691 spanning-tree cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1677
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1673 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Static LAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 Static Reject Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916 Static Routes/ECMP Static Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915 storm-control broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 storm-control multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1678
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1674 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM traceroute ethernet cfm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 traceroute ipv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 traceroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1592 traffic-shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 tunnel destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1679
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1675 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM vlan association mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748 vlan association subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748 VLAN Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 vlan database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749 vlan makestatic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 1680
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1681
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.
PAGE 1682
2CSPC4.XModular-SWUM200.book Page 1682 Thursday, March 10, 2011 11:18 AM Printed in the U.S.A. w w w. del l . co m | s upp ort . del l .